GENEX Probe User Guide V200R003 04

GENEX Probe
V200R003
User Guide
Issue 04
Date 2011-02-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Overview
The document provides the guidelines for installing and using the GENEX Probe (hereinafter
referred to as Probe) and methods for collecting the test data, analyzing the test data in real time,
and replaying the test data.
Product Version
The following table lists the product and version related to this guide.
Product Name Product Version
GENEX Probe V200R003

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network design engineers
l Network monitoring engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
04 (2011-02-15)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with 03 (2010-08-10), this version has the following modifications:
GENEX Probe
User Guide About This Document
iii
Content Description
2.5 Recommended Device List New
7.1 Connectable External Devices Added terminals.
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices
Automatically
New
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing
Function Test
New
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is
Displayed in the WCDMA View
Windows?
New
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into
UARFCNs (WCDMA)?
New
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the
Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei
U1251 Is Invalid?
New
14.5 PSTN SQE Server New

03 (2010-08-10)
This is the second commercial release.
Content Description
2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe The content descriptions are changed.
2.3 Main Interface of the Probe The content descriptions are changed.
8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test The content descriptions are changed.
13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE? New
Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells The content descriptions are changed.

02 (2010-06-25)
This is the first commercial release.
Content Description
1 New Features of the Probe V200R003 The content descriptions are changed.
About This Document
GENEX Probe
User Guide
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Content Description
7.2 Plugging in External Devices The content descriptions are changed.
8.4 Designing Test Plans The content descriptions are changed.
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests
(GSM/WCDMA)
The content descriptions are changed.
11.3 IP Analysis New
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to
Access the Network During the LTE
Forcing Feature Test?
New
14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs The content descriptions are changed.

01 (2010-04-14)
This is the first release. It is prepared for the Beta test version of V200R003.
Organization
1 New Features of the Probe V200R003
This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003.
2 Overview of the Probe
The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface
of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and
LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network
optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air
interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis
after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the
later data replaying.
3 Installing the Probe
This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation
of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as
prompted by the installation wizard.
4 Starting the Probe
Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon.
5 Managing the Map Window
The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such
as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add
a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map
window.
6 Managing Engineering Parameters
GENEX Probe
v
This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the
Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of
base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various
technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters.
7 Connecting External Devices
Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe,
so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe
to replay data, you need not connect external devices.
8 Collecting Data
The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices
and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed
with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be
plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map
files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data.
9 Managing Logfiles
During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how
to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles.
10 Managing View Windows
This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of
view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer
2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows.
11 Typical Application
This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe.
12 Interface Reference of the Probe
This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when
you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe.
13 FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding
causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills.
14 Appendix
This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard
shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view
data through the Probe.
15 Technical Support
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
About This Document
GENEX Probe
User Guide
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
GENEX Probe
vii
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
About This Document
GENEX Probe
User Guide
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 New Features of the Probe V200R003.....................................................................................1-1
1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01.....................................................................................................1-2
1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00.....................................................................................................1-2
2 Overview of the Probe...............................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Introduction to the Probe.................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe............................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.............................................................................................................................2-7
2.4 Working Mode of the Probe..........................................................................................................................2-18
2.5 Recommended Device List...........................................................................................................................2-19
2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)..................................................................................2-19
2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)....................................................................................................2-21
2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX).............................................................................................2-21
2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List.................................................................................................................2-22
3 Installing the Probe....................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe.........................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Installing Shared Components........................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Plugging in a Dongle.......................................................................................................................................3-8
4 Starting the Probe.......................................................................................................................4-1
5 Managing the Map Window....................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps...........................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Importing Maps...............................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps.................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3 Adding Layers.................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 Configuring Layer Properties..........................................................................................................................5-6
5.5 Configuring Legend Properties.......................................................................................................................5-8
6 Managing Engineering Parameters........................................................................................6-1
6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems................................................................6-2
6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters..................................................................................................................6-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide Contents
ix
7 Connecting External Devices...................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Connectable External Devices.........................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Plugging in External Devices........................................................................................................................7-11
7.3 Configuring External Devices.......................................................................................................................7-12
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically......................................................................................7-12
7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually..............................................................................................7-13
7.4 Enabling External Devices............................................................................................................................7-16
7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected................................................................................................................7-17
7.6 Configuring Device Alarms..........................................................................................................................7-18
8 Collecting Data...........................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Data Collection Process..................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection...............................................................................................................8-3
8.3 Creating a Project............................................................................................................................................8-4
8.4 Designing Test Plans.......................................................................................................................................8-5
8.5 Performing a Test Plan....................................................................................................................................8-7
8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)........................................................................................................8-8
8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test.....................................................................................................................8-9
8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test.................................................................................................................8-10
8.5.4 Monitoring the Test..............................................................................................................................8-11
8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans..............................................................................................................................8-11
9 Managing Logfiles.....................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Recording Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Segmenting Logfiles.......................................................................................................................................9-3
9.3 Replaying Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-3
9.4 Exporting Logfiles...........................................................................................................................................9-5
10 Managing View Windows....................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events....................................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Browsing Data.............................................................................................................................................10-2
10.3 Configuring the View Window...................................................................................................................10-3
10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View.......................................................................................................10-3
10.3.2 Configuring the List View..................................................................................................................10-4
10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View...............................................................................................................10-5
10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View.......................................................................................................10-5
11 Typical Application...............................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)...................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test...................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test.................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server............................11-4
11.2 Forcing Function Tests................................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements................................................................................................11-7
Contents
GENEX Probe
User Guide
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning..............................................................................................11-8
11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test.....................................................................................11-9
11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test............................................................................11-11
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test....................................................................................11-13
11.3 IP Analysis................................................................................................................................................11-14
12 Interface Reference of the Probe.........................................................................................12-1
12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window....................................................................................12-4
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window...................................................12-6
12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window...........................................................................................12-8
12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window............................................................................................12-13
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View......................................................................................................12-17
12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View....................................................................................................12-18
12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices...........................................................................................12-19
12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data................................................................................................12-25
12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items...............................................................................................12-26
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test........................................................................................................12-26
12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters...........................................................................12-27
12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map.................................................................................12-29
12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties.................................................................................12-30
12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties......................................................................12-32
12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event...........................................................................................12-34
12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm........................................................................................12-35
12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications...........................................................................................12-36
12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings......................................................................................................12-36
12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views.................................................................12-38
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View........................................................12-40
12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM........................................................................12-41
12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test......................................................................................12-42
12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test.................................................................................12-43
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM..............................................................12-44
12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data..........................................................................................................12-45
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner......................................................12-51
13 FAQs.........................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start............................................................................................................13-2
13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?........................................................13-2
13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?...........................................................................13-3
13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?............................................................................13-3
13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program..................................................................................................13-3
13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components...........................................................................13-4
13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections...................................................................................................13-4
13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails?......................................................13-5
13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails?...............................................13-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide Contents
xi
13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?....................................................13-6
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC?.......13-6
13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals?......................13-7
13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?..........................................................................................................13-7
13.3 Problems Related to Views.......................................................................................................................13-10
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?.................................................................13-11
13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?...............................................................13-11
13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails?...............................................13-11
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?...............................13-12
13.4 Problems Related to Tests.........................................................................................................................13-13
13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?...........................................................................13-13
13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?......................................................13-15
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test?
.....................................................................................................................................................................13-16
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?.............................................................13-16
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?.................13-17
14 Appendix..................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Description of Test Items............................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks.....................................................................................14-2
14.1.2 Test Items of MSs..............................................................................................................................14-6
14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners..........................................................................................................14-60
14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners........................................................................................................14-65
14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners.......................................................................................14-91
14.2 Description of Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-92
14.2.1 General Events.................................................................................................................................14-93
14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events...................................................................................................................14-94
14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events............................................................................................................14-98
14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-121
14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events...........................................................................................................14-126
14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events..................................................................................................................14-130
14.3 Description of Information Elements......................................................................................................14-131
14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs...............................................................................................14-132
14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs........................................................................................14-148
14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs...........................................................................................14-167
14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs.........................................................................................14-191
14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs................................................................................................14-228
14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners.................................................................................................14-273
14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements...............................................................................14-276
14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements.........................................................................14-282
14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements...................................................................................................14-282
14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................................................14-283
14.5 PSTN SQE Server...................................................................................................................................14-284
Contents
GENEX Probe
User Guide
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server...............................................................................................14-285
14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................................14-295
14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server................................................................................................................14-301
14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-306
14.5.5 FAQs..............................................................................................................................................14-309
14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server..............................................................................................14-311
14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server..................................................................................14-313
15 Technical Support..................................................................................................................15-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide Contents
xiii
Figures
Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test.......................................................................................1-3
Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test.....................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server......................................1-4
Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe.............................................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe................................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar................................................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar...................................................................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-5 Navigation pane................................................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface...............................................................2-17
Figure 2-7 System status bar..............................................................................................................................2-17
Figure 3-1 Customer Information.........................................................................................................................3-6
Figure 5-1 Cell layer.............................................................................................................................................5-2
Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box...........................................................................................................7-13
Figure 7-2 The example of COM port..............................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port...........................................................................................................7-15
Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window............................................................................................................12-4
Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window...........................................................................12-6
Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window....................................................................................................................12-8
Figure 12-4 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-12
Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window.....................................................................................................................12-13
Figure 12-6 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-16
Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view.......................................................................................................12-17
Figure 12-8 Line Chart window.....................................................................................................................12-18
Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable...............................................................................................................................13-8
Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host................................................................................................13-9
Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)......................................................................................................13-17
Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)...................................................................................13-17
Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-287
Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink.................................................................................................14-287
Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink............................................................................................14-288
Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................14-290
Figure 14-5 Customer Information.................................................................................................................14-297
Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface.........................................................................................................14-306
GENEX Probe
User Guide Figures
xv
Tables
Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe.................................................................................2-3
Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe.................................................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe....................................................................................2-8
Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe............................................................................................2-8
Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu..........................................................................................................2-9
Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu..........................................................................................................2-9
Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu............................................................................................2-10
Table 2-8 Description of the View menu...........................................................................................................2-10
Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu.............................................................................................................2-11
Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu....................................................................................................2-11
Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu..........................................................................................................2-12
Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar..................................................................................................2-13
Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar......................................................................................................2-14
Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab................................................................................2-15
Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab....................................................................2-16
Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar.................................................................................................2-17
Table 2-17 Device status description..................................................................................................................2-18
Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe....................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe.....................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder.............................................................................................3-7
Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals..................................................................................7-2
Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals...............................................................................................7-7
Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals.............................................................................................7-8
Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals....................................................................................................7-9
Table 8-1 Data collection procedure.....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices.................................................................................................8-4
Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window................................................................................12-4
Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar...................................................................12-5
Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window...............................................12-6
Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window..................................12-7
Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window.......................................................................................12-9
Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar...........................................................................12-9
Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window.......................................................................................12-12
GENEX Probe
User Guide Tables
xvii
Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window........................................................................................12-14
Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar............................................................................12-14
Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window.....................................................................................12-16
Table 12-11 Description of the test data view..................................................................................................12-17
Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window.......................................................................................12-19
Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected....................................................................................................13-13
Table 13-2 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-14
Table 13-3 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-15
Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item....................................................................................................14-30
Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters......................................................................................................................14-30
Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server...........................................................14-287
Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink..................................................................................................14-288
Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink..............................................................................................14-288
Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................................14-289
Table 14-7 Description of the main interface.................................................................................................14-290
Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar.........................................................................................................14-291
Table 14-9 Description of the File menu........................................................................................................14-291
Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu....................................................................................14-291
Table 14-11 Description of the View menu...................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu.....................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu....................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar...........................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface...................................................14-293
Table 14-16 Operation procedures.................................................................................................................14-294
Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................14-295
Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server......................................................................14-296
Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface...........................................................................14-306
Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar............................................................................14-307
Table 14-21 Fault cause..................................................................................................................................14-310
Tables
GENEX Probe
User Guide
xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
About This Chapter
This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003.
1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01
This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C01.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003
1-1
Configuring External Devices Automatically
For details, see 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically.
New Test Terminals
The new test terminals of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows:
l GSM/WCDMA
Huawei U1280-5
Huawei U8220
Huawei U8226
Huawei U7519
Huawei U7517
Huawei U3220
Huawei E1823 Card
Huawei E372u-8 Card
l LTE
Huawei UE 2.2
Huawei B390
Huawei E398 Card
For details, see Test Terminal.
New Scanners
The new scanners of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows:
l PCTel PCT-505 (WCDMA)
l PCTel PCT-520 (GSM/WCDMA)
Compared with Probe V200R002, the new features of Probe V200R003C00 are as follows:
l Supporting the WiMAX Beceem test and LTE TDD/FDD test.
l Supporting the enhanced speech quality evaluation test. For details, see Speech Quality
Evaluation Test.
l Supporting more test items. For details, see New Test Items.
l Supporting more forcing function tests. For details, see New Forcing Functions.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l Supporting the settings of the size of the TCP window. For details, see Setting the Size of
the TCP Window.
l Supporting more models of test terminals. For details, see New Test Terminals.
Speech Quality Evaluation Test
Based on Probe V200R002, Probe V200R003 enhances the speech quality evaluation tests. The
speech quality evaluation tests are categorized into the following types:
l Synchronous speech quality evaluation test
One Probe is configured with the two PHU terminals. The Probe performs the synchronous
speech quality evaluation test by enabling a PHU terminal to call the other PHU terminal.
During the test, the calling PHU terminal plays speech samples and the called PHU terminal
records result files so that the uplink and downlink MOSs are obtained. For details, see
Figure 1-1. In this case, only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal needs to be
configured.
l Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test
The Probe is installed on two PCs. Each Probe is configured with a PHU terminal. The
Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the two PHU
terminals to call each other. During the test, the calling and called PHU terminals record
and play speech files alternatively so that each Probe records the MOS. For details, see
Figure 1-2. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called PHU terminals need to be
configured separately.
l Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server
For two PCs, one is configured with the Probe that is configured with a PHU terminal, and
the other is configured with the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe performs the speech quality
evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal
to call the PSTN SQE Server or the PSTN SQE Server to call the PHU terminal. During
the test, the calling party plays voices and the called party records voices so that the MOS
is obtained. For details, see Figure 1-3. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called
parties need to be configured separately.
Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test

GENEX Probe
1-3
Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test

Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server

New Test Items
The new test items of Probe V200R003 are as follows:
l GSM/WCDMA
Email, which indicates the email sending test.
Multi-FTP, which indicates that a test terminal performs the FTP download and upload
tests at the same time.
Async SQE(MS-MS), which indicates the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test.
AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS), which indicates the AMR end-to-end delay test.
l WiMAX
NetSearch, which indicates the WiMAX Beceem frequency scan test.
l LTE
Frequency Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC spectrum scan test.
Cell Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC cell scan test.
Iperf, which indicates the LTE TCP or UDP network performance test.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
New Forcing Functions
l GSM nonvolatile parameter setting
l GSM frequency scan test
l WCDMA UARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests
l LTE EARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests
Setting the Size of the TCP Window
You can change the size of the TCP window to decrease the delay in the data transmission.
The size of the TCP window can be set in System Configure.
New Test Terminals
The new test terminals of Probe V200R003 are as follows:
l GSM/WCDMA
Huawei U6100 PHU
Huawei U1251 PHU
Huawei E270+ Card
l WiMAX
Huawei Beceem BM328
Huawei Beceem BM338
Huawei Sequans BM358
l LTE
Huawei UE 1.0
Huawei UE 1.1
Huawei UE 2.0
For details, see Test Terminal.
GENEX Probe
1-5
About This Chapter
The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface
of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and
LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network
optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air
interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis
after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the
later data replaying.
2.1 Introduction to the Probe
The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test
function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate.
2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe
This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan,
signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect,
view, and analyze the test data of the air interface.
2.3 Main Interface of the Probe
This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar,
navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by
using the Probe.
2.4 Working Mode of the Probe
The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The
other is for replaying and analyzing data.
2.5 Recommended Device List
This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 2 Overview of the Probe
2-1
2.1 Introduction to the Probe
The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test
function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate.
Features
The features of the Probe are as follows:
l Supports the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems.
l Supports multiple device types, including:
Multiple types of test terminals.
Multiple types of scanners.
Multiple types of GPS.
l Supports multiple tests of the voice service and the data service, including the voice service
test, scanner test, data service test, and concurrent test of the voice and data service.
l Supports multiple speech quality evaluation tests.
For details, see 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003.
l Supports forcing function test.
For details, see 11.2 Forcing Function Tests.
l Supports the geographic display of the wireless measurement data.
The Probe can dynamically display the test parameters, test routes, and neighboring
connection line and display events by using graphics. In addition, the Probe supports the
geographic display of the MapInfo map, raster map, and site information.
l Supports recording and saving logfiles in real time and replaying the test procedure through
the replay function. In addition, during the test, the logfiles can be sliced to facilitate the
management of the logfiles recorded in different time segments.
l Supports displaying key events in real time, such as handover and call drops during the
test. The statistics of key events and KPIs in real time during the test facilitates the detection
of problems.
l Supports the data view synchronization of the message view, map view, and event view
facilitate the problem location and analysis.
Application Scenarios
The Probe can be used at every stage of the network lifecycle, such as the network planning,
network construction, network capacity expansion, and network optimization.
l Exploring propagation environment
During the network planning, the Probe uses the scanner to perform the continuous wave
(CW) test to obtain the test data of the radio signal space fading in typical running
environment. The data can be used to calibrate propagation models and function as a guide
to the network planning.
l Performance test and evaluation
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
During network construction and capacity expansion, you can evaluate the network
performances by the Probe. The evaluation result functions as a guide to adjusting and
optimizing network parameters.
l Network problem identification
During the network maintenance or optimization, the test process can be replayed through
the replay function of the Probe. The network problems can be quickly identified through
the replay function of the Probe and the post-processing data analysis software (such as
GENEX Assistant).
System Structure
The Probe system consists of the test terminal, scanner, GPS, PC installed with the Probe, and
dongle. It supports simultaneous testing on the test terminal, scanner, and GPS. During the test,
up to six test terminals, one scanner, and one GPS can be connected to the PC.
Figure 2-1 shows the system structure of the Probe. Table 2-1 describes the physical entities
shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe

Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe
Physical Entity Description
PC Refers to a desktop or laptop. The PC is used to install the main program
of the Probe, the GENEX shared components, and the driver of certain
devices to provide the data test platform of the air interface. In addition,
the PC can be connected to the GPS, scanner, test terminal, or dongle
through the serial port, USB port, IEEE 1394 port, or ethernet port.
Dongle Refers to the hardware device with the license information. The dongle
is used to control the usage rights to the Probe.
GPS The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks.
Scanner Refers to the scanner. The scanner can record the spectrum of the air
interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for observation.
GENEX Probe
2-3
Physical Entity Description
Test terminal Refers to the MS or PC card.

2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe
This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan,
signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect,
view, and analyze the test data of the air interface.
Table 2-2 describes the basic concepts of the Probe.
Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe
Basic
Concepts
Description Remarks
External
device
The external device refers to the test terminal, scanner,
and Global Positioning System (GPS).
l Test terminal
The test terminal includes the test mobile phone
and PC card.
l Scanner
The scanner can record the spectrum of the air
interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for
observation.
l GPS
The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks.
For types and
specifications of the
external device
supported by the
Probe, see 7.1
Connectable
External Devices.
Logfile The logfile is the record of the collected information
during the drive test. During the drive test, the test data
can be saved in a file, and the file is called logfile
(a .gen file). Through the logfile, you can replay the
test procedure. This facilitates observing and
analyzing the data.
When recording a logfile, the Probe automatically
saves a .tab file with the same name with the logfile.
The .tab file is used to store GPS information.
-
Project The Probe manages test items based on projects. You
can configure multiple external devices and other
system parameters and design the test plan for one
project.
-
Test plan The test plan is a customized test task and consists of
test items provided by the Probe. You can design test
plan for the test terminal and scanner according to your
requirements to guide the test of each data service and
voice service during the drive test.
For the test items
provided by the Probe,
see 14.1 Description
of Test Items.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Basic
Concepts
Description Remarks
Indoor test The difference between the indoor test and the outdoor
test lies in the methods of obtaining the test tracks. In
the case of the outdoor test, the test tracks are obtained
through the dot trace by the GPS. In the case of the
indoor test, the test tracks are obtained through the
manual dot trace.
The indoor test consists of horizontal test and vertical
test.
l In the case of the horizontal test, the fixed points
are selected according to the floor plan of the
equipment room. The horizontal test consists of
automatic test and manual test.
The automatic test is performed according to the
tracks entered beforehand. The manual test is
performed by manually controlling the tracks of
points.
l In the case of the vertical test, the signal distribution
in the vertical direction between floors is tested.
-
Statistic
Report of
Event
By using the air interface message or Layer2/Layer3
signaling, the Probe can judge the events in accordance
with the event definition rules and help in locating
radio network problems.
The Probe provides predefined events of the system.
Through the event view window, you can browse the
predefined events of the system or check the events in
the map view.
For the predefined
events provided by the
Probe, see 14.2
Description of
Predefined Events.
Device
alarm
During the drive test, when the device is unexpectedly
disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak,
the Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode.
You can set alarm events for special situations and
alarm modes.
-
Message The message provided by the Probe refers to the air
interface message, generally the layer 2 message and
the layer 3 message. In the message view window, you
can browse air interface messages or the messages
from various protocols or events.
-
Air
interface
parameter
s
Air interface parameters refer to the information
elements (IEs) of the test terminal. The air interface
parameters of each network protocol are displayed in
the air interface parameter view or map view in digital
or text mode.
For the air interface
parameters that can be
collected by the Probe,
see 14.3 Description
of Information
Elements.
Data
service
The session of the data service can be performed
through the setup of the Packet Switched (PS)
connection.
-
GENEX Probe
2-5
Basic
Concepts
Description Remarks
Voice
service
The voice service or the video call service can be tested
through the setup of the Circuit Switched (CS)
connection.
-
Data view The data view is used to display the test data. The data
views provided by the Probe include the IE view,
message view, event view, map view, KPI statistic
view, and GPS view.
These data views are displayed on the Probe in chart,
list, text, line chart, or mixed mode.
-
Engineeri
ng
parameter
s
Engineering parameters include base station (BS)
engineering parameters, BS technical parameters,
antenna parameters, and neighboring cell parameters.
After the engineering parameters are imported, the
system can find the information about the best matched
site in time and consider the engineering parameters as
network parameters for analysis.
For the engineering
parameters supported
by the Probe, see 6.1
Engineering
Parameters
Supported in
Different Network
Systems.
Map The map consists of a series of map elements and
involves the MapInfo map and the raster map. The map
information is displayed in the map window on the
Probe. The map information involves the test area, test
routes, events, and engineering parameters.
l MapInfo Map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and
each layer is saved in a file. The files supported by
the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format.
A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for
map layers and saves the configurations including
layer order, labels, and legends.
l Raster map
The entire raster map can be considered as a layer.
The raster map supported by the Probe is
in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format.
-
Layer A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window.
There are two main types of layers: map layers and
indicator layers.
l A map consists of multiple map layers.
l An indicator layer consists of events, IEs, and cells.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a
map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the
map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering
parameters.
-
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Basic
Concepts
Description Remarks
Label The labels indicates the objects in various layers of
maps in text form. The objects include field names of
engineering parameters in cell layers, IE values and
numbers in IE layers, and names of buildings in
building layers.
-
Filemark The filemark is used to record the geographic
information about the test location in texts. The
geographic information includes the features of
buildings and interference source.
The filemarks can be displayed as events in view
windows. You can search for filemark events to locate
the filemark area during the data replay.
-

2.3 Main Interface of the Probe
This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar,
navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by
using the Probe.
Figure 2-2 shows the interface after the Probe is started. Table 2-3 describes the items shown
in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe
GENEX Probe
2-7

Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe
No. Name Description
1 Menu bar Displays the main menu of the system. For details, see
Menu Bar.
2 Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For
details, see Toolbar.
3 Navigation
pane
Provides shortcut icons for the main operations of the
system. For details, see Navigation Pane.
4 Operation
interface
Displays different view windows and configuration
interfaces. For details, see Operation Interface.
5 Status bar of
the operation
interface
Displays the worksheet that is added by users. For details,
see Operation Interface.
6 System status
bar
Displays the status information about the system,
including the current status of the system and the device.
For details, see System Status Bar.

Menu Bar
The menu bar of the Probe shows the main menu of the system. The menus on the menu bar are
arranged according to the main functions of the Probe to facilitate your operations.
Table 2-4 describes the menu bar of the Probe and the corresponding functions.
Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe
Main Menu Description
Project Provides entries for operations related to the project
management. For details, see Table 2-5.
Logfile Provides entries for operations related to the
management of the logfile. For details, see Table 2-6.
Configuration Provides entries for operations such as configuring
external devices, engineering parameters, test plans,
and the system. For details, see Table 2-7.
View Provides entries for operations related to the view
Test Provides entries for certain basic operations during data
collection. For details, see Table 2-9.
Window Provides entries for operations such as arranging view
windows. For details, see Table 2-10.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Help Provides entries for the system help and operations
related to the license management. For details, see
Table 2-11.

Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu
Menu Item Description
New Enables you to create a project.
Open Enables you to open a project under a specified path.
Open From Enables you to open projects of different types.
The menu items are as follows: Site Verification,
Optimize, Benchmark, Acceptance, and Customize.
Close Enables you to close the project that is opened
currently.
Remove Enables you to delete a project.
Save Enables you to save a project.
Save As Enables you to save the current project as another one.
Exit Enables you to exit the main program of the Probe.

Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu
Open Logfile Enables you to open a logfile.
Close Logfile Enables you to close a logfile.
Play Enables you to replay a logfile.
Pause Enables you to pause the logfile replay.
Stop Enables you to stop the logfile replay.
Speed Up Enables you to accelerate the replay of a logfile.
Speed Down Enables you to slow down the replay of a logfile.
Export Data Enables you to convert the test data format.

GENEX Probe
2-9
Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu
Device Configure Enables you to configure external devices.
Engineering Parameter
management
Enables you to manage engineering parameters.
Test Plan Control Enables you to design a test plan.
System Configure Enables you to set configuration items of the system.

Table 2-8 Description of the View menu
Toolbars Enables you to set whether to display the standard
toolbar, replay toolbar, and navigation pane. By
default, these items are displayed.
Status Bar Enables you to set whether to display the system status
bar. By default, the system status bar is displayed.
GSM Enables you to open the view of GSM/GPRS air
interface parameters.
WCDMA Enables you to open the view of WCDMA air interface
parameters.
CDMA Enables you to open the view of CDMA2000 1X/EV-
DO air interface parameters.
WiMAX Enables you to open the view of WiMAX air interface
parameters.
LTE Enables you to open the view of LTE air interface
parameters.
GPS Enables you to open the GPS view.
Service Quality Enables you to open the view of data service
parameters.
MOS Enables you to open the view of speech quality
evaluation.
Statistic Enables you to open the event statistics view and KPI
statistics view.
Message Enables you to open the Layer 2 or Layer 3 message
view.
Event List Enables you to open the event list view.
Information Enables you to open the information view.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
OutdoorMap Enables you to open the outdoor map view.
IndoorMap Enables you to open the indoor map view.
Scanner Enables you to open the scanner view.
Custom Line Chart Enables you to open the line chart view.

Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu
Start Test Plan Enables you to start a test plan.
Stop Test Plan Enables you to stop a test plan.
Start Record Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording.
Pause Record Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording.
Slice Record Enables you to slice a logfile.
File Mark During the test, the Probe records the geographic
information about the test location in texts and
automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The
geographic information includes the features of
buildings and interference source. During the data
replay or data analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the
user-concerned area based on the Filemark event.
This menu is available after the Probe starts the DT
logfile recording.
Forcing Function Enables you to controls a terminal to perform the
forcing feature test, including the GSM, WCDMA, and
LTE forcing feature test, GSM Carrier-to-Adjacent
(CA) measurement, and GSM NV parameter setting.
LTE Send Command Enables you to control a LTE terminal to perform the
demodulation reference signal (DMRS) frequency
hopping test.
For details about the hopping group information, see
Radio Parameters.

Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu
Cascade Enables you to arrange view windows in cascade mode.
GENEX Probe
2-11
Tile Horizontally Enables you to arrange view windows in horizontal tile
mode.
Tile Vertically Enables you to arrange view windows in vertical tile
mode.
Close All Enables you to close all the view windows of the
currently active worksheet.

NOTE
The Window menu enables the system to display the names of the opened view windows of the currently
active worksheet.
Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu
Contents Enables you to open the Help of the Probe.
License Info Enables you to view the license information.
Update License Enables you to update the license.
View ESN Enables you to obtain the electronic serial number
(ESN).
Check License Enables you to check whether the dongle is connected
properly.
About Probe Enables you to view the version information about the
Probe.
Tech Support Enables you to view the technical support information.

Toolbar
The toolbar on the main interface of the Probe consists of the standard toolbar and the replay
toolbar. By clicking the icon on the toolbar, you can switch to the corresponding interface or
perform the corresponding operation quickly.
l Standard toolbar
Figure 2-3 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 2-12 describes the icons shown
in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
NOTE
You can choose View > Toolbars > Standard to set whether to display the standard toolbar.
Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar
Icon Name Description
New Project Enables you to create a project.
Open Project Enables you to open a project in .xml format.
Save Enables you to save the current project.
External
Device
Configuratio
n
Enables you to configure external devices.
Auto
Connect
Enables the Probe to automatically connect to an external
device added in the Device Configure dialog box so that
the external device can be used.
Disconnect Enables the Probe to disconnect an external device added
in the Device Configure dialog box.
Test Plan
Control
Enables you to design a test task. In the Test Plan
Control dialog box displayed after you click this icon, you
can design test plans, configure test items, and view the
execution status of the test items.
Map
Window
Management
Enables you to open the OutdoorMap window.
Engineering
Parameter
Management
Enables you to open the Engineering Parameter
management window.
Record Start/
Stop
Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording.
When the logfile recording is started, this icon becomes the
icon.
Record
Pause/
Resume
Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording. If
KPIs are required to be evaluated, it is recommended that
you do not pause the logfile recording.
When the logfile recording is paused, this icon becomes the
icon.
Record
Segment
Enables you to slice a logfile. If you click this icon, the
system closes the currently recorded logfile and creates a
new logfile to slice the corresponding logfile while
performing the ongoing tests.
GENEX Probe
2-13
Filemark During the test, the Probe records the geographic
information about the test location in texts and
automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The
geographic information includes the features of buildings
and interference source. During the data replay or data
analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the user-concerned
area based on the Filemark event.
This icon is available after the Probe starts the DT logfile
recording.
Start Test
Plan
Enables you to start a test plan.
Stop Test
Plan
Enables you to stop a test plan.
Online Help Enables you to open the Help of the Probe.

l Replay toolbar
Figure 2-4 shows the icons on the replay toolbar. Table 2-13 describes the icons shown in
Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar

NOTE
You can choose View > Toolbars > Replay to set whether to display the replay toolbar.
Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar
Open Logfile Enables you to open a drive test
file in .gen format.
Play Logfile Enables you to replay a logfile.
This icon is available only after a
logfile is opened.
Pause Logfile Playing Enables you to pause the logfile
replay.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Stop Playing Logfile Enables you to stop the logfile
replay.
Stopping the logfile replay does
not close the logfile. You can
choose Logfile > Close Logfile to
close a logfile.
Locate Enables you to search for an event
in a logfile and find the location
where the event occurs on the
map.
Replay rate drop-
down list box
Enables you to adjust the replay
speed. The range is from 1/8-
speed to 32-speed.
Slide bar Enables the logfile to be replayed
from a specified position.
CAUTION
The Probe does not count the key
events or KPIs when you move the
slide bar.

Navigation Pane
The navigation pane, located in the left pane of the main interface, provides shortcut icons for
the main operations of the system. The navigation pane consists of four tabs, namely, Project,
Control, Configuration, and View, as shown in Figure 2-5.
Click in the upper right corner of the navigation pane to hide the navigation pane.
Figure 2-5 Navigation pane
l Project tab
Table 2-14 describes the shortcut icons under this tab.
Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab
Icon Description
Enables you to create a project.
GENEX Probe
2-15
Icon Description
Enables you to open the project file in the
following path: software installation path
\Projects\Site Verification.
\Projects\Optimize.
Enables you to open the benchmark project file in
the following path: software installation path
\Projects\Benchmark.
\Projects\Acceptance.
\Projects\Customize.

l Control tab
l Configuration tab
Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab
Icon Description
Enables you to configure external devices. After
you click this icon, the Device Configure dialog
box is displayed for you to configure external
devices.
Enables you to design a test plan. After you click
this icon, the Test Plan Control dialog box is
displayed for you to design a test plan.
Enables you to set configuration items of the
system. After you click this icon, the System
Configure dialog box is displayed for you to
modify the pre-defined event attributes, alarm
mode when the device is abnormal, and attributes
of the logfile.

l View tab
The icons under this tab provide operation entries for various view windows, engineering
parameter windows, and test plan control windows. For details, see Table 2-8.

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Operation Interface
The operation interface is used to display various view windows and configuration windows.
The operation interface consists of multiple worksheets. You can add multiple worksheets as
required.
Right-click the status bar of the operation interface shown in Figure 2-2. Then, you can add,
delete, or rename a worksheet through the options displayed in the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface

System Status Bar
The system status bar, located at the bottom of the main interface, displays the current status of
the system and the device, as shown in Figure 2-7. For descriptions on the Figure 2-7, see Table
2-16.
Figure 2-7 System status bar

Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar
(1) Menu description This area displays the function description of a menu
when the menu is in use.
(2) System status This area displays the current status of the system. The
status can be Idle, Testing, or Replay.
GENEX Probe
2-17
(3) Device status This area displays the connection status of the
currently configured devices. If you place the mouse
pointer on the status indicator, the name of the device
that the indicator stands for is displayed. Different
colors represent different status, as shown in Table
2-17.
l indicates the MS.
l indicates the GPS.
l indicates the Scanner.

Table 2-17 Device status description
Icon Meaning
Red indicator:
l The external device is connected to the PC properly but the
connection displayed on the Probe is broke down or abnormal.
l The external device is disconnected from the PC or the connection
to the PC is abnormal.
The green indicator indicates that the external device connected to the
PC and the connection displayed on the Probe is normal.
The yellow indicator indicates that the signals of the external device
are insufficient or the device is in the Searching state.

2.4 Working Mode of the Probe
The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The
other is for replaying and analyzing data.
The Probe can work in the following working modes:
l Drive test mode
By working with the test terminal and other external devices, the Probe collects the air
interface data and records the test data (saving the test data in logfiles). During the data
collection, you can also observe the test data in real time.
For details, see 8 Collecting Data.
l Replay mode
The Probe reads the test data from logfiles and replays logfiles for inspection and analysis.
During the replay, you can adjust the replay speed and assign the replay start point to
facilitate the problem identification and analysis.
For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
NOTE
The minimum replay rate and the maximum rate supported by the Probe are 1/8 and 32 times of the
test rate.
The preceding two working modes are mutually exclusive:
l When the system is in the drive test mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the
replay mode, the test must be stopped before the logfile is opened.
l When the system is in the replay mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the
drive test mode, the replay must be stopped and the logfile must be closed before the external
device is connected to the Probe.
2.5 Recommended Device List
This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners.
2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)
This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the
features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards.
2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)
This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these
LTE data cards.
2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX)
This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these
WiMAX data cards.
2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List
This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these
scanners.
2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)
This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the
features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards.
NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
Recommended terminal list (GSM/WCDMA)
Feature/Terminal U6100 U1251 U1280-5
GSM 850
GSM 900
GSM 1800
GSM 1900
WCDMA 850
GENEX Probe
2-19
Feature/Terminal U6100 U1251 U1280-5
WCDMA 900
WCDMA 1900
WCDMA 2100
WCDMA AWS
EDGE
HSDPA (Mbit/s)
HSUPA (Mbit/s)
External Antenna
Video Phone
SQE(MS-MS)
SQE(MS-PSTN)
GSM Cell Locking
GSM Forced
Handover/Prohibited
Handover

GSM ARFCN/Band
Locking

GSM CBA Turnover
GSM Frequency
Scan

WCDMA UARFCN
Locking

WCDMA
Scrambling Code
Locking

Recommended data card list (GSM/WCDMA)
Feature/Data Card E372u-8
GSM 850
GSM 900
GSM 1800
GSM 1900
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Feature/Data Card E372u-8
WCDMA 850
WCDMA 900
WCDMA 1900
WCDMA 2100
WCDMA AWS
HSDPA (Mbit/s) 21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s) 5.76
MIMO
MIMO+64QAM
HSPA+
DC-HSPA+ 42
PC Voice

2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)
This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these
LTE data cards.
NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
Feature/Data Card Huawei B390 Huawei E398
2100
2650
900
800
Band 64 TDD

2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX)
This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these
WiMAX data cards.
GENEX Probe
2-21
NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
Feature/Data Card Huawei Sequans
BM358
Seowon GCT
SWU3120
Seowon GCT
SWU3220
2.3 (GHz)
2.5 (GHz)
3.5 (GHz)
External Antenna
MIMO
FFR

2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List
This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these
scanners.
NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
Feature/Scanner PCTEL SeeGull Ex TSMQ/TSML
GSM 850 (MHz)
GSM 900 (MHz)
GSM 1800 (MHz)
GSM 1900 (MHz)
WCDMA 850 (MHz)
WCDMA 900 (MHz)
WCDMA 1900 (MHz)
WCDMA 2100 (MHz)
WCDMA AWS (MHz)
WiMAX 2.3 (GHz)
WiMAX 2.5 (GHz)
WiMAX 3.5 (GHz)
CW
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Feature/Scanner PCTEL SeeGull Ex TSMQ/TSML
RSSI Scanning
GSM Scanning
Spectrum Analysis
TopN Pilot Scanning
(WCDMA)

TopN Preamble Index
Scanning (WiMAX)

External Antenna
External GPS

GENEX Probe
2-23
About This Chapter
This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation
of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as
prompted by the installation wizard.
Context
After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that
you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe
Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The
installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The
software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the
requirement for the installation.
3.2 Installing Shared Components
The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing.
Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe.
3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program
The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active
during the test.
3.4 Plugging in a Dongle
The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series
products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the
computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech
quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 3 Installing the Probe
3-1
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe
Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The
installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The
software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the
requirement for the installation.
Hardware Requirements of the Probe
Table 3-1 lists the hardware requirements for the PC.
Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe
Configuration
Item
Configuration Requirement
CPU It is recommended that the processor be Intel 1.8 GHz Dual-Core.
Memory The minimum memory is 1 GB and it is recommended that the memory
be 2 GB or larger.
Hard disk It is recommended that the free hard disk space be 10 GB or larger.
PC port l If a scanner is connected to the PC, one USB port, one serial port,
or one IEEE 1394 port is required.
l If a test terminal is connected to the PC, at least one USB port, one
USB hub, one serial port, or one PCI slot is required.
l If a GPS is connected to the PC, one USB port or one serial port is
required.
l If a dongle is connected to the PC, at least one USB port is required.
Operating System Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 7

Software Requirements of the Probe
Table 3-2 lists the software and the corresponding configurations required for the drive test.
Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe
Configuration
Item
Obtaining Method Configuration
Requirement
Remarks
Operating system - Microsoft Windows XP or
Microsoft Windows 7
Mandatory
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Configuration
Item
Obtaining Method Configuration
Requirement
Remarks
Operating software - Microsoft Office 2003 or
Microsoft Office 2007
If the
Microsoft
Office is not
installed, the
engineering
parameter
file in xls or
xlsx format
cannot be
imported.
GENEX Probe
V200R003C01
software installation
package
l Download the
software package
from http://
support.huawei.co
m.
l Obtain from the
GENEX Probe
V200R003C01
software
installation CD-
ROM.
The user must have an
account for the http://
support.huawei.com. In
addition, the user must be
authorized to download the
GENEX Probe
V200R003C01 software
installation package or the
user purchased the GENEX
Probe V200R003C01.
Mandatory
Software installation
package of the
GENEX shared
components
l Download the
software package
from http://
support.huawei.co
m.
l Obtain from the
GENEX Probe
V200R003C01
software
installation CD-
ROM.
The user must have an
account for the http://
addition, the user must be
authorized to download the
software installation
package of the GENEX
shared components or the
user purchased the GENEX
Probe V200R003C01.
If the
GENEX
Shared
components
are not
installed, the
Probe cannot
be used
normally.
License The license is
integrated in the
dongle.
The GENEX Probe
V200R003C01 is
purchased.
If the dongle
is not
installed,
only the
replay
function of
the Probe can
be used.

3.2 Installing Shared Components
The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing.
Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe.
GENEX Probe
3-3
Context
If the computer is already installed with the Probe before, you need not to install the Shared
components again. For an upgrade version of the Probe, the GENEX Shared components also
need to be upgraded. Therefore, you need to install an upgraded GENEX Shared components if
you install an upgrade version of the Probe.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the installation program of GENEX Shared components.
If ... Then ...
The installation program is downloaded from
http://support.huawei.com.
Decompress the downloaded package
and perform Step 2.
The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe
V200R003 is available.
Perform Step 2.
Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes.
Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish.
Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are successfully installed.
Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. In the displayed Add or Remove
Programs window, check whether the software information about the GENEX Shared
components is listed.
If ... Then ...
The software information about the
GENEX Shared components is listed.
The GENEX Shared components are installed
successfully.
The software information about the
GENEX Shared components is not listed.
Perform Step 1 through Step 6.
----End
3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program
The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active
during the test.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Prerequisite
Get the Probe installation program ready and check whether the computer meets the hardware
requirements for installing the Probe. For details about the hardware requirements, see 3.1
Preparations Before Installing the Probe.
Context
During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You
can install the two softwares according to your requirements. If you need to perform the speech
quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink, you must install the PSTN SQE Server. For
details about the PSTN SQE Server, see the corresponding user guide.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 installation program.
If ... Then ...
and perform Step 2.
V200R003C01 is available.
Perform Step 2.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license
agreement.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 3-1, specify User Name and Company Name.
GENEX Probe
3-5
Figure 3-1 Customer Information

NOTE
l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe.
l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Select the installation mode.
l Complete: Installs the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server at a time.
l Custom: Refers to the custom installation mode. You can choose to install the PSTN SQE
server.
Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory.
Step 10 Click Next.
If ... Then ...
The Complete installation mode is used Perform Step 11.
The Custom installation mode is used
1. In the displayed dialog box, select Probe.
2. Click Next.
3. Perform Step 11.
Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or
No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now.
Step 12 Check whether the Probe is installed successfully.
Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
Probe and check whether the shortcut for the Probe exists.
If ... Then ...
The shortcut for the Probe exists. The Probe is installed successfully.
The shortcut for the Probe does not exist. Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.
After the Probe main program is installed, the generated Probe installation folder is in a structure
described in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder
Folder Description
Probe 2.3 Bin Fonts Saves the fonts used by the Probe.
HelpManual Saves the help documents.
Language Saves the supported language resources.
MsgDecoder Saves the data used for decoding.
PLUGIN Saves the plug-ins supported by the Probe.
SQE Saves the sample files and the destination files
of the speech quality evaluation test.
Voice Saves the voice files.
Config Saves the system configuration files.
EventConfig Saves the configuration files that serve as the
principle for event handling.
Log Saves the logfiles recording history
operations.
Map Saves the map files.
GENEX Probe
3-7
Folder Description
Projects Save project files. By default, the following
folders are contained:
l Acceptance: Saves the project files for
acceptance tests.
l Benchmark: Saves the project files for
benchmark tests.
l Customize: Saves the customized project
files.
l Optimize: Saves the project files for
optimization tests.
l Site Verification: Saves the project files
for site verification tests.
Temp Saves the temporary files.
Template Saves the templates of projects and
engineering parameters.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that
you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
3.4 Plugging in a Dongle
Procedure
Step 1 Plug in the dongle.
If ... Then ...
The software is being used for the first time
and the dongle is available.
Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC.
The dongle expires. Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a
valid license and update the license for the
dongle.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program.
Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN.
Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license.
Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days.
Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle.
1. On the main interface, choose Help > Update License.
2. In the Open dialog box, select the new license.
3. Click Open.
4. In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
CAUTION
When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding
software is plugged into the computer.
Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed.
You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes:
l Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com
l GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM
GENEX Probe
3-9
4 Starting the Probe
Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon.
Procedure
l Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
Probe to open the main interface of the Probe.
For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.
l Double-click to open the main interface of the Probe.
----End
GENEX Probe
User Guide 4 Starting the Probe
4-1
About This Chapter
The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such
as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add
a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map
window.
Context
l To open an indoor map window, choose View > IndoorMap.
l To open an outdoor map window, choose View > OutdoorMap.
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps
This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform
relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps.
5.2 Importing Maps
You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner,
you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data.
5.3 Adding Layers
This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and
event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data.
5.4 Configuring Layer Properties
Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display
properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the
labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust
the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset
properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer
properties is temporary and is not saved in projects.
5.5 Configuring Legend Properties
Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE
legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the
map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe
displays IEs according to the default legend.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 5 Managing the Map Window
5-1
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps
This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform
relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps.
Map
The map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map.
The map information is displayed in the map window on the Probe. The map information
includes the map information about the test area, test routes, events, and engineering parameters.
l MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The files
supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special
type of workspace used for map layers and saves the configurations including layer order,
labels, and legends.
l Raster map
The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the
Probe is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format.
Layer
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map
layers and indicator layers.
l A map consists of multiple map layers.
l An indicator layer includes the information related to events, IEs, and cells.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water
areas on the map; a cell layer (see Figure 5-1) contains multiple engineering parameters.
Figure 5-1 Cell layer
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Label
Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each layer in the map window. For
example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and indexes of the
IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer.
5.2 Importing Maps
You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner,
you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data.
Context
After the Probe is installed, the system automatically installs the world map. If no other maps
are imported, the system displays the world map by default each time you open the outdoor map
window.
If engineering parameters are imported, the Probe automatically loads the engineering
parameters and displays them as a layer of the map after you open the outdoor map window.
The indoor map window and the outdoor map window are mutually exclusive. Therefore, you
must close the outdoor map window before opening the indoor map window. Similarly, you
must close the indoor map window before opening the outdoor map window.
5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps
The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers,
and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can
import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map
view.
5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps
Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor
test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.
The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers,
and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can
import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map
view.
Procedure
l Import a MapInfo map.
1. Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click
OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area.
2. In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the icon.
3. Select one or more outdoor map files in .tab format or .gst format.
You can select multiple map files by holding down Ctrl.
GENEX Probe
5-3
4. Click Open.
l Import a raster map.
1. Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click
OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area.
2. In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the icon.
3. Select a .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png file and then click Open.
4. In the Raster Image dialog box, click on the map to add a reference point.
NOTE
The imported raster map does not contain geographical information; therefore, reference points
must be added for determining geographic locations on the map.
5. In the Add Control Point dialog box, enter the name of the reference point, longitude,
latitude, and location information. Click OK.
6. Perform Step 4 through Step 5 repeatedly to add at least three reference points. The
reference points should not be in the same line.
7. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can add layers or configure the display properties of layers in an active outdoor map. For
details, see 5 Managing the Map Window.
Related References
12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window
12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map
Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor
test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > IndoorMap from the system menu, or double-click IndoorMap on the View
tab page in the navigation area.
Step 2 In the IndoorMap window displayed, click the icon.
Step 3 Choose a .tif file or a .bmp file.
Step 4 Click Open.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can add layer or configure the legends properties of the layer in an active indoor map. For
details, see 5 Managing the Map Window.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Related References
12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window
5.3 Adding Layers
This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and
event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data.
Prerequisite
l If you want to add map layers, the map files in .tab format must be ready.
l If you want to add counter layers, make preparations as follows:
If you want to add IE layers and event layers, external devices must be configured.
If you want to add cell layers, engineering parameters must be imported.
Context
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layer, namely,
map layer and counter layer.
Map layers form the map. Counter layers consist of information about event, IE, cell, alarm, and
GPS counters. A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the
roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the type of layers to be added.
If you need to... Then ...
Add map layers Perform Step 2 through Step 6.
Add counter layers Perform Step 7 through Step 9.
Step 2 In the outdoor map window, click or right-click in the map display area and then choose
Layer Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Add.
Step 4 Select one or more .tab files, and then click Open.
NOTE
You are advised to add only necessary layers such as base stations, test routes, and main roads on the map.
Step 5 Optional: In the Layer Control dialog box, click Up or Down to move a layer forward or
backward.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, click .
GENEX Probe
5-5
Step 8 In the Add Layer dialog box, select the layers to be added.
Step 9 Click OK.
----End
5.4 Configuring Layer Properties
Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display
properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the
labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust
the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset
properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer
properties is temporary and is not saved in projects.
Prerequisite
l If you want to configure the properties of cell layers, ensure that engineering parameters
are imported.
l If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a test, ensure that external
devices are configured.
l If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a replay, ensure that the
logfile used for the replay contains the information about external devices.
Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed
Information window.
Context
l Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each type of layer in a map.
For example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and numbers
of the IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer.
For the GSM system, the BTSName and BTSID can be labeled for the base station. By
default, engineering parameter fields BTSName and BCCHNO are labeled.
For the WCDMA system, the NodeBName and NodeBID can be labeled for the base
station. By default, engineering parameter fields NodeBName and P-SC are labeled.
For the CDMA system, the Site Name and Site ID can be labeled for the base station.
By default, engineering parameter fields Site Name and PN are labeled.
For the WiMAX system, the BS Name and BS ID can be labeled for the base station.
By default, engineering parameter fields BSName and Preamble Index are labeled.
For the LTE system, the eNodeBName and eNodeBID can be labeled for the base
station. By default, engineering parameter fields eNodeBName and PCI are labeled.
l The map projection refers to the method of projecting the points on the spheroid earth to
the plane coordinates.
The projection varies with layers, and thus a standard is required to normalize the projection,
namely, to adjust the map projection.
l Layer offset refers to the method of making an offset of certain distance on an IE layer in
the longitude or latitude direction so that the objects on each layer can be displayed clearly.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Procedure
l Configuring layer display properties
1. In the outdoor map window, click or right-click the map, and then choose Layer
Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Layers area, select a layer for which the display properties are to be configured.
3. In the Properties area, select Visible to display the selected layer on the map.
4. Click Display to configure the display properties of this layer.
For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties
Dialog Box.
5. After the configuration is complete, click OK. The Layer Control dialog box is
displayed.
6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 until the display properties of all the required layers are
configured.
7. In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK.
l Configuring layer label properties
You can configure layer label properties by using either of the following methods:
In the outdoor map window, click , and then configure layer label properties in the
Cell Label Setting dialog box.
You can choose to label a base station field or the imported engineering parameter fields.
In the outdoor map window, click or right-click the map, and then choose Layer
Control from the shortcut menu. Configure the layer label properties in the Layer
Control dialog box.
For details, see Step 1 through Step 6.
1. In the Layers area of the Layer Control dialog box, select a layer for which the label
properties are to be configured.
2. In the Properties area, select Visible and Automatic Labels to display the labels of
the selected layer on the map.
3. Click Labels to configure the label properties of this layer.
For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Label Properties
Dialog Box.
4. After the configuration is complete, click OK. Then, the Layer Control dialog box
is displayed.
5. Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 until the label properties of all the required layers are
configured.
6. In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK.
The labels of the configured layers are displayed in the map.
l Adjusting the projection of a map layer
1. In the outdoor map window, right-click the map, and then choose Projection from
the shortcut menu. The Choose Projection dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a projection mode from the Category drop-down list and select an adjustment
mode in the Category Members area.
3. Click OK.
GENEX Probe
5-7
l Configuring the offset properties of IE layers
1. In the Map Layers window of an indoor or outdoor map view, right-click the IE layer,
and then choose Offset Layer from the shortcut menu. The Layer Offset dialog box
is displayed.
2. Set the offset.
For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters for Configuring the
Layer Offset.
3. After the configuration is complete, click OK.
----End
Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE
legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the
map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe
displays IEs according to the default legend.
Prerequisite
l If you want to configure IE legend properties during a test, ensure that the MS is configured.
l If you want to configure IE legend properties during a replay, ensure that the logfile used
for the replay contains the information about the MS.
Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed
Information window.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, select an IE layer.
Step 2 Click the or right-click the IE layer, and then choose Edit Layer from the shortcut menu.
The Layer Parameter dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the relevant parameters in the Layer Parameter dialog box.
For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog
Box.
Step 4 After the configuration is complete, click OK.
----End
Related References
12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
About This Chapter
This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the
Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of
base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various
technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters.
6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems
This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in
different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering
parameters of different network protocol.
6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters
You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the
engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported
BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 6 Managing Engineering Parameters
6-1
6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different
Network Systems
This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in
different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering
parameters of different network protocol.
l For details on GSM engineering parameters, see GSM Engineering Parameters.
l For details on WCDMA engineering parameters, see WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
l For details on CDMA engineering parameters, see CDMA Engineering Parameters.
l For details on WiMAX engineering parameters, see WiMAX Engineering Parameters.
l For details on LTE engineering parameters, see LTE Engineering Parameters.
The default saving path of the engineering parameters is as follows: Software Installation
Directory\Template\Engineering Parameters.
GSM Engineering Parameters
Field Description Value Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
Azimuth Azimuth (degree)
Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
360. Yes
CI Cell ID
Data type: double. Range: 0 to
65535. Yes
LAC Location area code
65535. Yes
BCCHNo
Absolute radio frequency
channel number of the
broadcast control channel
1023. Yes
Longitude Longitude (degree)
Data type: double. Range: -180.0
to 180.0. Yes
Latitude Latitude (degree)
Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to
90.0. Yes
BTSID
Base transceiver station
(BTS) ID Data type: character string. No
BTSName BTS name Data type: character string. No
CellName Cell name Data type: character string. No
CGI Cell global identification Data type: character string. No
TCHList Traffic channel (TCH) list Data type: character string. No
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ory (Yes/
No)
BSIC
Base station identity code,
consisting of network color
code (NCC) and base station
color code (BCC)
Data type: character string. Range
of the NCC and BCC: 0 to 7. No
AntHeight Antenna height Data type: float. No
MechTilt
Machine downTilt angle
(degree) Data type: float. No
ElecTilt Electronic downTilt (degree) Data type: float. No
Altitude Antenna altitude Data type: float. No
GprsSuppo
rt
Indicates whether the general
packet radio service (GPRS)
is supported Data type: character string. No
Polarizatio
n Polarization type Data type: character string. No
AntGain Antenna gain Data type: float. No
FreqBand Band Data type: character string. No
EdgeSupp
ort
Indicates whether the EDGE
is supported Data type: character string. No
FH Mode Frequency hopping mode Data type: character string. No
SiteConfig NodeB Type Data type: character string. No
City City Data type: character string. No
Region Region Data type: character string. No
BTSType NodeB type
Data type: character string. Value:
Macrocell and Microcell. No
AntType Antenna type Data type: character string. No
BSCName
Base station controller (BSC)
name Data type: character string. No
ProjectPha
se
Indicates to which phase the
project belongs Data type: character string. No
RAC Routing area code
65535. No
MA Mobile allocation Data type: character string. No
TMAType
Tower amplification (TMA)
type Data type: character string. No
GENEX Probe
6-3
ory (Yes/
No)
TMAGain TMA gain Data type: integer. No

WCDMA Engineering Parameters
ory (Yes/
No)
CellID Cell ID Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
65535.
Yes
UARFCN Carrier frequency point Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
20000.
Yes
P-SC Primary scrambling code Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
511.
Yes
Azimuth Azimuth (degree) Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
360.
Yes
Longitude Longitude Data type: double. Range: -180.0
to 180.0.
Yes
Latitude Latitude Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to
90.0.
Yes
RNCID Radio network controller
(RNC) ID
255.
No
NodeBID NodeB ID Data type: character string. No
NodeBNa
me
NodeB name Data type: character string. No
NodeBTyp
e
NodeB type Data type: character string. Value:
Macrocell and Microcell.
No
SectorID Sector ID Data type: character string. No
DownTilt Downtilt (degree) Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No
E-
DownTilt
Internal E-downTilt (degree) Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No
M-
DownTilt
(degree)
Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No
GroudHeig
ht
Antenna height above the
ground
Data type: float. No
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ory (Yes/
No)
AntennaTy
pe
Antenna type Data type: character string. No
AntennaG
ain
Antenna gain Data type: float. No
H-
Beamwidt
h
Width of horizontal half-
power beam
V-
Beamwidt
h
Width of vertical half-power
beam
FeederTyp
e
Feeder type Data type: character string. No
FeederLen
gth
Feeder length Data type: float. No
NodeBCE Number of NodeB CEs Data type: integer. No
ActiveStat
us
Cell status (active or not) Data type: character string. No
Outdoor Outdoor station Data type: character string. No
TMA Tower mounted amplifier Data type: character string. No

CDMA Engineering Parameters
ory
(Yes/
No)
PN Pseudo-random number Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
511.
Yes
to 180.0.
Yes
90.0.
Yes
Azimuth Azimuth (degree) Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
360.
Yes
Cell ID Cell ID Data type: integer. Yes
GENEX Probe
6-5
ory
(Yes/
No)
ARFCN Frequency number Data type: integer. Yes
Sector ID Sector ID Data type: integer. Yes
DownTilt Downtilt (degree) Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 90. No
Site ID Site ID Data type: integer. No
Site Name Site name Data type: character string. No
Carrier ID Carrier ID Data type: integer. No
SID System ID Data type: integer. No
NID Network ID Data type: integer. No
Antenna
Height
Antenna height (m) Data type: integer. No
BeamWidt
h
Angle of the horizontal lobe
(degree)
Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 90. No

WiMAX Engineering Parameters
ory (Yes/
No)
BSID Base station ID, including
Operator ID and Sector ID
Data type: character string. Yes
to 180.0.
Yes
90.0.
Yes
Freq Frequency (kHz) Data type: integer. Yes
Azimuth Azimuth of an antenna
(degree)
360.
Yes
Preamble
Index
Preamble index,
corresponding to Segment
and Cell ID
114.
Yes
FA Index Frequency allocation index Data type: integer. No
Operator
ID
Operator ID corresponding to
BSID
Data type: integer. No
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ory (Yes/
No)
Sector ID Sector ID Data type: integer. No
Cell ID Cell ID Data type: integer. No
Cell Name Cell name Data type: character string. No
BS Name Base station name Data type: character string. No
Antenna
Height
Antenna height (m) Data type: integer. No
DownTilt Azimuth of an antenna
(degree)
Data type: double. Range: 0 to 90. No
Angle Width of the antenna main
lobe (degree)
360, where, 0 indicates the
omnidirectional antenna.
No
PermBase PermBase in the cell Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 33. No

LTE Engineering Parameters
Field Description Value Mandato
ry (Yes/
No)
eNodeBID LTE eNodeB ID Data type: character string. Yes
eNodeBNa
me
LTE eNodeB name Data type: character string. Yes
SectorID Sector ID Data type: character string. Yes
Local
CellID
Local cell ID Data type: character string. Yes
CellID Cell ID Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
533.
Yes
UARFCN Carrier frequency point Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
20000.
Yes
PCI ID of the primary cell Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
503.
Yes
to 180.0.
Yes
Latitude Latitude Data type: double. Range: -90.0
to 90.0.
Yes
GENEX Probe
6-7
Field Description Value Mandato
ry (Yes/
No)
Azimuth Azimuth (degree) Data type: float. Range: 0 to 360. Yes
eNodeBTy
pe
LTE eNodeB type Data type: character string. No
DownTilt Downtilt (degree) Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No
E-
DownTilt
Internal E-downTilt (degree) Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. No
M-
DownTilt
(degree)
GroudHei
ght
Antenna height above the
ground
Data type: float. No
AntennaT
ype
Antenna type Data type: character string. No
AntennaG
ain
Antenna gain Data type: float. No
H-
Beamwidt
h
Width of horizontal half-
power beam
V-
Beamwidt
h
Width of vertical half-power
beam
FeederTyp
e
Feeder type Data type: character string. No
FeederLen
gth
Feeder length Data type: float. No
ActiveStat
us
Cell status (active or not) The value is Yes or No. No
Outdoor Station type (outdoor or not) The value is Yes or No. No
TMA The tower mounted amplifier
is available or not
Data type: character string. No

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the
engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported
BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.
Context
According to service requirements, engineering parameters are classified into mandatory
parameters, optional parameters, and neighboring cell parameters. For details, see 6.1
Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. You can click the
icon to view engineering parameter templates of different networks in the default path provided
by the Probe. In addition, you can modify the format of the current engineering parameter table
based on the project reference template to ensure that the format of the engineering parameter
table meets the requirements of the Probe.
l The mandatory fields must be totally matched. Otherwise, the corresponding engineering
parameter cannot be imported.
l In the case of the optional fields, you can perform the match operation according to the
actual situation. If the optional field is not matched, the Probe does not import the data in
the corresponding column as the engineering parameter.
l Neighboring cells are classified into horizontal neighboring cells and vertical neighboring
cells.
Horizontal neighboring cell
The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell fields are in the same
line of the same table. Horizontal neighboring cells support only the GSM network
system. In this case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell fields.
Vertical neighboring cell
Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation. Vertical neighboring cells
support the GSM, WCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case,
engineering parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you need to
import the corresponding engineering parameter when importing a neighboring cell.
NOTE
In the case of importing vertical neighboring cell fields, pay attention to the following points:
l In GSM network system, LAC and CI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and
NLAC and NCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
l In WCDMA network system, RNCID and CellID of the engineering parameter field must be matched,
and NRNCID and NcellID of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
l In WiMAX network system, BSID of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NBSID
of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
l In LTE network system, CellID and PCI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and
NcellID and NPCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Engineering Parameter management.
GENEX Probe
6-9
Step 2 In the Engineering Parameter management window, click . The Select File dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Select the network mode of the imported engineering parameter in Protocol.
Step 4 Perform the operation according to the type of the imported data.
If ... Then...
The engineering parameter is imported,
but no neighboring cell field is imported.
Open an engineering parameter file in
Engineering parameter file.
The engineering parameter and the
horizontal neighboring cell field are
imported.
1. Select Config Neighboring Cell.
2. Choose Horizontal.
3. Open an engineering parameter file
(containing neighboring cell fields) in
The engineering parameter and the
vertical neighboring cell field are
imported.
1. Select Config Neighboring Cell.
2. Choose Vertical.
3. Open an engineering parameter file in
4. Open a neighboring cell parameter file in
Neighboring cell file.
Step 5 Click Next. The Match Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Select the sheet that the engineering parameter or neighboring cell field is located in Select
sheet.
Step 7 Click Finish.
The Probe starts to match the engineering parameters in the Probe Param and Excel Param
lists automatically. Then, the engineering parameters are displayed in the Engineering
Parameter management window.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
If ... Then...
The Probe displays a dialog box You can infer that the mandatory parameters in
the Probe Param and Excel Param lists do not
match. In this case, you must manually match
these mandatory parameters.
1. Click OK.
2. Select the line in which the field does not
match.
3. Click Match Date. The Match dialog box is
displayed.
4. Select the correct field name and click OK.
5. To match other fields, perform 7.2 through
7.4 repeatedly.
6. Click Finish, and then wait until importing the
engineering parameters is complete.
7. Perform Step 8.
The Probe doe not display any dialog box You do not need to manually match the
After the engineering parameters are imported, go
to Step 8.
Step 8 Optional: Edit the engineering parameters.
1. In the Engineering Parameter management window, select the parameters to be edited,
and then type the new values in the table.
2. Click for the new values to take effect.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
In addition, you can click to export engineering parameters to XLS file or CSV file for
future use.
After importing engineering parameters, you can add engineering parameter layers or view the
engineering parameters and neighboring cell connection line information in the map window.
Related References
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window
12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters
GENEX Probe
6-11
About This Chapter
Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe,
so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe
to replay data, you need not connect external devices.
7.1 Connectable External Devices
The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS.
This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection.
7.2 Plugging in External Devices
Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and
are correctly positioned.
7.3 Configuring External Devices
This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected
to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the
Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect
data.
7.4 Enabling External Devices
Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe
can recognize the configured external devices.
7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected
Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects
the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For
the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of
redundant data and increases the speed of reading data.
7.6 Configuring Device Alarms
The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly
disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes
for special situations.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 7 Connecting External Devices
7-1
7.1 Connectable External Devices
The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS.
This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection.
Test Terminal
l Table 7-1 shows the types and specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals.
Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals
Type of the Test
Terminal
Supported Band Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei U120e GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Yes Support the following
test items:
l Forcing function
test
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
Huawei U1205 GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900
test items:
l Forcing function
test
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
test items:
l Forcing function
test
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
Huawei U1211 GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/2100
WCDMA (MHz):
900/1800/2100
Yes -
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the Test
Terminal
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
850/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
900/2100
test items:
l Forcing function
test
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/2100
Yes -
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900/2100
Yes Not support the
following test items:
l MMS test
l Video Phone test
l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l Async SQE(MS-
MS) test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900/2100
No Not support the
l MMS test
l Video Phone test
l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l Async SQE(MS-
MS) test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
GENEX Probe
7-3
Type of the Test
Terminal
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Yes Not support the
l MMS test
l Video Phone test
l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l Async SQE(MS-
MS) test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/2100
Yes Not support the
l MMS test
l Video Phone test
l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l Async SQE(MS-
MS) test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
No -
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
No -
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
HSDPA/WCDMA
(MHz): 2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 3.6
No -
900/1800
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
No -
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the Test
Terminal
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
900/1800
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
No -
Huawei U1280-5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900
No Support the following
test items:
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
WCDMA/HSPA+
(MHz): 1700/1900
Yes Not support the
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
l MMS test
Huawei E176
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA/WCDMA
(MHz):
850/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Yes -
Huawei E180
Card
GSM (MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA/WCDMA
(MHz): 900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Yes -
Huawei E270
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA/WCDMA
(MHz):
850/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Yes -
GENEX Probe
7-5
Type of the Test
Terminal
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei E270+
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/WCDMA
(MHz): 1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Yes Support the Multiple
Input Multiple Output
(MIMO) test.
Huawei E1820
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/WCDMA
(MHz): 2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
Yes Support the MIMO
test.
Huawei E182E
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/HSPA/
WCDMA (MHz):
850/900/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s):
5.76
Yes Support the MIMO
test.
Huawei E1823
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/HSPA/
WCDMA (MHz):
850/900/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s):
5.76
Yes -
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the Test
Terminal
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei E372u-8
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/HSPA/
WCDMA (MHz):
850/900/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s):
5.76
DC-HSPA+ (Mbit/
s): 43.2
No Support the DC-
HSDPA test.
Qualcomm
TM6200
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
No -
Qualcomm
TM6250
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
No -
Qualcomm
TM6275
GSM (MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
No -
Qualcomm
TM6280
GSM (MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900/2100
No -

l Table 7-2 shows the types and specifications of CDMA test terminals.
Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals
Type of the Test
Terminal
Supported Band Detect Automatically (Yes/No)
Huawei C300 1x 800 MHz No
GENEX Probe
7-7
Type of the Test
Terminal
Supported Band Detect Automatically (Yes/No)
Huawei EC360
Card
1x/DO0/DOA: 800
MHz, 1900 MHz
No
Qualcomm
QTP-6800
1x/DO0/DOA: 800
MHz, 1900 MHz
No
LG KX206 1x 800 MHz No
LG KX236 1x 800 MHz No

l Table 7-3 shows the types and specifications of WiMAX test terminals.
Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals
Type of the
Test Terminal
Supported
Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
ZyXEL
MAX100
2500 MHz No -
ZyXEL
MAX210
3500 MHz No -
Seowon GCT
SWU1100
2500 MHz, 3500
MHz
No -
Seowon GCT
SWU3020
2300 MHz No -
Seowon GCT
SWU3120
2500 MHz No -
Seowon GCT
SWU3220
3500 MHz No -
Huawei Sequans
BM325
2500 MHz No -
Huawei Sequans
BM355
2300 MHz No -
Huawei Sequans
BM358
2300 MHz No -
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the
Test Terminal
Supported
Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei Sequans
BM625
2500 MHz No Supports only the USB
connection mode.
Huawei Sequans
BM635
connection mode.
Huawei Beceem
BM328
connection mode.
Huawei Beceem
BM338
connection mode.

l Table 7-4 shows the specifications of LTE test terminals.
Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals
Type of the
Test
Terminal
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei UE
1.0
Band 4: AWS
Band 7: 2.6GHz
Band 12: 700 MHz
Band 40: 2.3 GHz
DD: 800 MHz
No Supports only the
network port
connection mode.
Huawei UE
1.1
Band 4: AWS
Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 12: 700 MHz
Band 40: 2.3 GHz
DD: 800 MHz
network port
connection mode.
Huawei UE
2.0
Band 1: 2.1 GHz
Band 3: 1800 MHz
Band 4: AWS
Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 8: 900 MHz
Band 12: 700 MHz
Band 38: 2.6 GHz
Band 40: 2.3 GHz
DD: 800 MHz
network port
connection mode.
GENEX Probe
7-9
Type of the
Test
Terminal
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei
B390
Band 38: 2.6 GHz
Band 40: 2.3 GHz
Band 64: 2545 MHz to
2575 MHz
Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 20: 791 MHz to
821 MHz (Downlink),
and 832 MHz to 862
MHz (Uplink)
network port
connection mode.
Huawei
E398 Card
Band 1: 2.1 GHz
Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 3: 1800 MHz
No Supports only the USB
connection mode.

Scanner
The followings scanners are supported by the Probe:
l GSM/WCDMA
PCTel SeeGull EX GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100
PCTel SeeGull LX Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100
PCTel PCT-505
PCTel PCT-520 Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 2100
Anritsu ML8720 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100
Anritsu ML8740 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100
Anritsu ML8742A WCDMA 2100
Rohde & Schwarz TSML-W
It supports all the WCDMA band class defined by 3GPP by default.
l CDMA
PCTel SeeGull LX Dual Mode Quad Band CDMA 850/1900 EV-DO 850/1900
l WiMAX
PCTel SeeGull EX Mini Dual Band WiMAX 2500/3500
GPS
The Probe supports the GPS that complies with the National Marine Electronics Association
0183 (NMEA0183) protocol. For example, the GARMIN series and supports the text format of
the GARMIN series. NMEA0183, enacted by the NMEA, is a data protocol that complies with
industrial standards. Based on all ASCII characters, this protocol adapt to custom options . Thus,
this protocol is flexible.
The following GPSs are supported by the Probe:
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l GARMIN GPS76
l Huan Tian BU353
7.2 Plugging in External Devices
Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and
are correctly positioned.
Prerequisite
The external devices and auxiliary equipment for a test are available. For details, see 8.2
Preparations Before Data Collection.
Context
The connection modes that vary with the types of the external devices are as follows:
l Test terminal: USB, PCMCIA slot, or Ethernet port
l Data card: USB or PCMCIA slot
l PCTel SeeGull scanner and Anritsu scanner: USB or COM port
l Rohde&Schwarz TSML-W scanner: FireWire (IEEE 1394 port)
l GPS: USB or COM port
NOTE
In the case that the Probe performs tests of multiple terminals at a time, the Belkin USB 7-port Hub must
be used to ensure the proper connection between test terminals and a PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect all required external devices to a PC and ensure that all cables are plugged in properly.
For details about how to connect the external devices, see the installation guide of the
corresponding external device.
CAUTION
Required drivers of the external devices must be installed so that the PC can identify these
devices. You can find drivers of a variety of external devices in the Accessory\Driver directory
in the Probe software installation package. For details about how to install these drivers, see the
user guide of the corresponding external device.
Step 2 Ensure that the external devices are positioned correctly.
l Ensure that the connection between the external devices and the PC is secure.
l Ensure that the cables connected to the external devices bend naturally.
l Ensure that the receive signals of the test terminals and the GPS are not blocked. Otherwise,
the signals may be insufficient, which affects the data collection.
----End
GENEX Probe
7-11
Example
For details about the connection mode of an LTE UE, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE
UE?.
Follow-up Procedure
After the external devices are plugged into the PC, you must configure these devices on the
Probe and ensure that the Probe identifies them so that they can work with the Probe to collect
data.
This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected
to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the
Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect
data.
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically
This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically
detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external
devices to the Device Configure window.
7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually
This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be
detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.
Related References
12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically
This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically
detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external
devices to the Device Configure window.
Context
Currently, the Probe supports automatic detection of certain models of test terminals and does
not support automatic detection of scanners and GPS. For details about test terminals that can
be automatically detected by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.
Procedure
l Click in the main interface of the Probe.
The detected external devices are automatically added to the Device Configure dialog box
and Down is displayed in State, as shown in Figure 7-1.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box

NOTE
If automatic detection fails or external devices do not support automatic detection, you need to
manually configure external devices. For details, see 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices
Manually.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can configure external devices that are connected to the PC on the Probe by referring to
7.4 Enabling External Devices.
7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually
This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be
detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the Probe, click .
Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, click .
Step 3 From the Type drop-down list box, select an external device such as the MS, GPS, or scanner
to be configured. From the Model drop-down list box, select the model of the selected external
device.
Step 4 Click Next to set the relevant parameters.
For details about the parameters, see 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices.
GENEX Probe
7-13
TIP
l You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in
the Device Manager window. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node under
the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the Modem tab page.
You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking icon on the toolbar of Device
Configure window.
l You can click Filter to select the data to be received. For the description of the parameters, see 12.8
Parameters for Filtering the Original Data.
l You can also select the data to be received after the external device is configured. For details, see 7.5
Selecting the Data to Be Collected.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Check the configuration status of the external device.
In the Device Configure dialog box, if the value of the configured external device is Down in
the State column, you can infer that the external device is configured in the Probe.
If no value is displayed in the State column, you can infer that the external device is not
configured in the Probe. In this case, repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to configure the external
device based on the actual situation until the values of all the configured external devices are
Down in the State column.
Step 7 Optional: Synchronize the PC time with the GPS time.
1. Choose Configuration > System Configure to open the System Configure dialog box.
2. Click .
3. Select Synchronize PC Time with GPS Time, and then select the time zone of the place
where you are located from the Time zone drop-down list box.
The range of time zone is GMT +12 to GMT -12.
4. Click OK.
NOTE
After synchronizing the time of the GPS with that of the PC, do not modify the system time, otherwise,
the preset time is invalid.
----End
Example
You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking icon on the toolbar of Device
Configure window. You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the
Ports (COM & LPT) node. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node
under the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the
shortcut menu. Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the
Modem tab page
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 7-2 The example of COM port

Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port

GENEX Probe
7-15
Follow-up Procedure
You need to connect the external devices in the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External
Devices.
7.4 Enabling External Devices
Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe
can recognize the configured external devices.
Prerequisite
The external devices are configured. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the Probe, click to open the Device Configure dialog box.
Step 2 Select an added external device.
If ... Then ...
Connect the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX external device Skip to Step 3.
Connect the LTE external device Skip to Step 5.
Step 3 Click , and then check whether the port of the external device is available.
If ... Then ...
The system displays Enable in the State
list of the external device in the Device
Configure dialog box.
In this case, you can infer that the port is
available.
Perform Step 4.
The system prompts you by displaying a
dialog box.
In this case, you can infer that the port is
unavailable and cannot be connected properly.
Perform the following steps:
1. Click OK.
The system displays Disconnect in the State
list of the external device in the Device
Configure dialog box.
2. Re-set the port of the external device.
For details, see 13.2 Problems Related to
Device Connections.
3. Perform Step 4.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 until the system displays Enable in the State list of the added external
devices in the Device Configure dialog box.
Step 5 On the main interface of the Probe, click . Then the Probe automatically connects to the
external devices.
The system displays the connection status in the State list of the corresponding external device
in the Device Configure dialog box.
l Searching: indicates that the external device is being connected.
l Disconnect: indicates that the external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal.
l Connected: indicates that the external device is connected.
Step 6 Check the connection status of the external devices in the system status bar.
For the description of the system status bar, see System Status Bar.
----End
Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects
the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For
the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of
redundant data and increases the speed of reading data.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Device Configure, or click the icon on the toolbar.
Step 2 In the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the configured test terminal.
Step 3 Click Filter, and set the relevant parameters.
For detailed description about the parameters, see 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original
Data.
CAUTION
When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be
connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the
data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box.
l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected.
l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
GENEX Probe
7-17
Related References
12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data
The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly
disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes
for special situations.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click .
Step 3 Set Language to specify the language type of the device alarm.
You can set the language type of the device alarm to Chinese or English.
Step 4 Set the device alarm mode.
If ... Then...
Generating alarms in voice mode Choose Audio Alarm, and select a voice file (.wav
file) in Sound.
Generating alarms in dialog box mode Choose Visual Alarm.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Related References
12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
8 Collecting Data
About This Chapter
The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices
and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed
with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be
plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map
files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data.
Context
You can start the data analysis through operations on the menu bar, toolbar, tabs in navigation
pane, or view windows. This section describes the most commonly used methods on how to
collect data by using the Probe.
CAUTION
When you use the Probe to collect data, the dongle must be always connected to the USB port
on the PC. Otherwise, the Probe cannot be used to collect data.
You can choose Help > Check License to check whether the dongle is plugged in properly.
8.1 Data Collection Process
The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the
wireless air interface.
8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection
Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version,
external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the
external devices are running properly.
8.3 Creating a Project
All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or
data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project.
8.4 Designing Test Plans
GENEX Probe
User Guide 8 Collecting Data
8-1
A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can
configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide
various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test.
8.5 Performing a Test Plan
Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through
the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests.
Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans
are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan
and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.
8 Collecting Data
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
8.1 Data Collection Process
The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the
wireless air interface.
Table 8-1 shows the procedure for data collection on the Probe.
Table 8-1 Data collection procedure
Proce
dure
Operation Description
1 Preparations Before Data
Collection
Make preparations for the data collection to
improve the data collection efficiency.
2 Connecting External Devices Connect the external devices used for the data
collection to the test PC and then configure the
relevant parameters on the Probe.
3 Creating a Project Create a project for data collection. You can also
import the map or relevant engineering
parameters to the project to facilitate data
observation.
5 Designing a Test Plan Design the test plan for the test terminal or
scanner to test the voice service or data service.
6 Performing a Test Plan Start a test plan and record a logfile.
7 Browsing Data in Real Time During the test, you can view the test data in real
time in the view window.

8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection
Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version,
external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the
external devices are running properly.
It is recommended that you perform the following operations before the drive test:
l Determine the test objective and test area, plan the test route, and update the base station
information to improve the data collection efficiency.
l Have the engineering parameter table and map for the drive test ready.
For the engineering parameters supported by the Probe, see 6.1 Engineering
Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems.
For the maps supported by the Probe, see 5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps.
l Have the Probe and GENEX Shared components of the latest version ready.
l Have the relevant hardware and software ready.
A PC installed with the Probe and GENEX Shared components is available.
GENEX Probe
8-3
The dongle and the corresponding driver are available.
External devices and the corresponding auxiliary equipment and their drivers used for
the drive test are available. Ensure that the external devices run properly.
Table 8-2 describes the requirements for the external devices.
Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices
Configu
ration
Item
Configuration Requirement Auxiliary Equipment
GPS For the GPS supported by the Probe, see
GPS.
External antenna
Scanner For the scanner supported by the Probe, see
Scanner.
Vehicle-mounted DC/
AC converter, external
antenna, and so on
Test
terminal
For the test MS and PC card supported by
the Probe, see Test Terminal.
Spare battery, charger,
data cable, and so on

NOTE
During the drive test, ensure that the power supply of the connected devices is sufficient.
8.3 Creating a Project
All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or
data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project.
Context
Upon the startup of the Probe, an empty project is created automatically by default. You can
perform subsequent operations for this default project.
The Probe can display only one project at a time. To open another project, you need to close the
current project.
Procedure
Step 1 In the navigation pane, expand the Project tab and then click the icon.
Step 2 Choose a project template.
l Empty Project: creates an empty project.
l GSM View Template: project template used in GSM tests provided by the Probe.
l WCDMA View Template: project template used in WCDMA tests provided by the Probe.
l WiMAX Beceem View Template: project template used in WiMAX Beceem tests provided
by the Probe.
l LTE View Template: project template used in LTE tests provided by the Probe.
8 Collecting Data
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
After a template is selected, the system automatically names the new project Untitled.
NOTE
You can open an existing project through the Project tab in the navigation pane.
Step 3 Configure the related parameters.
For example, configure data related to external devices, make test plan, or specify other system
settings.
Step 4 Optional: Save the current project as required.
If you need to ... Then ...
Directly save the current project Choose Project > Save.
Rename and then save the current project Choose Project > Save As.
The folders provided by the Probe for saving project files are under the following path: software
installation path\Projects. The following folders are contained:
l Site Verification
Saves the project files for single-site verification tests.
l Optimize
Saves the project files for optimization tests.
l Benchmark
Saves the project files for benchmark tests.
l Acceptance
Saves the project files for acceptance tests.
l Customize
Saves the customized project files.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can close or delete a project by choosing Project, clicking the corresponding icon on the
toolbar, or clicking the corresponding icon under the Project tab in the navigation pane on the
main interface. For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the
Probe.
A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can
configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide
various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test.
GENEX Probe
8-5
Context
Ensure that the MS is properly connected and the related parameters are set. For details about
how to configure the MS, see 7 Connecting External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose ConfigurationTest Plan Control, or click on the Configuration tab page in the
navigation pane to open the Test Plan Control window.
Step 2 Click Click here to config in the left pane to add a test item, and then configure the properties
of the added test item on the Config tab in the right pane.
For the description of test items and related properties, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.
CAUTION
l To perform a data service test, such as the Ping, FTP, HTTP, WAP, Video Streaming, or
Email test, you must configure the Dial Up test item before configuring the test item required
by the data service.
l To perform a speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the test item according to
the following situations:
l To perform a synchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the
Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the calling PHU terminal.
l To perform an asynchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the
Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the two PHU terminals.
l To perform a speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE
Server, you need to configure the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal that
is configured for the Probe and configure the SQE test item for the PSTN SQE Server.
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 to add multiple test items.
If the added test item need to be performed cyclically, you need to add the Loop Start test item.
After the Loop Start test item is added, the Probe adds the Loop End test item automatically,
which indicates that the test items between Loop Start and Loop End are performed cyclically.
Step 4 Optional: Adjust the execution sequence of the test items.
1. Select a test item whose execution sequence you want to adjust.
2. Click or to move the test item up or down.
Step 5 Set whether to perform the added test item in Enable.
Clicking Yes indicates that this test item is performed. Clicking No indicates that this test item
is not performed.
Step 6 Optional: Click to save the configured test plan.
----End
8 Collecting Data
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Follow-up Procedure
You can also click to delete unnecessary test items.
Related References
12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window
12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items
14.1 Description of Test Items
8.5 Performing a Test Plan
Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through
the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests.
Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans
are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan
and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.
Context
CAUTION
Before performing the test plan, disable the call waiting function of the test terminal.
8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)
The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched
(PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service
test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed.
8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test
The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are
classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test
route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an
indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC.
8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test
An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor
test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the
PC before an outdoor test.
8.5.4 Monitoring the Test
You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test
replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure.
8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans
If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop
the test plan and disconnect the external devices.
GENEX Probe
8-7
8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)
The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched
(PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service
test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed.
Prerequisite
The MS is connected and can be recognized by the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External
Devices.
Context
The APN can be set by using any of the following methods:
l Setting the APN in the operating system
l Setting the APN in the MS
l Setting the APN in the Probe
NOTE
Among the three APN setting methods, settings in the operating system are of the highest priority and
settings in the Probe are of the lowest priority. That is, if an APN is set in the operating system and in the
Probe, settings in the operating system take effect.
Likewise, the maximum uplink and downlink rates set in the operating system have higher priorities than
those set in the Probe. If the APN or the maximum uplink and downlink rates do not work during the test,
check whether they are set in the operating system. If they are not set, the Probe initialize the modem based
on the latest successful setting.
Procedure
l Set the APN in the operating system.
1. Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties
dialog box.
2. On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager to open the Device Manager
dialog box.
3. Expand the Modem node and then double-click the modem to be set.
4. Choose Advanced in the displayed Modem dialog box. Enter the initialized command
in the Extra Initialized Command field.
The format of the initialized command is at+cgdcont=1,"ip","APN".
Here, APN is the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile is
cmwap or cmnet.
5. Click OK.
l Set the APN in the MS.
For details about how to set the APN in the MS, see the user guide of the corresponding
MS.
l Set the APN in the Probe.
In the Probe, to set the APN when configuring the properties of the Dial Up test item,
perform the following steps:
1. On the Probe main interface, click icon to open the Test Plan Control dialog box.
8 Collecting Data
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2. Click Click here to config and choose the Dial Up test item.
3. Set the PDP APN property of the Dial Up test item.
----End
8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test
The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are
classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test
route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an
indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC.
Context
In horizontal tests, fixed points are selected according to the floor plan of a building. You can
perform a horizontal test according to a predefined test route or according to the test route
controlled manually. In vertical tests, the signal distribution in the vertical direction between
floors is tested.
Procedure
Step 1 On the View tab page in the navigation pane, double-click IndoorMap. The IndoorMap
window is displayed.
Step 2 Optional: Click to open the indoor test map.
Step 3 Right-click on the map area and choose a type of indoor tests from the shortcut menu.
CAUTION
The automatic horizontal type and manual horizontal type can be selected only when the external
devices are disconnected from the PC. The vertical type can be chosen only when the external
devices are connected to the PC.
l To perform a horizontal test, you need to set the test type to the indoor test, connect external
devices to the PC, and then perform subsequent operations.
l To perform a vertical test, you need to connect external devices to the PC before setting the
test type to the indoor test.
If you need to... Then...
Start an automatic horizontal test
1. Choose Walking Test > Automatic from the
shortcut menu.
2. Click to draw the test route.
3. Perform Step 4 through Step 5.
During the test, press the Spacebar. The test data that
is already collected is displayed on the map.
GENEX Probe
8-9
If you need to... Then...
Start a manual horizontal test
1. Choose Walking Test > Manual from the shortcut
menu.
3. On the toolbar of the IndoorMap window, click
to draw the test route manually.
Start a vertical test
1. Choose Vertical Test from the shortcut menu. The
Floor dialog box is displayed.
2. In the displayed Floor dialog box, click Setting. The
Floor Setting dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Floor Setting displayed dialog box, specify
Min floor, Max floor, and Invalid floor.
4. Click OK to switch to the Floor dialog box.
6. In the Floor dialog box, click or to draw a test
route.
Step 4 On the main interface of the Probe, click to start the test plan.
The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The
default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as
Probe_20100906135414.gen.
Step 5 Optional: View the test data.
For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data.
----End
8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test
An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor
test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the
PC before an outdoor test.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar to start the test plan.
The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The
default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen.
Probe_20100906135414.gen.
8 Collecting Data
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
NOTE
After the test plan is started, the Probe automatically saves a .tab file of which the name is same as the
recorded logfile. The .tab file is used to store GPS information. You can set the attributes of the .tab file
in the Route File Setting area in Other Settings of the System Configure dialog box. For details about
the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings.
Step 2 Optional: View the test data.
----End
You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test
replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the icon on the toolbar. The Test Plan Control window is displayed.
For details about the parameters in the Test Plan Control window, see 12.10 Parameters for
Monitoring the Test.
Step 2 Monitor the test.
If ...
Then ...
You need to check the status of test items. Check the information about the test item
progress at the bottom of the Test Plan
Control window.
You need to check the statistics of test
plans.
Check the information listed on the Statistic tab
page in the Test Plan Control window.
Step 3 Check the color of the device status indicator in the system status bar to monitor the connection
status of the external devices.
For details about the status bar, see System Status Bar.
NOTE
If an external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal and the connection cannot be enabled
within 10 seconds, it is recommended that you stop the test, re-connect the external devices, and find and
record the fault causes.
----End
Related References
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test
8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans
If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop
the test plan and disconnect the external devices.
GENEX Probe
8-11
Context
Before stopping a test, you need to terminate the call or disconnect the data service of the MS,
stop the test plans, stop recording logfiles, and finally disconnect the external devices. In this
way, the integrity of the recorded data is guaranteed.
Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the voice or data service interaction with the test terminal.
Step 2 Stop the test plan by clicking on the toolbar.
Step 3 Stop the logfile recording by clicking on the toolbar.
Step 4 Disconnect the external devices by clicking on the toolbar.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After a test plan is stopped, save the logfile properly to avoid data loss.
8 Collecting Data
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
9 Managing Logfiles
About This Chapter
During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how
to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles.
9.1 Recording Logfiles
The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data
into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an
outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded
logfile to store the GPS information.
9.2 Segmenting Logfiles
You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different
periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile
segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be
performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed
when the logfile is recorded.
9.3 Replaying Logfiles
The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not
require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key
events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start
point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time.
9.4 Exporting Logfiles
This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing
separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 9 Managing Logfiles
9-1
9.1 Recording Logfiles
The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data
into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an
outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded
logfile to store the GPS information.
Prerequisite
Context
l The Probe supports the logfile segmenting, including the automatic segmenting and manual
segmenting. For details, see 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles.
l The Probe supports the recording of geographic information about the test location in texts
and automatically saves the information in logfiles for further analysis and problem
location. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference
source. This type of text is called filemark.
Procedure
Step 1 Click to record a logfile.
You can specify the save path and logfile name as prompted.
l The default save path is the same as the setting in the Logfile Setting area on the Other
Settings tab page in the System Configure dialog box.
It is recommended that logfiles are not saved in the system installation disk.
l The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen.
Probe_20100906135414.gen.
Logfile names must be easy to understand. For example, a logfile can be named as
Probe_20100906135414_FTPDownload.gen.
NOTE
You can also enable the Probe to record logfiles when the test plan is executed. In this case, the Probe
records data of the test terminal in the service state. However, in the case specified in Step 1, the Probe
records data of the test terminal in the idle state.
Step 2 Optional: Insert a filemark.
1. Click .
2. Type the filemark in the Filemark dialog box.
The length of the filemark cannot exceed 30 Chinese characters.
3. Click OK.
The Probe automatically saves the typed filemark, including the information about the
current time and longitude and altitude of current geographic location, in the logfiles.
----End
9 Managing Logfiles
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
9.2 Segmenting Logfiles
You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different
periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile
segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be
performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed
when the logfile is recorded.
Procedure
l Automatically segment logfiles.
It is recommended that the logfile size be equal to or more than 10 MB.
NOTE
If a logfile records more than 1048064 data packages, the logfile size is invalid, and the system
automatically segments the logfile.
1. Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click .
3. Set the relevant parameters in the Logfile Setting area.
For details about the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings.
4. Click OK.
l Manually segment logfiles.
Click . Then, the system closes the logfile being recorded and creates a logfile
automatically.
The new logfile is automatically stored to the path where the previous logfile is stored. The
new logfile is named as name of the file before being segmented_N. The value of N is equal
to or greater than 1, indicating the number of segmentation times.
----End
9.3 Replaying Logfiles
The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not
require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key
events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start
point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time.
Prerequisite
l The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected.
l If you want to preview the drive test route before the replay, the logfile storing the test route
must be available.
GENEX Probe
9-3
l If you want to preview key events before the replay, the open logfile must contain the
information about key events, and you must set the display mode of the events on the map
in the System Configure dialog box.
Context
The replay rate supported by the Probe ranges from 1/8 to 32 times of the test rate.
Currently, you can preview only the key events and the drive test route that are in the outdoor
test data.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Logfile > Open Logfile or click on the replay toolbar.
Step 2 Select a logfile in .gen format. Then, click Open.
l Preview Route in Map indicates that you can preview the drive test route in the
OutdoorMap window. If you also select Clear Historical Info, the Probe will clear the test
route in the logfile that is last imported.
l Preview Event in Map indicates that you can preview the key events route in the
OutdoorMap window.
NOTE
You can also select both Preview Route in Map and Preview Event in Map to preview the drive test
route and the key events in the OutdoorMap window.
Step 3 Optional: Search for an event in the logfile and find the location where the event occurs.
1. On the Probe main interface, click . The Find Event dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a device from the Device drop-down list box and select an event to be searched for
from the Event drop-down list box.
3. Click Search.
The Probe displays the search result in the Search Result area. If no information is
displayed, you can infer that the logfile does not contain this event.
NOTE
The Probe supports the searching of the filemark event so that the filemark area can be located for
users to analyze the coverage status of the radio network.
4. In the Search Result area, select the event that you want to locate on the map.
5. Click Find.
The Probe marks the location where the event occurs with in the OutdoorMap window.
Step 4 Start the replay.
Choose Logfile > Play or click on the replay toolbar.
Step 5 Optional: Browse the test data.
----End
9 Managing Logfiles
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Follow-up Procedure
You can click the corresponding icons on the replay toolbar to control the replay progress. For
details, see Replay Toolbar.
This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing
separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.
Prerequisite
l The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected.
For details, see 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans.
l The ongoing replay is stopped and the logfile is closed.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Click on the replay toolbar to stop a replay.
2. Choose Logfile > Close Logfile to close the logfile.
Context
l A logfile can be converted to the file in the following formats:
Bin: indicates the binary file.
The extension is .gen. The binary file can be directly imported to the Probe.
CSV: indicates the .txt file containing separators.
The extension is .csv. In the exported .txt file, the test data is separated by separators
such as the comma, semicolon, or colon.
MDM: indicates the Qualcomm file.
The extension is .dlf. The logfile must contain the test data of the Qualcomm test
terminal.
l The PHU file contains the data collected by the PHU MS. The extension is .phu.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Logfile > Export Data. The wizard for exporting the test data is displayed.
Convert a logfile to a binary file Select Bin.
l To export multiple logfiles as a binary file,
select Multi-f.
l To export a logfile as a binary file, clear Multi-
f.
Convert a logfile to a .txt file containing
separators
Select Csv.
GENEX Probe
9-5
Convert the messages and events in the
Logfile to a .txt file containing
separators
Select Csv (Messages_Events).
Convert a logfile to a Qualcomm file Select MDM.
Convert a PHU file (.phu file) to a logfile
(.gen file)
Select PHU.
Step 2 Click Next to set corresponding parameters.
For details about parameters, see 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data.
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 until Next in the dialog box is changed to Start.
Step 4 Click Start and wait for data conversion.
Step 5 In the displayed prompt box, click corresponding buttons to complete the data conversion.
Continue to export data Click Yes.
Exit the wizard for exporting data Click No.
----End
Related References
12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner
9 Managing Logfiles
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
About This Chapter
This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of
view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer
2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows.
10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events
IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In
addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals.
10.2 Browsing Data
The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view
window to browse data in the view as required.
10.3 Configuring the View Window
You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the
configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window
is temporary and is not saved in projects.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 10 Managing View Windows
10-1
10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events
IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In
addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals.
IEs and events can be presented as:
l Symbols on a map
For details, see 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event.
l Symbols and vertical lines in line charts
For details, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View.
l Audio signals
For details, see 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications and 12.15
Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event.
10.2 Browsing Data
The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view
window to browse data in the view as required.
Prerequisite
l If you want to browsing data in a view during a test, ensure that external devices are
connected and can be recognized by the Probe so that the open view window can display
data.
For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
l If you want to browse data in a view during a replay, ensure that the replay is ongoing so
that the open view window can display data.
For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.
Context
The views provided by the Probe consist of the air interface parameter view, data service view,
signaling view, event list view, event statistics view, map view, KPI statistics view, scanner
view, GPS view, line chart view, and information view.
In the Probe, the views are displayed in chart, list, plain text, line chart mode or in chart-and-list
mixed mode. For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test
Data View.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View or click the View tab in the navigation pane to display a view window. Then,
browse data in the view window.
Step 2 Optional: Configure the properties of the view window as required.
For details, see 10.3 Configuring the View Window.
----End
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Related References
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View
12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View
10.3 Configuring the View Window
You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the
configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window
is temporary and is not saved in projects.
10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View
The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in
the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs.
10.3.2 Configuring the List View
The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as
required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View
The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view
as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View
The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics
in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required
to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in
the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs.
Context
For the description of the line chart view, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > Custom Line Chart.
Step 2 Right-click any area in the Custom Line Chart dialog box, and then choose Properties from
the shortcut menu.
l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the color properties of the line chart view.
l The Time shortcut menu item is used to set the amount of that is allowed to be displayed in
the current line chart.
By default, the data within 60 seconds can be displayed. The data within 3600 seconds can
be displayed at most.
Step 3 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, select the chart to be configured, and then click Edit.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set relevant parameters.
GENEX Probe
10-3
For the description of the parameters, see Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog
box.
Step 5 Click OK. The Set Chart Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 until all the required chart properties are configured.
Step 7 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, click OK.
----End
Related References
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View
The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as
required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
The view window to be configured is displayed. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data.
Context
For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click any area in the list view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The
ListView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed.
l The Device shortcut menu item is used to display the parameters of different devices.
If no device is added to the current system, the Device shortcut menu item does not provide
any options.
l The SetTitle shortcut menu item is used to change the title of the current list view.
Step 2 Click the Mode tab and Cell Contents tab. Then configure the layout and appearance of the
view window.
For the description of the parameters, see 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties
of the List Views.
TIP
Select an IE, and then click Edit. Alternatively, double-click an IE. In the IE Information dialog box,
configure IE-related information.
Step 3 After the configuration, click OK.
----End
Related References
12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view
as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click any area in the chart view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The
ChartView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed.
l The Legend shortcut menu item is used to display the legend of the current chart view.
l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the legend properties of the current chart
view.
Step 2 Click the Chart General tab, and then set relevant parameters.
Step 3 After the configuration, click OK.
----End
Related References
The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics
in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required
to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
Context
The plain text views provided by the Probe consist of the information view, event list view, and
statistics view. They are used to display the basic information about the logfile, the event
information, and the statistics of events and KPIs in the logfile.
Procedure
l Configure the properties of the event list view and the statistics view.
1. Right-click any area in the view, and then choose Event Filter or KPI Filter from
the shortcut menu.
GENEX Probe
10-5
The list in the left pane of the event list view or the statistics view displays the events
or KPIs provided by the Probe.
2. From the list in the left pane of the view, select the event or KPI to be displayed.
3. Optional: During the test or replay, right-click any area in the view, and then choose
Clear List from the shortcut menu. The displayed events or KPIs are cleared.
l Configure the properties of the information view.
1. Choose View > Information. The Information view window is displayed.
NOTE
l The Log File tab page displays the information related to logfiles.
l The FTP Info tab page displays the information related to FTP upload or download.
l The PHU Info tab page displays the version of the PHU terminal.
You can check the version of the PHU terminal during terminal connecting or data
replaying. When the Probe can not get the version of the PHU terminal, the Unknown
Version will be displayed.
l The IE Audio Indications Info tab page displays the Information Elements (IEs) which
played audio indications.
2. Right-click any area in the Information view window, and then choose Font from
the shortcut menu. Then, configure the fonts of the texts in the view window.
The Copy menu item is used to copy the texts in the view window to the clipboard of
the Windows. Then, the texts can be pasted to other documents conveniently.
----End
Related References
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
About This Chapter
This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe.
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)
The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation
tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate
the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file.
11.2 Forcing Function Tests
The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing
function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent
(C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning.
11.3 IP Analysis
The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then
obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols
through the IP analysis.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 11 Typical Application
11-1
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)
The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation
tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate
the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file.
11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test
This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected
with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling
the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result
file so that the MOS is obtained.
11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test
This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that
are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech
quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively
so that the MOS is obtained.
11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server
This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE
Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation
test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and
the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the
PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.
11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test
This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected
with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling
the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result
file so that the MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
The Probe is configured with two terminals installed with the PHU of
V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.
Context
The PHU terminals supported by the Probe are Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U1251,
and Huawei U6100.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan.
Only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal need to be designed.
1. Click the icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test
Plan Control window.
2. On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Sync SQE(MS-
MS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
For details about the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Sync SQE(MS-
MS) (GSM/WCDMA).
Step 2 Perform the test plan.
1. Click the icon to start the logfile recording.
2. Click the icon to start the test plan.
Step 3 View the test data.
Choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the speech quality
evaluation.
Step 4 Optional: End the test plan.
If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a
long time, the test plan needs to be stopped.
1. Click on the toolbar to stop the test plan.
2. Click on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording.
3. Click on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.
----End
11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test
This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that
are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech
quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively
so that the MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
1. The Probe is installed on two PCs.
2. The terminals installed with the same PHU version are configured for the two Probes
separately.
The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.
3. The PHU terminals quit from the PHU running mode.
Context
and Huawei U6100.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan.
When designing the test plan, you need to design the test plan for the calling PHU terminal
before designing the test plan for the called PHU terminal.
GENEX Probe
11-3
2. On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Async SQE(MS-
MS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page.
For details about the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Async SQE(MS-
MS) (GSM/WCDMA).
When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the called PHU terminal
before performing the test plan of the calling PHU terminal.
1. Click the icon to record the data in a logfile.
2. Click the icon to start the test plan.
In the two Probes, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the
speech quality evaluation.
long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the calling
PHU terminal first.
1. Click on the toolbar to stop the test plan.
2. Click on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording.
3. Click on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.
----End
11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and
PSTN SQE Server
This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE
Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation
test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and
the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the
PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
1. The two PCs are installed with the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server respectively. The
system time of the two PCs is consistent.
2. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal.
The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.
3. The coloring ring back tone (CRBT) services are disabled for the PHU terminal.
Context
In the case of the uplink speech quality evaluation, the PHU terminal is used as the calling MS
and the PSTN SQE Server is used as the called MS. In the case of downlink speech quality
evaluation, the PSTN SQE Server is used as the calling MS and the PHU terminal is used as the
called MS.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
and Huawei U6100.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan for the PHU terminal on the Probe:
2. On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the SQE(MS-PSTN)
test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page.
For details about the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item, see SQE(MS-PSTN)
(GSM/WCDMA).
Step 2 Perform the following operations on the PSTN SQE Server:
For details, see 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server.
1. Configure a voice card.
2. Configure a speech channel.
3. Configure the SQE test item.
When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the calling MS before
performing the test plan of the called MS. This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as
the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server that is used as the called MS as an example.
1. Perform the test plan on the Probe.
a. Click the icon to start the logfile recording.
b. Click the icon to start the test plan.
2. Perform the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server.
Click the icon to start the test plan.
l If you perform the uplink speech quality evaluation, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality
Evaluation to view the uplink MOS.
l If you perform the downlink speech quality evaluation, choose View > Speech/TV to view
the downlink MOS.
long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the PHU
terminal before stopping the test plan of the PSTN SQE Server.
This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server
that is used as the called MS as an example.
1. End the test plan on the Probe.
a. Click on the toolbar to stop the test plan.
GENEX Probe
11-5
b. Click on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording.
c. Click on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminal from the Probe.
2. End the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server.
Click on the toolbar to stop the test plan.
----End
11.2 Forcing Function Tests
The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing
function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent
(C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning.
11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters
This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling
the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE.
11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements
This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to
check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the
adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude
of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the
frequency of the serving cell.
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning
This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You
can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band.
11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test
This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the
handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The
handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and
band control must be performed in idle state.
11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test
The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble
codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode.
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test
This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions
consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and
locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.
11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters
This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling
the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE.
Prerequisite
Test terminals are connected, and the Probe can enable the test terminals. For details, see 7.4
Enabling External Devices.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM NV Setting. The GSM Nonvolatile Parameters
Setting dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the forcing feature in MS NV Setting.
If ... Then...
Attach to the GPRS. Choose GPRS.
Attach to the EDGE. Choose EDGE.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test.
Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is
displayed in the MS Current State area.
----End
This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to
check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the
adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude
of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the
frequency of the serving cell.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM C/A Setting. The GSM C/A Setting dialog box is
displayed.
For details about the parameters related to the GSM C/A Setting dialog box, see 12.24
Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM.
Step 2 Select an MS from the Device Select drop-down list.
Step 3 Select a C/A measurement type from the MS C/A State area.
Objective Action
Disable the C/A measurement Choose OFF.
GENEX Probe
11-7
Objective Action
Calculate the C/A values of the two neighboring
frequencies of the current serving cell
Choose 1 Channel (-1, +1).
Calculate the C/A values of the four neighboring
frequencies of the current serving cell
Choose 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2).
Step 4 Click Apply. The C/A measurement is performed on the MS.
Step 5 Optional: Click Search MS State. The latest C/A state of the MS is displayed in the MS C/A
State area.
Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > Interference > GSM C/A to browse the C/A measurement
data in the displayed GSM C/A window.
l SS: indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent frequencies of the current serving cell.
The range is -110 to -47 and the unit is dBm.
l C/A, indicates the carrier-to-adjacent. The calculation method is to subtract the adjacent-
frequency received signal strength from the received signal strength of the current serving
ARFCN.
----End
Related References
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning
This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You
can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band.
Prerequisite
The GSM test terminal is connected. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Frequency Scan. The GSM Frequency Scan dialog
box is displayed.
Step 2 Select a test terminal in Device Select.
Step 3 Choose the scanning mode.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
If ... Then...
Perform the scanning test in a specified
frequency range.
Choose Specific Scan, and then enter the
frequency value in From and To.
The Probe supports the scanning in the
frequency range 0 to 124, 512 to 885, 512 to
810, or 975 to 1023.
CAUTION
The value of (To - From) must be smaller than 32.
Perform the scanning test when no
frequency range is specified.
Choose Unspecific Scan, and then select the
band to be scanned in Scan Band.
The Probe supports the scanning in the band
GSM 900, DCS 1800, or PCS 1900. You can
select All to scan all bands.
Recover the MS to the non-scanning status. Choose Disable.
Step 4 Click Apply, and then the test terminal performs the scanning test.
Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire Scan State, and then check the scanning status of the test terminal in
the Scan State regional box.
Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > GSM Frequency Scan Result to browse the GSM scanning
data in the GSM Frequency Scan Result view window.
l ARFCN: Indicates the scanned frequency, which ranges from 0 to 1023.
GSM 900 MHz: 0 to 124 and 975 to 1023
DCS 1800 MHz: 512 to 885
PCS 1900 MHz: 515 to 810
l RxLev: Indicates the received signal level, which ranges from -110 to -47 (Unit: dBm).
l BSIC: Indicates the base station identity code, which ranges from 00 to 77.
l BAND: Indicates the scanned band. The value can be set to GSM 900 MHz, DCS 1800 MHz,
or PCS 1900 (Unit: MHz).
----End
This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the
handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The
handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and
band control must be performed in idle state.
Prerequisite
GENEX Probe
11-9
Context
l Handover feature
The handover feature consists of forcing handover and forbid handover. The forcing
handover is used to check whether the neighboring relation between cells is added properly.
The forbid handover is used to measure the coverage range of the newly constructed site.
The forcing handover and forbid handover are independent of each other.
If the forbid handover is successfully performed, the MS in dedicated state is not
switched until the MS is disconnected from the network.
If the forcing handover is successfully performed and the neighboring relation between
the serving cell and the neighboring cells is normal, the MS can be switched to the
destination cell other than the non-destination cell.
l ARFCN control and band control
After the ARFCN is controlled in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover
if the MS originates a call. In such a case, the MS remains on the destination ARFCN. After
the band is controlled in idle state, the band is controlled in dedicated state. In such a case,
the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band.
l CBA inversion
The CBA is a parameter set by the BSC in the GSM system and is used to control the access
of a cell. When the cell is under construction, the value of the CBA cannot be accessed by
common users. During this time, the MS can access the cell to verify the functions of the
newly-constructed cell through the CBA inversion function.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Forcing Feature. The GSM Forcing Feature dialog
box is displayed.
For details about the parameters related to the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21
Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM.
Step 2 Select an MS from the Device drop-down list.
The ARFCNs of the current serving cell of the selected MS are displayed in Serving ARFCN.
Step 3 Choose the forcing feature.
If You Need To ... Then ...
Perform the forcing handover
1. Select Forcing Function.
2. Select Force HO (Dedicated) from the
Function Select area.
3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target
ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN
in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor
to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.
Perform the forbid handover
2. Select Forbid HO (Dedicated) from the
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Control a band
1. Select Band Control.
2. Select a band from the Band Setting area.
Control the specified ARFCN
2. Select Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle) from the
3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target
ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN
in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor
to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.
Control the ARFCN of the serving cell
2. Select Lock Serving ARFCN (Idle) from the
Invert the CBA
2. Select CBA Invert from the Function Select
area.
NOTE
l For the forcing handover, if the entered or selected ARFCN is not the ARFCN of a neighboring cell,
the forcing handover fails.
l If the specified ARFCN or the ARFCN of a serving cell is controlled successfully, the cell reselection
is not performed on the MS in idle state until the MS is in non-dedicated state.
Step 4 Click Apply. The forcing feature is performed on the MS.
Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. The latest forcing feature state of the MS is displayed in
the MS Current State area.
----End
Related References
12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM
The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble
codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode.
Prerequisite
GENEX Probe
11-11
Context
After the UARFCN is locked successfully, the test terminal can perform cell reselection or cell
handover only in the cell that uses the locked UARFCN. The cell reselection or cell handover
cannot be performed in the cell that spans UARFCN.
When a scrambling code is locked, the corresponding UARFCN needs to be locked at the same
time. After the scrambling code is locked successfully, the test terminal is not allowed to perform
cell reselection or cell handover.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > WCDMA Forcing Feature. The WCDMA Forcing
Feature dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test.
Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the forcing feature.
If ... Then ...
Lock the specified UARFCN
1. Choose Lock ARFCN.
2. Enter a UARFCN that exists on the current network in the
Target ARFCN area.
If the entered UARFCN does not exist on or covered by
the current network, the UARFCN cannot be locked.
Lock the scrambling code
1. Choose Lock ARFCN&PSC.
2. Select the mode for obtaining a scrambling code.
l If you choose Select PSC, select a scrambling code
among the scrambling codes under the current
UARFCN.
l If you choose Input PSC, enter a UARFCN that exists
on the current network in the Target ARFCN area, and
then enter the scrambling code in the Input PSC text
box.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test.
You can click Default to recover the terminal status.
Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire UE State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is
displayed in the UE Current State area.
----End
Related References
12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions
consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and
locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.
Prerequisite
The Probe is connected with UEs, and the UEs can be enabled by the Probe. For details, see 7.4
Context
l Locking the network
According to the mobile country code (MCC) and mobile network code (MNC), the UE
camps on a specific PLMN after the network is locked.
l Locking EARFCN and band
After the EARFCN is locked in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover
if the UE originates a call. In such a case, the UE remains on the destination EARFCN.
After the band is locked in idle state, the band is locked in dedicated state. In such a case,
the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band.
l Locking a cell
According to the EARFCN and physical cell identity (PCI), the UE camps on a specific
serving cell after a cell is locked.
l Turning over the CBA
The CBA is a parameter configured for the LTE system to control whether the UE is allowed
to access a cell. When the cell is under construction, the CBA value indicates that the
common subscriber cannot access the cell. In this case, the UE can access this cell through
the CBA turn-over function to verify the functions of this cell.
l Locking the transmit power of the PUSCH
According to the transmit power of the PUSCH within the specified range, perform the
related operations. Then, the UE uses the constant transmit power to transmit signals and
the power control function does not take effect. In this case, the cell performance can be
evaluated.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > LTE Forcing Feature. The LTE Forcing Feature dialog
box is displayed.
For details about the parameters in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21 Parameters
for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM.
Step 2 Select a UE from the Device drop-down list.
The EARFCN of the serving cell that the UE camps on is displayed in Serving ARFCN. The
PCI of the serving cell is displayed in Serving PCI.
Step 3 Select the forcing feature.
For details about the parameters, see 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature
Test.
GENEX Probe
11-13
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the UE performs the forcing feature test.
The latest forcing feature status of the UE is displayed in the MS Current State area.
Click Reset. Then, the UE status is recovered.
----End
Related References
12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test
11.3 IP Analysis
The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then
obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols
through the IP analysis.
Prerequisite
l The WinPcap tool is already installed on the PC.
l The Network Monitor Driver protocol components are already installed.
If the Network Monitor Driver protocol components are not installed, the network
protocol analysis cannot be performed.
The method for installing the Network Monitor Driver protocol components is as follows:
1. Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) on the General tab page. Then, click Install.
3. Double-click Protocol in the Select Network Component Type dialog box.
4. Select Network Monitor Driver in the Select Network Protocol dialog box.
5. Click OK. The installation is complete.
l The test plan related to the data services is already configured on the Probe. For details,
see 8.4 Designing Test Plans.
Context
The Probe supports the analysis of the following network protocols:
l Transport layer protocols: Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram
Protocol (UDP)
l Network layer protocols: Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) and Internet Protocol version
6 (IPv6)
The Probe disables the IP analysis function by default.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the IP analysis function.
1. Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is
displayed.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2. Click . The IP Settings dialog box is displayed.
3. Select On in Packet Capture to enable the IP analysis function.
Off indicates that the IP analysis function is disabled.
4. Click OK.
Step 2 Execute the configured test plan.
For details, see 8.5 Performing a Test Plan.
Step 3 View the information about the protocols used by data packets.
Choose View > Message > IP Messages.
l Time: indicates the time for reporting data packets.
l Source: indicates the source IP address.
l Destination: indicates the destination IP address.
l Protocol: indicates the used protocols.
l Info: indicates the information about data packets.
----End
GENEX Probe
11-15
About This Chapter
This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when
you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe.
This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component,
the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window
This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand
the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data.
This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the
This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this
section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner.
This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can
refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test
terminal.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 12 Interface Reference of the Probe
12-1
This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner.
You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test
This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to
these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan
in the Test Plan Control window.
This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the engineering parameters.
This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map.
This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer
offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the
IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the
Layer Offset dialog box.
12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties
This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display
properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the
layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box.
12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event
This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when
you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box.
This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters
when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box.
12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications
This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related
parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs.
12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings
This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when
synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay
mode.
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to
the description when configuring the properties of the list view.
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer
to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view.
This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this
part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing
Feature dialog box.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this
part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature
dialog box.
This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set
parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by
referring to this section.
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM
This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer
to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the
GSM C/A Setting dialog box.
This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting
a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file.
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner
This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel
DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.
GENEX Probe
12-3
This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component,
the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
Figure 12-1 shows the Test Plan Control window and Table 12-1 provides the description of
the Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window

Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window
1 Toolbar for Controlling the
Test Plan
Provides the shortcut icon for editing the test
item and controlling the test plan.
2 Test item list Provides the default test item. You can select the
test item according to requirements.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
3 Attribute and statistics value
list
Contains the Config and Statistic tab pages.
l Config tab page: You can set the properties
of each test item.
l Statistic tab page: Displays the statistics
value of the test item that is performed. For
detailed description of the parameters, see
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the
Test.
4 List of the test item that is
performed
Displays the test item that is performed.

Toolbar for Controlling the Test Plan
You can edit the test item and control the test plan by clicking the corresponding icons. Table
12-2 shows the toolbar.
Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar
Importing the test plan Enables you to open a configured
test plan (in .xml format).
Exporting the test plan Enables you to save a configured test
plan (in .xml format).
Starting the test plan Enables you to start performing the
test item configured in the test plan.
Stopping the test plan Enables you to stop all the test items
that are being performed.
Moving the test item
upward
Enables you to move the selected
test item upward.
Moving the test item
downward
Enables you to move the selected
test item downward.
Deleting Enables you to delete the selected
test item.

Related Tasks
GENEX Probe
12-5
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter
management Window
This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand
the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
Figure 12-2 shows the Engineering Parameter management window. Table 12-3 provides
the description of the Figure 12-2.
Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window

Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window
1 Engineering Parameter
toolbar
Provides shortcut icons for importing, exporting,
adding, and deleting a row.
2 Field name of the
engineering parameter
Displays the field name of the engineering
parameter.
3 Engineering parameter list Displays the value corresponding to each field
name of the engineering parameter.
4 Status bar of the engineering
parameter
Displays the network protocol corresponding to
the imported engineering parameter.

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Engineering Parameter Toolbar
The engineering parameter toolbar is in the upper areal of the Engineering Parameter
management window. The icon description is provided in Table 12-4.
Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window
Importing the
Enables you to import the
engineering parameter. You can
click the icon to open the Select
File dialog box. For detailed
description about the parameter, see
12.11 Parameters for Importing
the Engineering Parameters.
Exporting the
Enables you to export the
engineering parameter. After you
click the icon, the xls or xlsx file is
opened automatically. If the
engineering parameters of multiple
network protocols exist, the xls or
xlsx file contains multiple sheets
whose names are corresponding to
the network protocols displayed in
the status bar of the Engineering
Parameter management dialog
box.
Application Enables you to make the editing
operation to take effect. You can
click the icon to apply the editing
result to the file of the current
engineer parameter.
Adding a row Enables you to add a row in the sheet.
You can click the icon to add a row
in the engineer parameter sheet.
Checking the templates
of engineering
parameters
Enables you to view engineering
parameter templates of different
networks in the default path provided
by the Probe. You can modify the
format of the current engineering
parameter table based on the project
reference template to ensure that the
format of the engineering parameter
table meets the requirements of the
Probe.
The default path is as follows:
Software Installation Directory
\Template\Engineering
Parameters.
GENEX Probe
12-7
Deleting a row Enables you to delete a row. You can
click the icon to delete a row where
the selected engineer parameter is
located.

Related Tasks
This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
Figure 12-3 shows the OutdoorMap window. Table 12-5 provides the description of the Figure
12-3.
Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window
1 Outdoor map toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common outdoor map
operations.
2 Displaying area of the
outdoor map
Displays the outdoor map imported, event occurred, and
drive test route.
3 Map Layers window Indicates the layer management window that provides
the operation entry for the layer management of the
device layer and air interface parameters.
4 Outdoor map status bar Displays the longitude and latitude of the current
position and distance of the test points on the map.

Outdoor Map Toolbar
The OutdoorMap window provides the entry for common outdoor map operations. You can
open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For the
description of the toolbar, see Table 12-6.
Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar
Icon Map Shortcut Menu Name Description
- Opening the
MapInfo map
Enables you to open the
MapInfo map. The
extension is .tab or .gst.
- Saving a map Enables you to save the
map to a .gst file.
- Opening the
raster map
Enables you to open the
raster map. The extension
is .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif,
or .png.
Layer Control Layer control Enables you to manage
layers or change
displaying or labeling
properties. For details, see
5.4 Configuring Layer
Properties.
Changes are only
temporary and cannot be
saved in the project.
GENEX Probe
12-9
- Cell search Searches for the
information about a
specified cell on the map.
Currently, only the GSM
and WCDMA network
systems are supported.
Search results are valid
only engineering
parameters are used.
Tools > Zoom In Zooming in Enables you to enlarge a
portion of the map to view
it in more detail.
Tools > Zoom Out Zooming out Enables you to view a
larger area than the current
map view.
Tools > Zoom Zooming in or
out
Enables you to zoom in or
out in an area on the map.
Clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
rightward indicates
zooming in on the map;
clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
leftward indicates
zooming out on the map.
Tools > Pan Moving the
map
Enables you to move the
map. You can click the
map and hold down the
mouse to move the map.
Tools > Center Center map Enables you to set any
point on the map as the
center. You can click the
icon and then click a spot
on the map. The map is
centered around the spot.
Tools > Center Selection tool Enables you to select the
object contained in the
current layer. You can
select multiple objects by
holding down Ctrl.
Tools > Rectangle
Select
Rectangle
selection tool
Enables you to select all
the objects in a rectangle.
You can click the map and
move the mouse to form a
rectangle area.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Tools > Distance Ruler Enables you to measure the
distance between two
points on the map. You can
click a point on the map as
the starting point and drag
the mouse to any direction.
The system displays the
distance from the starting
point to the point where the
mouse stops on the status
bar at the bottom of the
outdoor map window.
Entire Map Viewing Enables you to view the
map. You can open the
Zoom to dialog box to
selectively zoom out the
selected layer.
Tools > Arrow Arrow tool Displays a position in the
map. You can move the
mouse to the position
where you are interested
in. Then, the name of the
position is displayed.
- Drawing a grid Displays the grid and
legend of a map.
- Label Enables you to label the
engineering parameters on
the map.
- Clearing the
map
Enables you to clear the IE
or track information in the
current map layer. The cell
site information is not
cleared.

Map Layers Window
The Map Layers window is in the right pane of the OutdoorMap window. You can right-click
the map and choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the Map Layers window.
Figure 12-4 shows the Map Layers window and Table 12-7 provides the description of Figure
12-4.
GENEX Probe
12-11
Figure 12-4 Map Layers window

Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window
No. Name Icon Map Shortcut
Menu
Description
1 Layer
toolbar
Add Layer Enables you to add
the air interface
parameter layer.
You can click the
icon to open the
Add Layer dialog
box to add the air
interface parameter
layer.
Remove Layer Enables you to
remove a selected
layer. After you
click the icon, the
layer node in the
Map Layers
window is deleted.
In addition, the data
that displays the
layer on the map is
deleted.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
No. Name Icon Map Shortcut
Menu
Description
Edit Layer Enables you to edit
the layer properties.
You can click the
icon to open the
Layer Parameter
dialog box to edit
the layer properties.
For details, see 5.5
Configuring
Legend
Properties.
2 Area of
editing the
layer
- - Enables you to edit
the added layer.

Related Tasks
This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
Figure 12-5 shows the IndoorMap window. Table 12-8 provides the description of the Figure
12-5.
Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window
GENEX Probe
12-13

Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window
1 Indoor map toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common
indoor map operations.
2 Displaying the display area of the
indoor map
Displays the indoor map imported, event
occurred, and drive test route.
3 Map Layers window Indicates the layer management window that
provides the operation entry for the layer
management of air interface parameters.

Indoor Map Toolbar
The IndoorMap window provides the entry for common map operations. You can open the
related window or perform related operations by click certain icons. For the detailed description
of the toolbar, see Table 12-9.
Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar
- Opening the raster
map
Enables you to open the grid
map (the extension is .tif
or .bmp.)
Localizer Locating the point
manually
-
Zoom In Zooming in Enables you to zoom in on
the map.
Zoom Out Zooming out Enables you to zoom out on
the map.
Pan Zooming in or out Enables you to zoom in or
out in an area on the map.
Clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
rightward indicates
zooming in on the map;
clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
rightward indicates
zooming out on the map.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Arrow Arrow tool Displays a position in the
map. You can move the
mouse to the position where
you are interested in, and
then the name of the
position is displayed.
- Viewing Enables you to selectively
zoom out the selected layer.
Undo Undoing the last
operation
Enables you to cancel the
previous operations of
locating the points.
This tool is enabled to the
drive test mode.
- Clearing the map Enables you to clear the IE
or track information in the
current map layer.
During a horizontal test, the
IE information and track
information can be cleared
when the tracks of points are
controlled manually. When
the tracks of points are
controlled automatically,
that is, the test is performed
according to the predefined
tracks, only IE information
is cleared, and the track
information is not cleared.

Map Layers Window
The Map Layers window is in the right pane of IndoorMap. You can right-click the map and
choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the window.
Figure 12-6 shows the Map Layers window. Table 12-10 provides the description of the Figure
12-6.
GENEX Probe
12-15
Figure 12-6 Map Layers window

Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window
No. Name Icon Description
1 Layer toolbar Enables you to add the air
interface parameter layer.
Enables you to delete the layer.
After you click the icon, the layer
node in the Map Layers window
is deleted. In addition, the data
that displays the layer on the map
is deleted. You can click the
icon to add the layer that is
deleted.
Enables you to edit the layer
properties. You can click the icon
to open the Layer Parameter
dialog box to edit the layer
properties.
For details, see5.5 Configuring
Legend Properties.
2 Area of
editing the
layer
- Displays the name of the layer
that is added and configures
whether to display the layer on the
map.

Related Tasks
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data.
Figure 12-7 shows the test data view of the Probe. Table 12-11 shows the description of Figure
12-7.
NOTE
Take the BA List, Radio Parameter, Information, and Power views as examples.
Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view

Table 12-11 Description of the test data view
View Name View Type Description
BA List view List view Displays test data in tables.
Power view Chart view Displays test data in charts.
Radio Parameter view Mixed view Displays the changed value of each
parameter directly by using the
combination chart and list view.
GENEX Probe
12-17
View Name View Type Description
Information view Plain text view Displays the basic information about the
logfile, the event information, and the
statistics of events and KPIs in the
logfile.

Related Tasks
10.2 Browsing Data
This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the
Figure 12-8 shows the Line Chart window. Table 12-12 provides the description of the Figure
12-8.
Figure 12-8 Line Chart window

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window
1 Chart display
area
Displays the IE information of each chart in a line chart or
bar chart.
2 Axis display area Displays the value range and color of the selected IE in the
axes of each chart. You can change the properties of the IE
through the shortcut menu in the view window. For the
description of the shortcut menu, see 12.20 Parameters for
Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View.
3 Scroll bar of the
chart display
area
l If you click , the scroll bar moves leftwards by one
second, and the data presented one second ago is
displayed in the view.
l If you click , the scroll bar moves rightwards by one
second, and the data presented one second later is
displayed in the view.
l If you click the blank area between and , the scroll
bar moves leftwards by one page, and the data presented
60 seconds ago is displayed in the view.
l If you click the blank area between and , the scroll
bar moves rightwards by one page, and the data presented
60 seconds later is displayed in the view.
l If you click Lock, the system status is changed to
UnLock. In this case, you can drag to check the data
of the specific position. If you click UnLock again, the
system status is changed to Lock. The Probe resumes the
test or replay.
4 Legend area Legend of an IE. You can double-click the name of an IE to
change its properties.
5 Text display area IE information displayed in text format, which consists of
the IE name, value, and the name of the corresponding
terminal.

Related Tasks
10.2 Browsing Data
This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this
section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner.
GENEX Probe
12-19
Parameters in the Device Configure Window
Parameter Description
Name Indicates the name of the added device.
Model Indicates the model of the added device.
COMPort Indicates the COM port of the added device.
ModemPort Indicates the modem port number of the added device.
If Modem port is not configured in the Device Configure dialog
box, Not Configure is displayed.
State Indicates the current state of the added device.
l Down: The device is added but not connected.
l Searching: The system is searching for the port corresponding
to the device.
l Disconnect: The device is disconnected.
l Connected: The device is connected.

Common Parameters for Configuring External Devices
Name Indicates the name of the external device. The system names the
added device automatically and displays the name.
Type Indicates device types. The options are as follows:
l MS
l GPS
l Scanner
Model Indicates the model of the external device. For the type and
specifications of the external devices that are supported by the
Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.

Parameters for Configuring GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA Test Terminals
Name Indicates the name of the currently added test terminal.
Type Indicates the type of the currently added device: MS.
Model Indicates the actual model of the MS. For the models of the test
terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Baud rate Indicates the baud rate of the MS. It must be the same as the actual
setting of the MS. The options are 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400, 256000, 460800,
and 921600.
COM port Indicates the actual COM port used by the MS after the MS is
connected to the PC.
You can view the actual port number of the MS under the Ports
(COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window.
Modem port Indicates the actual modem port used by the MS after the MS is
In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding
device under the Modem node, and then select Properties. You
can view the actual modem port number on the Modem tab page.
If you want to perform a data service test or send AT commands,
Modem port must be set. In other cases, Modem port need not
be set.
Adjust antenna Indicates the antenna gain of the MS. Only the GSM and WCDMA
modes are supported.
You can select either of the following values:
l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the MS.
l Enable: set the antenna gain of the MS.
If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the
displayed UE External Antenna Setting dialog box. The value
ranges from 1 to 100 and can be a decimal.
The default value is Disable.
CAUTION
For the MS to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the
antenna gain as required.
For the MS to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the
antenna gain, the accuracy of counters such as the Received Signal Strength
Indicator (RSSI), Received Signal Level (RxLev), or Received Signal Code
Power (RSCP) may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select
Disable.

Parameters for Configuring the WiMAX Test Terminal
Name Indicates the name of the currently added MS.
Model Indicates the model of the WiMAX test terminal. For the models
of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test
Terminal.
GENEX Probe
12-21
TE Indicates the terminal that is connected to the PC.
l WiMAX_GCT: Four GCT terminals can be configured.
l WiMAX_Runcom: Only one terminal can be configured.
Card Index Indicates the index of the terminal. The system allocates one index
according to the selected TE. The index is allocated from 1.

Parameters for Configuring the LTE Test Terminal
Name Indicates the name of the currently added MS.
Model Indicates the model of the LTE test terminal. For the models of the
test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.
OMAGENT IP address Indicates the IP address of a PC that is connected to an LTE UE
1.X terminal. For LTE UE 2.0 terminals, this parameter is not
required.
OMAGENT port Indicates the port corresponding to OMAGENT IP address. You
need not set this parameter manually. The default value, 3000, is
recommended.
UE IP address Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal
provided by the Windows operating system.
For details, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?.
UE port Indicates the port corresponding to UE IP address. You do not
need to set this parameter manually. The default value, 5000, is
recommended.

Parameters for Configuring the GPS
Name Indicates the name of the currently added GPS.
Type Indicates the type of the currently added device: GPS.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Model Indicates the protocol used for the communication with the
configured GPS. You can select NMEA or TEXT. NMEA is the
GPS protocol that is used internationally. TEXT is the protocol
provided by GARMIN, and only support the GPS of the GARMIN
series such as 12XL and Vista.
NOTE
If you select TEXT, you need to change the default output format of the
GPS to TEXT.
For the GPS models supported by the Probe, see GPS.
Baud rate Indicates the baud rate of the GPS. The options are 4800, 9600,
14400, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400,
256000, 460800, and 921600.
COM port Indicates the actual COM port used by a GPS after the GPS is
You can view the actual port number of the GPS under the Ports

Parameters for Configuring Scanners
Name Indicates the name of the currently added scanner.
Type Indicates the type of the currently added device: Scanner.
Model Indicates the model of a scanner. Note that PCTEL EX scanners
support multi-mode tests and multi-band tests.
For the scanner models supported by the Probe, see Scanner.
COM port Indicates the actual COM port used by the scanner after the scanner
is connected to the PC.
You can view the actual port number of the scanner under the Ports
Protocol Indicates the protocol that is supported by the connected scanner.
GENEX Probe
12-23
Band Indicates the frequency band that is supported by the connected
scanner.
l GSM
GSM850 (869 MHz to 894 MHz), E-GSM (925 MHz to 960
MHz), DCS1800 (1805 MHz to 1880 MHz), and PCS 1900
(1930 MHz to 1990 MHz).
l WCDMA
Band I DL (2110.0 MHz to 2170.0 MHz), Band I UL (1920.0
MHz to 1980.0 MHz), Band II (1930.0 MHz to 1990.0
MHz), Band III (1805.0 MHz to 1880.0 MHz), Band IV
(2110.0 MHz to 2155.0 MHz), Band V (869.0 MHz to 894.0
MHz), and Band VIII (925.0 MHz to 960.0 MHz).
l CDMA
Band 0 (869.61 MHz to 893.40 MHz), Band 0 (860.64 MHz
to 874.38 MHz), Band 1 (1930.65 MHz to 1989.35 MHz),
Band 3 (860.6375 MHz to 869.3625 MHz), and BAND 5
(461.95 MHz to 466.85 MHz).
l WiMAX
2.5 GHz (2498.50 MHz to 2687.50 MHz) and 3.5 GHz
(3402.50 MHz to 3597.50 MHz).
Instance Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the
Anritsu ML874X series (for example, ML8740 or ML8742) after
the scanner is connected to the PC. You need to select an interface
number that is not used by another scanner.
If the scanner of the Anritsu ML874X series is not connected to the
PC, select Not Configure.
1394 Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the
Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series after the scanner is connected to
the PC. You need to select an interface number that is not used by
another scanner.
If only one TSMX scanner is connected, select 1. If the scanner of
the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series is not connected to the PC,
select Not Configure.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Adjust antenna Indicates the antenna gain of the scanner. Only the scanners of the
PCTel SeeGull LX series and the EX series are supported.
You can select either of the following values:
l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the scanner.
l Enable: set the antenna gain of the scanner.
If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the
displayed Scanner External Antenna Setting dialog box. The
Probe may automatically compensate the antenna or cable loss
of the scanner.
CAUTION
For the scanner to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the
antenna gain as required.
For the scanner to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the
antenna gain, the accuracy of indicators such as the RSSI, RxLev, or RSCP
may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select Disable.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can
refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test
terminal.
LogCode Displays the name of the data package.
Select Indicates that whether the test terminal reports the data package.
Filter Indicates the mode that the Probe adopts to collect data packages:
l No Filter: The Probe collects all the data packages reported by
the terminal.
l By Periods: The Probe collects the data packages reported by
the terminal periodically.
l All Filter: The Probe does not collect the data packages reported
by the terminal.
Interval Indicates the sampling interval. The Probe collects data packets at
the sampling intervals set here. Redundant data packets are
discarded.

GENEX Probe
12-25
Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner.
You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test
Adds the parameters of the test item.
Name Displays the selected test item.
Status Displays the current status of the test item.
l Ready: Indicates the ready status.
l Testing: Indicates the testing status.
l Finish: Indicates the finish status.
Progress Displays the count for which the test item is performed. The
format is n/N. n indicates the count for which a test item is
currently performed and N indicates the total count for which a
test item is performed.
Parameters for setting the properties of the added test item.
Property Displays the property name of the test item.
Value Enables you to set values of the Property.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to
these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan
in the Test Plan Control window.
Parameters for Monitoring the Test
The list for monitoring the test is in the lower pane of the Test Plan Control window to display
the status of the test item.
Time Displays the time for performing the current test item.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Name Displays the name of the test item that is currently performed.
Info Displays the status of the test item that is currently performed,
containing begin, failure, and success.

Parameter Description of the Statistic Tab Page
The Statistic tab is in the right pane of the Test Plan Control window to display the statistics
value of the test item.
Type Displays the statistics type defined by the system.
l Total Count: Indicates the total count for which the current test item
is performed.
l Success Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item
is successfully performed.
l Failure Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item
fails to be performed.
l Success Rate: Indicates the percentage of the count for which the
current test item is performed to the total count for which the current
test item is performed.
Value Displays the statistics result of the test item that is currently performed.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the engineering parameters.
Parameters in the Select File Dialog Box
Engineering
parameter file
Enables you to choose the required engineering parameter file in
xls, xlsx, or csv format.
Select Protocol Enables you to select the network protocol corresponding to the
engineering parameter, including GSM, WCDMA, CDMA,
WiMAX, and LTE.
GENEX Probe
12-27
Config Neighboring
Cell
Indicates whether to configure the neighboring cell parameters.
l Horizontal: indicates the horizontal neighboring cell
The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell
fields are in the same line of the same table. Horizontal
neighboring cells support only the GSM network system. In this
case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell
fields.
l Vertical: indicates the vertical neighboring cell
Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation.
Vertical neighboring cells support the GSM, WCDMA,
WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case, engineering
parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you
need to import the corresponding engineering parameter when
importing a neighboring cell.
Neighboring cell file Enables you to choose the required vertical neighboring cell file.

Parameters in the Match Parameters Dialog Box
Select Sheet Enables you to select the form where the project parameters are
located.
Excel Param Displays all the field names of the imported engineering parameter.
Probe Param Displays the field name corresponding to the engineering
parameters on the Probe.
Match Enables you to match the field name in the form where the
engineering parameters are located. You can select the row where
the unmatched field is located, and then click Match to open the
Match Data dialog box. Perform related matching operation. For
the parameter description, see Parameters in the Match Data
Dialog Box.
Cancel Enables you to cancel the matching operation.
Customize Enables you to customize the engineering parameters. You can
click Customize to open the Customize Parameters dialog box.
Perform related customizing operation. For the parameter
description, see Parameters in the Customize Parameters
Dialog Box.

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameters in the Match Data Dialog Box
Excel Parameter Displays the selected field name in the Match
Parameters that needs to be matched.
Param List Displays the imported engineering parameters.

Parameters in the Customize Parameters Dialog Box
Param List Mandatory Displays the mandatory field name of the
engineering parameter.
For the parameter description, see 6.1
Engineering Parameters Supported in
Different Network Systems.
Optional Displays the optional field name of the
engineering parameter.
For the parameter description, see 6.1
Engineering Parameters Supported in
Custom Displays the customized field names of the
Add Enables you to add the customized field
name.
Delete Enables you to delete the customized field.
You can choose the field under the
Custom node. Click Delete to delete the
customized field.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map.
Label Indicates the name of the reference point.
Longitude Indicates the longitude of the reference point.
GENEX Probe
12-29
Latitude Indicates the latitude of the reference point.
PixelX Indicates the X coordinate value of the reference point. The range
is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map.
PixelY Indicates the Y coordinate value of the reference point. The range
is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer
offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the
IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the
Layer Offset dialog box.
Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog Box
Range List Interval Displays the range within which the
legend is configured.
Symbol Displays the symbol whose legend is
configured.
Add Enables you to add the legend. You can
click the icon to open the Add Color
Range dialog box to add the legend.
For detailed description of the
parameter, see Parameters for
Editing the Legend Attributes.
Edit Enables you to set the legend
properties. You can click the icon to
open the Edit Color Range dialog box
to configure the properties for the
legend that is selected. For detailed
description of the parameters, see
Parameters for Editing the Legend
Attributes.
Remove Enables you to remove a selected
legend.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Auto Setup Enables you to set the color of the
legend. You can click the icon to open
the Color Range Auto Setup dialog
box to configure the number of color
ranges of the legend in Interval.

Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes
Start Enables you to set the start value of the
legend.
End Enables you to set the end value of the
legend.
Symbol Font Enables you to set the font of the
legend.
Size Enables you to set the size of the
legend.
Shape Enables you to set the shape of the
legend.
Color Enables you to set the color of the
legend.
Example Displays the example whose legend is
configured.

Parameters for Configuring the Layer Offset
X(m) Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total length
of the map.
Y(m) Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total width
of the map.
Lock X and Y Indicates whether to zoom in or zoom out the map.

Related Tasks
GENEX Probe
12-31
12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control
Properties
This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display
properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the
layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box.
Parameters of the Layer Control Dialog Box
Up Enables you to move a selected layer upwards on the map.
Down Enables you to move a selected layer downwards on the map.
Add Enables you to add a layer above a selected layer. You can click
Add, select a .tab file in the displayed dialog box, and then click
Open.
Remove Enables you to remove a selected layer.
Visible Enables you to set whether the selected layer is visible.
Selectable Enables you to set whether the selected layer is selectable.
Automatic Labels Enables you to set whether the label of the selected layer is visible.
If the label of the selected layer is visible, the layer must also be
visible, that is, if you select Automatic Labels, you must select
Visible at the same time.
Editable Enables you to set whether the selected layer can be edited.
Display Enables you to set the properties of the layer.
In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Display. The
Display Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the display
properties of the selected layer. For the description of the
parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog
Box.
Labels Enables you to set the label properties of the layer.
In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Labels. The Label
Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the label properties of the
selected layer. For the description of the parameters, see
Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box.

GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box
Override style Indicates whether to change the style
of the selected layer.
The style of a layer consists of areas,
lines, symbols, and texts.
Zoom Layering Display Within Zoom
Range
Indicates whether to display map
layer within the zooming range (Min
Zoom to Max Zoom).
Min Zoom Indicates the minimum zoom range.
You can set the maximum zooming
range after selecting Display Within
Zoom Range.
Max Zoom Indicates the maximum zoom range.
You can set the maximum zooming
range after selecting Display Within
Zoom Range.

Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box
Label with DataSet Indicates the data contained in the
selected layer.
Field Indicates the label field list.
Visibility Display within Range Whether to display layer within the
zoom range (Min Zoom to Max
Zoom).
Min Zoom Indicates the minimum zooming
range. You can set the maximum
zooming range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.
Max Zoom Indicates the maximum zooming
range. You can set the maximum
zooming range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.
Allow Overlapped Text Indicates whether to allow
overlapped texts.
Allow Duplicated Text Indicates whether to allow duplicated
texts.
Label Partial Objects Indicates whether to label the partial
object.
GENEX Probe
12-33
Maximum labels Indicates the maximum number of
labeled objects.
Styles Enables you to set the style of the
label text.
Label Lines Enables you select the label lines.
None Indicates that no label line exists.
Simple Indicates the simple label line.
Arrow Indicates the label line with the
arrow.
Enables you to set the corresponding
line style.
Position Orientation Indicates the direction of the anchor
point.
Rotation Enables you to set the rotating
direction.
None Indicates no rotation.
Parallel to One Segment Enables you to rotate a text to make
its direction parallel to one line
segment.
Parallel to Multiple
Segments
Enables you to rotate a text to make
its direction parallel to all the line
segments.
Label Offset Enables you to set rotation offset of
the label.

12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event
This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when
you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box.
Mute all event sounds Indicates whether to disable the sounds of all
predefined events.
Language Displays the voice type. The Probe supports
English and Chinese.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Restore properties of all events Enables you to restore the properties of the all
predefined events. You can click Reset to
restore.
Property EventName Displays the name of a selected predefined
event.
Shown in
EventList
Indicates whether to display a predefined event
in the Event List view window. You can select
True or False.
Shown in Map Indicates whether to display a predefined event
in the indoor map window or outdoor map
window. You can select True or False.
Icon Indicates the icon displayed on the map after a
predefined event is selected.
Voice enabled Indicates whether to play voice when a selected
predefined event occurs. You can select True
or False.
Voice Indicates the voice file that is used during voice
playing.
The parameter is valid when Voice enabled is
set to True.
Value Enables you to set the value of Property.

This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters
when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box.
Icon Indicates the alarm icon displayed on the
map.
AlarmName Indicates the list of alarms, including MS
Disconnection, GPS Disconnection,
Scanner Disconnection, Inadequacy of
GPS Signal, and No Signal.
Setup Alarm Name Displays the name of the selected device
alarm.
Language Displays the voice type. The Probe supports
English and Chinese.
GENEX Probe
12-35
Alarm
Type
Visual Alarm Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm
event by visual alarm.
Audio Alarm Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm
event by audio alarm.
Sound Enables you to select the audio alarm. If you
select the audio alarm, select Audio
Alarm and selects a voice file. Then, the
system automatically plays the voice file
when an alarm of the device occurs.
Description Displays the details about the selected
alarm.

Related Tasks
12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications
This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related
parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs.
System Enables you to select the network system.
Condition Setting IE Name Enables you to select the IE name.
Operator Enables you to select the operator.
Value Indicates the IE value, which must be
within the value range of the IE.
Audio Indication
Setting
Play Indicates whether to play the IE audio
indication during data test or replay.
Sound Indicates the audio indication file.

12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings
This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when
synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay
mode.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Logfile Time Setting Synchronize PC Time
with GPS Time
Indicates whether to synchronize the PC
time with the GPS time.
Time zone Enables you to select the time zone of the
district where you are located. The range
is GMT +12 to GMT -12. After you
select Synchronize PC Timewith GPS
Time, Time Zone becomes available,
and you can set the time zone.
Event Replay Mode Normal Replay Replays the events recorded in the
logfile.
Rejudge Event Rejudges the occurred events according
to the signaling messages in the logfile
during the replaying process.
Logfile Setting Limit type Indicates how to slice the logfile. The
options are as follows:
l No limit: not to slice the logfile
l By time: to slice the logfile by time
(in minutes), working with File size
limit
l By file size: to slice the logfile by file
size (in MB), working with File size
limit
File size limit Indicates the size of the sliced logfile. It
is recommended that the value of this
field be equal to or larger than 10 MB.
File name Indicates the name of a logfile. It is
recommended that its name illustrate the
meaning of the logfile.
File directory Indicates the path where the logfile is
stored.
The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile.
You can click File directory on the right
of to change the path for storing the
logfile. It is not recommended that the
file be stored in the system disk.
Operating System
Setting
TCP window size Indicates the TCP window size, which
ranges from 1 to 65535 bytes.
You are recommended to validate the
settings by restarting the PC after the
settings are complete.
GENEX Probe
12-37
Route File Setting Autosave Indicates whether to automatically save
the GPS information (.tab file) when
recording the logfile. You can select
Yes or No.
Autosave period You can set this parameter when
Autosave is Yes.
The parameter specifies the automatic
save period, and the value ranges from 1
to 300. The default value is 3, and the unit
is second.
Rout file directory Indicates the storage path of the .tab file
containing GPS information.
The name of the .tab file containing GPS
information is the same as that of the
logfile.
The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile.
You can click Rout file directory on the
right of to change the path for storing
the logfile. It is not recommended that
the file be stored in the system disk.

12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List
Views
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to
the description when configuring the properties of the list view.
Tab Parameter Description
Mode Title Indicates the title of the table in the list view.
It can be set based on the actual situation.
Header Indicates the header of the table in the list
view. Select Header to display the header
and deselect Header to hide the header.
The contents of the header can be set on the
Cell Contents tab page.
GridLines Indicates whether to display the grid lines.
Columns Indicates the number of columns of the table
in the list view.
Rows Indicates the number of rows of the table in
the list view.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Font Indicates the fonts of the texts in the table in
the list view. Click Browse to set fonts.
Device Indicates the device list.
If you select a device from Device, the IEs
that are currently displayed in the view
window are collected by the device. The
contents of each IE can be set on the Cell
Contents tab page.
Cell Contents Edit Used to edit the information about a selected
IE.
Select an IE, and then click Edit. Modify the
information about the IE in the displayed IE
Information dialog box.
Description of the parameters in the IE Information dialog box
Contents Device Indicates the device list.
If you select a device from Device, the IEs
that are currently displayed in the view
window are collected by the device.
System Indicates the network protocol of an IE.
Information Indicates the IE list.
Text Specifies the name or value of an IE.
If you select Text, you need not set the
parameters on the View and Color tab pages.
View Value Specifies the value of an IE in the form of
letters and numbers. You can adjust
alignment modes such as Left, Center, and
Right of the value.
Bar Displays the value of an IE through a bar.
The options are as follows:
l Constant Length: Draw a bar with
constant length.
Only a limited number of IEs can be
displayed.
l Max/Min Indicate: Use a vertical line to
indicate an all-time-low or all-time-high
value.
GENEX Probe
12-39
Color Use Default Color
Ranges
Indicates the default color ranges of an IE.
If Use Default Color Ranges is selected, it
indicates that the default values are used. If
Use Default Color Ranges is deselected, it
indicates that the default values are not used.
You can customize the color range according
to your requirements.

Related Tasks
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line
Chart View
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer
to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view.
Parameter of the Set Chart Properties dialog box
Add Enables you to add a view. Currently, you can add two views
at most.
Edit Enables you to set the properties of the IE in the selected
view. Click this button to open the Modify Chart
Properties dialog box. Then you can set the properties of the
IE in the dialog box. For details about parameters, see
Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box.
Delete Enables you to delete the selected view.

Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box
System Network protocol of the IE. The IE matching System is
displayed in the Available area.
For details about the IE, see 14.3 Description of
Information Elements.
Model Displays the name of the configured terminal.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Edit IE Enables you to edit the IE selected in the Selected area. You
can set the maximum value, minimum value, color, and style
of the IE.
Add all Enables you to add all the IEs in the Available area to the
Selected area.
Add Enables you to add the IEs selected in the Available area to
the Selected area.
Remove Enables you to remove the IEs selected in the Selected area
to the Available area.
Remove all Enables you to remove all the IEs in the Selected area to the
Available area.
Selected Displays the added IEs.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this
part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing
Feature dialog box.
Device Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can
select only one MS from the drop-down list at a
time.
Serving ARFCN Indicates the ARFCN of the current serving cell.
Forcing Function Indicates whether to use the forcing function of
the GSM.
Function Select Lock Serving
ARFCN (Idle)
Indicates that the ARFCN of the serving cell is
locked in idle state.
Lock Specific
ARFCN (Idle)
Indicates that the specified ARFCN is locked in
idle state. After selecting Lock Specific
ARFCN (Idle), you can enter an ARFCN in the
Target ARFCN Setting area or select the
ARFCN of the neighboring cell from this area.
Forbid HO
(Dedicated)
Indicates that the handover is forbidden in
dedicated state.
GENEX Probe
12-41
Forbid HO
(Dedicated)
Indicates that the handover is performed forcibly
in dedicated state.
CBA Invert Indicates that the CBA is inverted.
Target ARFCN
Setting
Input ARFCN This parameter is used to specify the destination
ARFCN. After selecting Input ARFCN, enter
an ARFCN in Target ARFCN.
Select Neighbor This parameter is used to select the ARFCN of
the destination neighboring cell. After selecting
Select Neighbor, select the ARFCN of the
neighboring cell from the text box at the bottom.
The selected ARFCNs of the neighboring cell are
displayed in the Target ARFCN area.
Target ARFCN This area is used to enter the destination ARFCN.
Band Control Indicates whether to use the band control
function of the MS.
Band Setting Indicates the controlled band. After selecting
Band Control, you can select the controlled
band from Band Setting.
MS Current State Indicates the current forcing state of the MS.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this
part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature
dialog box.
Device Select Indicates the drop-down list of the test terminals.
You can select only one terminal each time.
Lock ARFCN Locks the frequency point in idle status. You can
enter the frequency point in Target ARFCN.
Lock
ARFCN&PSC
Target ARFCN Specifies the target frequency point.
Input PSC Locks the scramble code in idle status. After
choosing Lock ARFCN&PSC, you can enter or
select the scramble code in PSC Setting.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Select PSC Specifies the target scramble code. After
choosing Select PSC, you can select the
scramble code in the text box below. Then, the
selected scramble code is displayed in the
Target PSC area.
UE Current State Displays the current forcing status of the UE.
Click Inquire UE State. Then, the current
forcing status of the UE is displayed.

Related Tasks
This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set
parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by
referring to this section.
Device Select Indicates the drop-down list of the UEs. You can
select only one UE each time.
Serving EARFCN Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency
channel number (EARFCN) used by the serving
cell.
Serving PCI Indicates the physical cell identifier (PCI) of the
serving cell.
Setting EARFCN Indicates the EARFCN used by the locked cell.
PCI Indicates the PCI of the locked cell.
Upper Band Indicates the upper threshold of the locked band.
Lower Band Indicates the lower threshold of the locked band.
MCC Indicates the mobile country code (MCC) for the
locked public land mobile network (PLMN).
MNC Indicates the mobile network code (MNC) for
the locked public land mobile network (PLMN).
PUSCH Power Indicates the transmit power of the locked
physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
Function Select Lock EARFCN Indicates the locked EARFCN of the serving
cell.
GENEX Probe
12-43
Lock EARFCN
and PCI
Indicates the specified EARFCN and PCI that
are locked.
Lock Band Indicates the locked frequency band.
Lock PLMN Indicates the locked PLMN.
According to the MCC and MNC, the UE camps
on a specific PLMN after the network is locked.
CBA Invert Indicates that the CBA turnover is performed on
a cell or all cells.
Lock PUSCH
Power
Indicates the transmit power of the locked
PUSCH.

Related Tasks
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of
the GSM
This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer
to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the
GSM C/A Setting dialog box.
Device Select Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can
select only one MS from the drop-down list at a
time.
MS C/A State OFF Indicates that the C/A measurement is disabled.
1 Channel (-1, +1) Indicates two neighboring ARFCNs of the
current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN
of the current serving cell is 80, the level
difference between the current serving cell and
the cells whose ARFCNs are 79 and 81 is
respectively calculated in C/A measurement.
2 Channel (+2, +1,
-1, -2)
Indicates four neighboring ARFCNs of the
current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN
of the current serving cell is 80, the level
difference between the current serving cell and
the cells whose ARFCNs are 78, 79, 81, and 82
is respectively calculated in C/A measurement.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Apply Indicates that the parameters for performing the
C/A measurement take effect, and then the MS
performs the C/A measurement.
l If the C/A measurement is successful, the
system displays C/A Setting Command
send successfully.
l If the C/A measurement is failed, the system
displays C/A Setting Command send
unsuccessfully. In such a case, you
need to set the parameters again to perform
the C/A measurement.
l If no response is received in two seconds, the
system displays C/A Setting Command
send Timeout. In such a case, you need
to set the parameters or click Apply again to
perform the C/A measurement.
Search MS State Indicates the latest C/A state of the MS, which is
displayed in the MS C/A State area.
l If OFF is performed successfully, the system
displays Phones C/A measurements
NOT be set.
l If 1 Channel (-1, +1) is performed
successfully, the system displays Phones
C/A measurements be set to
measure 1 channel (1).
l If 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2) is performed
successfully, the system displays Phones
C/A measurements be set to
measure 2 channels (1, 2).
MS C/A State Indicates the C/A measurement state of the
current MS.

Related Tasks
This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting
a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file.
GENEX Probe
12-45
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Clear Multi-f)
Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box
Source Enables you to select the source file. You can
click the icon next to Source to select the
logfile to be exported.
Destination Enables you to set the file name and the save
path. You can click the icon next to
Destination to set the save path and file name
of the exported test data.
File Information area Total Indicates the number of data package
contained in the selected logfile.
Start Indicates the start time of recording the data
of the selected logfile.
End Indicates the end time of recording the data
Packet Selection area Index Enables you to set the range of the data
package contained in the exported test data.
Index indicates that the location of the data
package is used as the range of the data
package.
Time Enables you to set the range of the data
Time indicates that the record time of the
data package is used as the range of the data
package.
exported test data. If the data is exported by
Index, you need to enter the location of the
start data package. If the data is exported by
Time, you need to enter the start time.
end data package. If the data is exported by
Time, you need to enter the end time.
Log Wizard - Step Three dialog box
Log Selection area Device Indicates the list of the device contained in
the logfile.
Log Enables you to select the test data to be
exported.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Explore the Exporting Destination Enables you to set whether to automatically
open the exported file. If you select Explore
the Exporting Destination, the folder of the
exported file is automatically opened after
exporting data is complete.

Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Select Multi-f)
Source Indicates the list of the selected logfile.
Add Enables you to select the source file. You can
click Add to select the logfile to be exported.
Delete Enables you to delete the selected logfile in the
Source area.
Destination area Displays the save path and file name of the
exported test data.
Open Enables you to set the save path and file name
Selected Source
File Information
area
File Indicates the size of the selected logfile in the
Source area. The unit is MB.
Total Indicates the number of data packages
contained in the selected logfile in the
Source area.
Start Displays the time at which the system
completes recording the data in the logfile
selected in the Source area.
End Displays the time at which the system
completes recording the data in the logfile
selected in the Source area.
Log Selection area Device Indicates the list of the device contained in the
logfile.
exported.
GENEX Probe
12-47

Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a CSV File
Time Formation Enables you to select the time formation for
the first column of the exported CSV file. The
options are as follows:
l GMT: Indicates the GMT time when the
data package is parsed. The format is
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
l TickCount: Indicates the Tick value of
the CPU when the data package is parsed.
The unit is ms.
package.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
package.
the logfile.
exported.
Log Wizard - Step Four dialog box
Time Formation Enables you to select the time formation. You
can select GMT and TickCount.
Separate Character Comma Enables you to separate exported CSV files
by using commas.
Tab Enables you to separate exported CSV files
by using tabs.
Semicolon Enables you to separate exported CSV files
by using semicolons.
Customize Enables you to customize the separator (you
can enter the character.)
Set Text Output Character
to head
The exported CSV files contains the column.
Output unit The exported CSV files contains the unit.

GENEX Probe
12-49
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to an MDM File
package.
package.
the logfile.
exported.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Parameters for Converting a PHU File to a Logfile
PHU File Enables you to select the source file. Click
following PHU File to select the PHU file
to be exported.
Destination File Enables you to set the save path and file
name. Click following Destination File
to set the save path and file name of the
exported test data.
File Information area IMSI Displays the mobile subscriber identity
(IMSI) of the PHU.
Start Time Displays the time when the PHU data is
recorded.
exported file is automatically open after the
data exporting is complete.

Related Tasks
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of
the Scanner
This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel
DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.
GENEX Probe
12-51
Columns Data Type Indicates the test data type. Currently, only CW data
is supported.
The parameter is valid when CW Channel or CW
RSSI is selected in the Log area of the Log Wizard
- Step Three dialog box.
Column Header Indicates the header of a column in the file.
Reset Indicates the reset button. It is used to reset the header
modified in Column Header to the default header.
Display Date & Time
with two columns
Indicates whether the data and the time are displayed
in the same column.
Format GPS Indicates the format of GPS information. You can
select the following values:
l Decimal fraction: Display GPS information in
the format of angle.
l Degree: Display GPS information in the format
of degree, minute, and second.
Date & Time Indicates the format of the date and time.
Display with quotation
marks
Indicates that the date and time are enclosed with
quotation marks.
Frequency Indicates the unit of frequency.
File Size FileSize Limited Indicates the size of an exported file. You can select
the following values:
l Records: indicates that the size of the exported
file is determined by the number of data packets
specified in Count.
l Sizes: indicates that the size of the exported file
is the size specified in Count.
GPS information is
necessary
Indicates whether the exported file includes GPS
information. If the parameter is selected, the
exported file includes GPS information. If the
parameter is not selected, the exported file does not
include GPS information.
CW Data Binning by distance Indicates to filter CW data by distance.
Threshold Lower Limit Indicates the threshold of the RSSI. The threshold
ranges from Lower Limit to Upper Limit, in dBm.
Threshold Upper Limit

Related Tasks
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13 FAQs
About This Chapter
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding
causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills.
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to
software start.
13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external
device fails to be connected.
13.3 Problems Related to Views
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the
views.
13.4 Problems Related to Tests
This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and
provides the possible causes and solutions.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-1
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to
software start.
13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?
13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?
13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?
13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program
13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components
13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?
Symptom
The Probe cannot be started normally and the system displays Lock Error:Verify Lock
Failed.
Possible Causes
The possible causes of the fault that the Probe fails to verify the dongle are as follows:
l The dongle is plugged in improperly.
l The system time is changed before the Probe is started.
l The dongle expires.
l The GENEX Shared is abnormal.
l Other dongles exist.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the dongle is plugged in.
Step 2 Check whether the connection between the dongle and the USB port is normal.
Step 3 Check whether the dongle drive is installed correctly. It is recommended that you reinstall the
dongle drive.
Step 4 Check whether the system time is changed. Do not change the system time before starting the
Probe. The dongle controls the authority through the system time. The system time must be the
current time or later than the current time.
Step 5 Check whether the dongle expires. The license of the dongle that expires cannot be used. You
need to apply for a new license.
Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are installed properly. It is recommended that
you reinstall the GENEX Shared components.
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Step 7 Check whether another dongle exists and whether a dongle conflicts with the dongle of the
Probe. It is recommended that you uninstall the Sentinal Drive and reinstall the GENEX Shared.
----End
13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?
Symptom
When the license edition of the Probe is used, the message Error: ESN is not
correct! is displayed and the Probe cannot be started properly.
Possible Causes
The ESN changes and cannot match the license.
Procedure
l Use the dongle edition of the Probe.
l Apply for multiple licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC.
The Probe cannot identify the ESN of the hard disk on the PC because of PC configuration.
In this case, the Probe selectively identifies the ESN of the network adapter on the PC. If
multiple network adapters exist on the PC, the network adapter ESN changes after the
operating system is started. Therefore, you are advised to apply for licenses based on the
number of network adapters on the PC. When the message Error: ESN is not
correct! is displayed, load the corresponding license file to the system again.
----End
13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?
Question
The system displays Selected collating sequence not supported by the
operating system when the Probe is started in the operating system of non-Chinese
version.
Answer
1. Choose Start > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options.
2. In the Regional and Language Options dialog box, click the Languages tab page.
3. Select Install files for East Asian languages and install the files for East Asian languages
as the system prompts you.
13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program
Question
How to uninstall the main program?
Answer
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-3
After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are
deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall
Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Remove.
Step 3 Click Next.
----End
13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components
Question
How to uninstall the GENEX shared components?
Answer
The GENEX shared components remain after the Probe main program is uninstalled. You can
determine whether to uninstall the GENEX shared components according to the actual situation.
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Step 2 In the displayed Add or Remove Programs window, click Change or Remove Programs.
Step 3 Choose Shared.
Step 4 Click Delete.
Step 5 In the uninstall interface displayed, choose Remove.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
----End
13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external
device fails to be connected.
13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails?
13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails?
13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the
PC?
13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals?
13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?
13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS
Fails?
Symptom
After the MS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the MS and fails to check the
connection status of the MS. The system displays The MS cannot be connected!.
Possible Causes
l The MS is not connected correctly.
l The MS parameters are not set correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the MS and the USB port or COM port is normal.
Step 2 Check whether the USB drive is installed properly.
1. Right-click My Computer..
2. Choose Manage from the shortcut menu to open the Computer Management dialog box.
3. Click the Device Manager node.
4. Check whether the corresponding MS port exists under the Ports (COM & LPT)
navigation tree, and check whether the MS port is normal. If the port works abnormally,
reinstall the drive.
Step 3 Check whether the port is correct.
1. On the Probe main interface, click the icon on the Configuration tab page in the
navigation area to open the Device Configure dialog box.
2. In the device list of the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the MS.
3. Check whether the settings in the Device Configure dialog box are consistent with the
settings of the MS. If the settings are inconsistent, set the settings again.
----End
13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner
Fails?
Symptom
After the scanner is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the scanner and fails to
check the connection status of the scanner.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-5
Possible Causes
l The scanner is not connected correctly.
l On the Probe, the scanner parameters are not set correctly.
l Settings of the scanner parameters are inconsistent with the parameters on the Probe.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the scanner and the parallel port or USB port is normal.
Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud
rate, and GPS model are correct.
Step 3 Check whether the scanner protocol is set to Direct and whether the setting of the baud rate of
the scanner is consistent with the setting of the baud rate on the Probe. Default settings, such as
8 data bit, 1 stop bit, and no parity check, are used for the other elements.
----End
13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS
Fails?
Symptom
After the GPS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the GPS and fails to check
the connection status of the GPS.
Possible Causes
l The GPS is not connected correctly.
l On the Probe, the GPS parameters are not set correctly.
l The Probe does not support the interface protocol of the GPS.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the GPS and the parallel port or USB port is normal.
Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud
rate, and GPS model are correct.
Step 3 Check whether the interface protocol of the GPS is set correctly. Currently, the Probe supports
the GPS based on the NEMA0183.
----End
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After
the GPS Is Connected to the PC?
Symptom
The mouse of the PC cannot be used normally after the GPS is connected. The pointer moves
randomly in a large scale on the screen.
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Possible Causes
The system mistakes the GPS as the PS/2 mouse.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties dialog box.
Step 2 On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager.
Step 3 In the Device Manager window, expand the Mice and Other Pointing Devices node.
Step 4 Right-click Microsoft PS/2 Mouse and choose Properties to open the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse
Properties dialog box.
Step 5 On the Driver tab page of the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse Properties dialog box, click Uninstall.
Step 6 In the displayed Confirm Device Removal dialog box, click OK.
----End
13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to
Receive the GPS Signals?
Symptom
The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not report data.
Possible Causes
l The GPS module does not receive sufficient satellite signals.
l The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not function.
l The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Find out whether the GPS signals are blocked.
Step 2 Connect the testing PC with external handset GPS device. The recommended model is GARMIN
60.
Step 3 Send the PCTel DTI equipment to the specified servicing station to repair.
----End
13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?
Question
Before performing service tests in the LTE network, the Probe must be configured with LTE
UEs. How can I configure an LTE UE?
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-7
Answer
Step 1 Connect an LTE UE to a PC.
Two Ethernet ports and one serial port on the PC are used to connect to the debug Ethernet port
(ETH) and service Ethernet port (FE/GE) on the UE.
l A Y-shaped cable is connected to the debug Ethernet port on the UE. The connector (Debug)
of the Y-shaped cable is connected to the serial port on the PC through a serial cable. The
connector (Ethernet) of the Y-shaped cable is connected to one Ethernet port on the PC
through an Ethernet cable. For details, see Figure 13-1.
l The service Ethernet port on the UE is connected to the other Ethernet port on the PC through
an Ethernet cable.
Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable
The connector numbered 1 is used to connect to the LTE UE.
The connector numbered 2 is used to connect to the Ethernet port on the PC.
The connector numbered 3 is used to connect to the serial port on the PC.

Step 2 Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal provided by the Windows operating
system. For details, see Figure 13-2.
NOTE
When configuring an LTE UE on the Probe, you must ensure that the typed value of UE IP is the same as
the queried IP address of the host.
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host
e indicates the IP address of the target board, that is, the IP address of the debug Ethernet port of the UE board.
h indicates the IP address of the host, that is, the IP address of the PC that is used to control and communicate
with the UE board. The IP address of the host must be on the same network segment as the IP address of the
debug Ethernet port on the target board.

Step 3 Start the OMT tool.
1. Type the IP address of the host queried in Step 2 in IP.
2. Click OK. The OMT tool is started.
Step 4 Configure parameters that are used for tests on the OMT.
Parameter Description Source
IMSI Indicates the
international mobile
subscriber identity
(IMSI) of a UE.
The core network (CN) allocates the IMSI to
a UE.
PLMN ID Indicates the ID of a
public land mobile
network (PLMN)
where a UE camps on.
It is composed of
mobile network code
(MNC) and mobile
country code (MCC).
This parameter is determined by the operator
network where a UE accesses.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-9
Parameter Description Source
Freq Indicates the E-
UTRA absolute radio
frequency channel
number (EARFCN)
of a UE.
This parameter setting must be consistent with
that of the eNodeB.
Bandwidth Indicates the
bandwidth supported
by a UE.
that of the eNodeB.
FDD/TDD Mode Indicates whether the
FDD or TDD mode is
adopted.
that of the eNodeB.

Step 5 Run the following command to set the IP address of the service Ethernet port on the PC in
command mode:
You must set the IP address of the PC network interface card (NIC) that is connected to the
service Ethernet port of a UE to the service IP address of the UE on the core network side.
arp -s IP address of the PC NIC MAC address of the UE Service IP address of the UE on the
core network side
NOTE
l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service
Ethernet port of the UE.
l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the
core network.
Run the following command to check the configuration result:
arp -a
Step 6 Run the following command to set the route in command mode:
route add IP address of the PC NIC mask Subnet mask Service IP address of the UE -p
NOTE
l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service
Ethernet port of the UE.
l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the
core network.
l p: indicates the permanent route.
Run the following command to check the configuration result:
route print
----End
13.3 Problems Related to Views
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the
views.
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?
13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?
13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails?
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?
Symptom
The Probe fails to open the map windows, including the indoor test map window and outdoor
test map window. The system displays Please install the MapX plug-in.
Possible Causes
The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package.
----End
13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?
Symptom
The Probe fails to open the chart window. The system displays Failed to Create
TeeChart Control! Be sure to have installed it.
Possible Causes
The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package.
----End
13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters
Fails?
Symptom
Exceptions occur when the Probe imports engineering parameters.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-11
Possible Causes
l The network protocol that is selected during the import of engineering parameters is
different from the actual network protocol of the engineering parameters.
l Any of the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table does not meet
the requirements for the Probe.
l The Microsoft Office 2003 or higher is not installed in the PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the network protocol selected during the import of engineering parameters is the
same as the actual network protocol.
For details about how to import engineering parameters, see 6.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
To rectify this fault, do as follows:
Step 2 Check whether the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table meet the
requirements for the Probe.
For details about engineering parameters, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in
Step 3 If the system prompts Open Excel Failed! Please check the Excel
Version!, install the Microsoft Office 2003 or higher.
----End
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA
View Windows?
Symptom
When the Probe performs WCDMA tests, no data is displayed in the following view windows:
AMR Codecs, Vocoder Usage, Cell Search, DRX Mode, and RACH and PRACH.
Possible Causes
When configuring terminals on the Probe, you do not select data packets related to the WCDMA
test in the Filter dialog box. As a result, no data is displayed in the related view windows.
Procedure
l When configuring terminals, select data packets related to the WCDMA test in the Filter
dialog box.
For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected.
Table 13-1 shows data packets that need to be selected.
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected
View Window
Name
Data Packet
AMR Codecs l Ox7143
l 0x7144
Vocoder Usage l 0x5079
l Ox7143
l 0x7144
Cell Search l Ox414C
l Ox4018
l Ox414D
l Ox4019
l Ox414E
l Ox401A
DRX Mode Ox4004
RACH and
PRACH
l Ox4106
l Ox4160
l Ox410D

----End
13.4 Problems Related to Tests
This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and
provides the possible causes and solutions.
13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?
13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature
Test?
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?
13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?
Symptom
l Symptom I: Activating PDP contexts failed and the FTP service test cannot be performed
normally.
l Symptom II: Activating PDP contexts succeeded; however, the FTP service test still cannot
be performed normally.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-13
l Symptom III: The FTP upload or FTP download is disrupted.
Possible Causes
Table 13-2 lists the fault causes.
Table 13-2 Fault cause
Fault Symptom Possible Cause
Symptom I l The modem port is not configured or the configuration is
incorrect.
l The APN is not set.
l The configuration of the dial-up encryption protocol is incorrect.
l The FTP server does not work.
Symptom II The properties of the FTP upload or FTP download test item are set
incorrectly.
Symptom III l The network is blocked.
l The FTP server is overloaded.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the modem port is configured.
1. On the Probe main interface, click . The Device Configure dialog box is displayed.
2. Check the value in the ModemPort column.
If the value in the ModemPort column of the corresponding device is Not Configure, you
can infer that the modem port is not configured. Then, you need to configure the modem
port of the device. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.
Step 2 Check whether the configuration of the modem port is correct.
1. On the Probe main interface, click . The Device Configure dialog box is displayed.
View the port number in the ModemPort column.
2. In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding device under the Modem
node, select Properties, and then view the actual port number of the device on the
Modem tab page.
If the set port number is different from the actual port number, you need to configure the
modem port again. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.
Step 3 Check whether the setting of the APN is correct.
For details, see 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA).
Step 4 Check whether the setting of the dial-up encryption protocol is correct.
Check and ensure that the setting of Security Protocol of the Dial Up test item is correct. For
the description of the Dial Up test item, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.
Step 5 Check whether the properties of the FTP Upload or FTP Download test item are set correctly.
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
For the description of the FTP Upload and FTP Download test items, see 14.1 Description of
Test Items.
----End
13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?
Symptom
l Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed.
l Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that
is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.
Possible Causes
Symptom I l The version number of the Probe is incorrect.
l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205
PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU.
l The version number of the PHU is incorrect.
l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled.
Symptom II The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the
following reasons are excluded.
l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are
different.
l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS.
l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that
is connected to the PSTN SQE Server.
l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server
does not meet the requirement.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe.
Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version.
On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number
of the Probe.
Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU.
Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-15
For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU.
Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same.
1. On the main interface of the Probe, click . The Test Plan Control window is displayed.
View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item.
2. On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click . The Test Plan Editor window
is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties
of the SQE test item.
If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are
different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items.
----End
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network
During the LTE Forcing Feature Test?
Symptom
During the LTE forcing feature test, the UE fails to access the network if the locked ARFCN or
PCI does not exist. The problem persists when users click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature
dialog box. What should I do?
Possible Causes
When the UE fails to access the network, click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box.
After that, the UE does not respond.
Procedure
l Start the UE by using the OMT so that the UE can access the network successfully.
----End
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?
Question
In the WCDMA, how to convert frequencies into UARFCNs?
Answer
l Convert frequencies into UARFCNs.
Uplink
Uplink UARFCN = 5 (F
UL
- F
UL_Offset
). F
UL
indicates the uplink carrier frequency,
and the range is from F
UL_low
to F
UL_high
. F
UL_Offset
indicates the UARFCN formula
offset.
Downlink
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Downlink UARFCN = 5 (F
DL
- F
DL_Offset
). F
DL
indicates the downlink carrier
frequency, and the range is from F
DL_low
to F
DL_high
. F
DL_Offset
indicates the UARFCN
formula offset.
For parameters in the formula are defined in Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)

Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)

----End
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of
Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?
Question
How do I solve the problem that the automatic answer setting of Huawei U1251 is invalid?
GENEX Probe
User Guide 13 FAQs
13-17
Answer
l Check whether Huawei U1251 is connected to earphones.
The automatic answer function can be enabled only after you connect Huawei U1251 to
earphones. Otherwise, the automatic answer setting is invalid.
----End
13 FAQs
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
About This Chapter
This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard
shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view
data through the Probe.
This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties
of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a
test plan.
14.2 Description of Predefined Events
This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and
LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network.
14.3 Description of Information Elements
This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer
to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window.
14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts
This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe.
14.5 PSTN SQE Server
This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality
evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution
of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application
management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink
of the GSM and WCDMA networks.
GENEX Probe
User Guide 14 Appendix
14-1
This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties
of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a
test plan.
14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks
This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing
the test plan, and then complete related settings.
14.1.2 Test Items of MSs
This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing
a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related
operations.
14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners
This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.
14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners
This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations.
14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners
This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can
refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then
perform the related operations.
Related Tasks
14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks
This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing
the test plan, and then complete related settings.
Test Items Supported by the GSM/WCDMA
This describes the test items supported by the GSM and WCDMA.
Test Item Description
AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) Indicates the test of the delay in sending AMR
packets from the calling terminal to the called
terminal, which can be used to detect the end-to-
end delay in a voice call.
AT Control Indicates the access terminal (AT) command test.
Dial Up/Hang Up Indicates the dial-up test.
Email Indicates the email sending test.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
FTP Download Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you
to detect the network performance when
downloading files.
FTP Upload Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to
detect the network performance when uploading
files.
HTTP Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect
the network performance when accessing the
specified web page.
KeyEmul Indicates the key emulation test.
Loop Indicates the loop implementation of multiple test
items.
PS Attach/PS Detach Indicates the attach or detach test of PS services.
MMS Indicates the multimedia message service
(MMS) test. It enables you to detect the network
performance when sending multimedia files.
Multi-FTP Indicates the test of simultaneous FTP upload and
download of a terminal.
Multi-RAB Indicates the test of CS and PS concurrence.
PDP Indicates the test of activating or deactivating the
packet data protocol (PDP).
Ping Indicates the network connectivity test.
SMS Indicates the short message service (SMS) test.
Async SQE(MS-MS) Indicates the bidirectional speech quality
evaluation test between MSs.
SQE(MS-PSTN) Indicates the uplink and downlink speech quality
evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN
SQE Server.
Sync SQE(MS-MS) Indicates the unidirectional speech quality
evaluation test between MSs.
Video Phone Indicates the video phone test.
It is supported by the WCDMA only.
Video Streaming Indicates the video streaming test.
It is supported by the WCDMA only.
Voice Call Indicates the voice call test.
GENEX Probe
14-3
Wait Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from
the previous test item execution to the beginning
of the next test item execution.
WAP Download Indicates the wireless application protocol
(WAP) download test.
WAP Gateway Connection Indicates the WAP gateway connection test.
WAP Logon Indicates the WAP login test.
WAP Page Refresh Indicates the WAP page refreshing test.

Test Items Supported in the CDMA Network
This describes the test items supported by the CDMA.
Dial Up/Hang Up Indicates the dial-up test.
FTP Download Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you to
detect the network performance when downloading
files.
FTP Upload Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to detect
the network performance when uploading files.
HTTP Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect the
network performance when accessing the specified
web page.
items.
MMS Indicates the multimedia message service (MMS)
test. It enables you to detect the network performance
when sending multimedia files.
SMS Indicates the short message service (SMS) test.
Voice Call Indicates the voice call test.
Wait Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the
previous test item execution to the beginning of the
next test item execution.

Test Items Supported in the WiMAX Network System
This describes the test items supported in the WiMAX network system.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
files.
web page.
NetEntry Indicates the network entry test of the MS.
NetSearch Indicates the Beceem frequency scanning test.
Wait Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the
previous test item execution to the beginning of the next
test item execution.

Test Items Supported by the LTE
This describes the test items supported by the LTE.
files.
web page.
Iperf Indicates the network performance test of the transfer
control protocol (TCP) and the user datagram protocol
(UDP).
items.
LTE Attach/LTE Detach Indicates the attach/detach test of data services.
LTE Cell Searching Indicates the cell scanning test on the RRC layer.
LTE Scanning Indicates the RRC spectrum scanning test.

GENEX Probe
14-5
14.1.2 Test Items of MSs
This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing
a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related
operations.
AMR E2E Delay (GSM/WCDMA)
This section describes the properties of the AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item. You can set
the AMR end-to-end delay test by referring to the following descriptions.
The AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item is used to detect the end-to-end delay in a voice call.
CAUTION
When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be
connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the
data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box.
l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected.
l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected.
For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected.
Property Value/Range/Unit Description
Destination MS -
Indicates the destination MS. The MS
is another terminal that is connected
to the Probe.
Destination Number - Indicates the called number.
Test Count - Indicates the number of tests.
Test Interval Unit: s
Indicates the interval between two
tests.
Setup Timeout Unit: s
Indicates the maximum time for call
setup.
If the call cannot be set up within the
period specified by this parameter, the
call setup fails.
Exceptional Interval Unit: s
Indicates the call exceptional interval,
that is, the time from the previous call
drop to the beginning of the next call.
Speech Sample File -
Indicates the voice file that is played
after a call is set up.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Command Type The values are as follows:
l Qualcomm Command:
This command type is
applicable to Qualcomm
chipset-based terminals.
If terminals fail to initiate
calls through Qualcomm
commands, you can
configure a modem port
and set Command
Type to AT Command.
l AT Command: After
you set Command
Type to AT Command,
AT commands can be
issued.
Before setting
Command Type to AT
Command, you need to
check that a modem port
has been configured.
The default value is
Qualcomm Command.
Indicates the terminal command type.
Select the command type according to
the terminal type. Otherwise, call
setup initiated by terminals may fail.

Async SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part
when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals
(such as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on two
Probes.
In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition,
both the PHU terminals must be configured with the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item.
Call Count You can set this property when
Call Type is set to Call by Call.
The default value is 5.
Indicates the number of calls.
Call Duration You can set this property when
The default value is 120, and the
unit is second.
Indicates the call duration.
GENEX Probe
14-7
Call Interval You can set this property when
The value ranges from 1 to 120,
and the default value is 30, and
the unit is second.
Indicates the call interval.
Call Mode The values are as follows:
l Outgoing: Refers to the
outgoing call mode.
l Incoming: Refers to the
incoming call mode.
When selecting Incoming,
you need to set Source
Number and SaveFile only.
The default value is Outgoing.
Indicates the call mode.
Call Type The values are as follows:
l Continuous Call: Refers to a
long call.
l Call by Call: Refers to a short
call, which is controlled by
the number of times a speech
file is played.
The default value is Call by
Call.
Indicates the call type.
Destination
Number
You can set this property when
Call Mode is set to Outgoing.
Indicates the called number.
Exceptional
Interval
unit is second.
Indicates the call exceptional
interval, that is, the time from the
previous call drop to the beginning
of the next call.
MOS Algorithm The values are as follows:
l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.
862.1.
Indicates the MOS algorithm.
MOS Direction - Indicates the MOS direction.
The Half duplex mode, that is the
half duplex interaction mode is
supported by the Probe.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Sample Type - Indicates the type of a speech
sample.
The 5s,English type is supported by
the Probe, that is the five seconds
are spent in playing a speech
sample, and the language of the
speech sample is English.
Save All Result
Files
You can select Yes or No. Determines whether to save all
speech result files.
Source Number You can set this property when
Call Mode is set to Ingoing.
Indicates the caller number.
Score Threshold You can set this property when
Save All Result Files is set to
No.
Indicates the number of times for
scoring the speech quality during
the current call process.
Setup Timeout The default value is 25, and the
unit is second.
setup.
If the call cannot be set up within
the period specified by this
parameter, the call setup fails.
Speech Sample
File
The default speech sample file is
Software installation directory
\Bin\SQE\ResultFile
\VQA_Result.wav.
Indicates the storage path and name
of the recorded speech file.
Time Sync You can select Yes or No. Before performing a speech quality
evaluation test, check whether to
synchronize the PC time of the
calling part with the PC time of the
called part.

AT Control (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the AT Control test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the Access Terminal (AT) control test, and then perform the related operations.
The AT commands and their formats supported by different vendors greatly differ in many ways,
therefore, you need to test the AT commands on each MS.
Property Value/Range/
Unit
Description
Test Count The default value
is 5.
Indicates the number of AT control
tests.
GENEX Probe
14-9
Property Value/Range/
Unit
Description
Command Edition - This property is used to edit test
commands. Click the button in the
right area. Then, add multiple test
commands in the displayed AT
Command Edit dialog box.
AT Command Edit dialog box
AT Command
area
Idle Time Unit: s Indicates the idle time.
AT
Command
The default value
is AT.
Indicates the AT command. The
format of the entered commands
must meet the requirements for the
format of the AT commands.
Add - This parameter is used to add the
values of AT Command and Idle
Time to the list in the left area.
Update - This parameter is used to update the
selected parameters of the
command.
Operate area Up - This parameter is used to move a
command upwards.
Save - This parameter is used to save a
command file.
Delete - This parameter is used to delete a
command.
Load - This parameter is used to load a
command file.
Down - This parameter is used to move a
command downwards.

Dial Up/Hang Up (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the Dial Up and Hang Up test items. You can refer to this part
when performing the data service dial-up connection test, such as FTP, HTTP, Ping, and Wap,
and then perform the related operations.
Dial Up and Hang Up are used to allow several data service sessions to be conducted after one
another. The Dial Up test item enables you to establish a data service connection. The Hang
Up test item enables you to terminate a data service connection.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Test Item Property Value/Range/Unit Description
Dial Test Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of
dial-up tests.
Test Interval The default value is 3, and
the unit is second.
Indicates the interval
between two dial-up tests.
Dial User - Indicates the dial-up user
name.
Certain operators require
authentication in order to
establish a data service
connection. Therefore, you
need to enter the user name
before the dial-up
connection.
Dial Password - Indicates the password for
the dial-up connection.
connection. Therefore, you
need to enter the user
password before the dial-up
connection.
Phone
Number
The default value is *99#. Indicates the phone number
for the dial-up connection.
PDP Type You can select IP or PPP.
l IP: Internet Protocol
l PPP: Point-to-Point
Protocol. It is a link-
layer protocol of point-
to-point links that carry
the data packets of the
network layer.
Indicates the protocol used
in PDP tests.
PDP APN - Indicates the name of the
PDP access point. For
example, the PDP APN of
China Mobile is cmwap or
cmnet.
Timeout You can select 30, 60, 120,
300, or 600. The unit is
second.
Indicates the amount of time
to wait for the success of
dial-up. If the dial-up
connection is not set up
during this period, the dial-
up connection attempt times
out.
GENEX Probe
14-11
Security
Protocol
You can select PAP or
CHAP.
l PAP: Password
Authentication
Protocol. It is used for
authenticating the users
who attempt to log in to
the service system using
the PPP protocol. If the
user name and password
that a user submits to the
PAP needs to be sent to
another program
without encryption, the
PAP protocol must be
used.
l CHAP: Challenge
Handshake
Authentication
Protocol. It is an
acknowledgement mode
used by the PPP server.
It is used for
authenticating a user
when the user initiates a
connection or later.
CHAP.
Indicates the network
security authentication
protocol.
Dial Type You can select RAS or
NDIS.
l RAS: Remote Access
Service. It indicates that
the dial-up is performed
through the modem.
l NDIS: Network Driver
Interface Specification.
It indicates that the dial-
up is performed through
a network adapter. In
this case, Network
Card must be set.
Huawei E1820 Card or
Huawei E182E Card is
recommended.
Indicates the dial-up type.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Network Card You can set this property
when Dial Type is set to
NDIS.
Specifies the network
adapter corresponding to
the data card that is in use
currently.
Under the Network
adapters node in the
Device Manager window,
you can view the name of
the network adapter
corresponding to the data
card that is in use currently.
Traffic Class You can select the
following values:
l background class:
refers to the background
class.
l conversational class:
refers to the
conversational class.
l interactive class: refers
to the interactive class.
l streaming class: refers
to the streaming class.
l subscribed value:
refers to the subscribed
value.
background class.
Indicates the traffic class.
UL Max Rate You can select 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, or 4096.
The unit is kbit/s.
Indicates the maximum
uplink rate.
DL Max Rate You can select 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, 4096, or
8192. The unit is kbit/s.
downlink rate.
UL
Guaranteed
Rate
You can set this property
when Traffic Class is set to
conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.
You can select 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, or 4096.
The unit is kbit/s.
Indicates the uplink
guaranteed rate.
GENEX Probe
14-13
DL
Guaranteed
Rate
You can set this property
when Traffic Class is set to
conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.
You can select 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, 4096, or
Indicates the downlink
guaranteed rate.
Hang Up - - -

Email (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Email test item. When performing the email sending test,
you can refer to the following descriptions.
Before performing the Email test, you must perform the Dial Up test.
From - Indicates the email address of the
originator.
To - Indicates the email address of the
destination.
Subject - Indicates the email subject.
Body Text - Indicates the email body text.
Attachment - Indicates the name of file to enclose
with the email as attachment
(optional).
SMTP server - Indicates the IP address of the
Simple Message Transfer Protocol
(SMTP) server (for example,
smtp.myserver.com).
Email User - Indicates the user name that
accesses the SMTP server.
Email Password - Indicates the password for accessing
the SMTP server.
Test Interval The default value is 5, and the
unit is second.
continuous email tests.
Test Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of email tests.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Disconnection Mode The values are as follows:
l Keep Connected
After the download is
complete, the Probe
performs the next email test
instead of disconnecting
the data connection when
the time specified in Test
Interval is up.
l Disconnected after
transfer completed
The Probe disconnects the
data connection until the
current activated email
service is complete. In the
next email test, you must
perform the dial up test
first.
Disconnected after transfer
completed.
Indicates the mode for
disconnecting the current activated
data connection.
Dial Type You can select RAS or NDIS.
l Remote access service
(RAS): It indicates that the
dial-up is performed
through the modem.
l Network driver interface
specification (NDIS): It
indicates that the dial-up is
performed through a
network adapter. In this
case, Network Card must
be set.
Huawei E1820 Card and
Huawei E182E Card are
recommended.
Indicates the dial-up type.
Dial User You can set this property when
Disconnection Mode is set to
completed.
Indicates the dial-up user name.
authentication for establishing a
data service connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user name
before originating the dial-up
connection.
GENEX Probe
14-15
Dial Password You can set this property when
completed.
Indicates the password for the dial-
up connection.
authentication for establishing a
data service connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user password
before originating the dial-up
connection.
Phone Number You can set this property when
completed.
The default value is *99#.
Indicates the phone number for the
dial-up connection.

FTP Download
This section describes the properties of the FTP Download test item. You can refer to this section
when performing an FTP download test.
Through the FTP download test, you can check network performance during file download.
Before performing an FTP download test, you must check whether your account enables you to
download files to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP
server.
FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Download test
item supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE)
describes the properties of the FTP Download test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE
network.
FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
You must perform a Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA or CDMA FTP Download test.
User - Indicates the user name for
accessing the FTP server.
Password - Indicates the user password for
Remote File - Indicates the IP address of the FTP
server.
The format is ftp://IP address or
domain name/file name
Port The default value is 21. Indicates the port number of the
FTP server.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Write Local File You can select either of the
following values:
l True: indicates that this file is
saved after it is downloaded.
l False: indicates that this file is
not saved after it is
downloaded.
The default value is False.
Indicates whether the file needs to
be saved.
Local File You can set this property when
Write Local File is set to True.
Indicates the filename and the path
for saving files.
You need to set a complete path
such as C:\test.dat.
Multi Task Count The value ranges from 1 to 5, and
the default value is 1.
Indicates the number of tasks
downloaded through the FTP.
Test Interval The default value is 15, and the unit
is second.
FTP download tests.
Test Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of FTP
download tests.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select one of the following
values:
l Keep Connected
After the download is
complete, the Probe initiates
the next FTP download test
instead of disconnecting the
data connection when the time
specified in Test Interval
arrives.
l Disconnected by time
The Probe disconnects the data
connection based on the period
when the time specified in Test
Interval arrives.
l Disconnected after transfer
completed
connection until the active FTP
download is complete. In the
next FTP download test, you
must perform a dialup test first.
The default value is Disconnected
after transfer completed.
disconnecting the active data
connection.
GENEX Probe
14-17
Port Type The values are as follows:
l PASV: FTP passive mode. In
this mode, the Probe functions
as the client to actively connect
to the FTP server.
l PORT: FTP active mode. In
this mode, the FTP server
actively connects to the client.
If this mode is used for a test,
you are advised to disable the
network firewall.
The default value is PASV.
Indicates the active or passive
mode of the FTP.
Valid FTP
Duration
Disconnected by Time.
unit is second.
Indicates the valid duration for the
FTP download test.
Dial Type You can set this property when
Disconnected by Time or
completed.
You can select RAS or NDIS.
l RAS: Remote Access Service.
It indicates that dialup is
performed through the modem.
Interface Specification. It
indicates that dialup is
performed through a network
adapter. In this case, Network
Card must be set.
Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei
E182E Card is recommended.
Indicates the dialup type.
Network Card You can set this property when
Dial Type is set to NDIS.
Indicates the network adapter
corresponding to the data card that
is in use currently.
Under the Network adapters node
in the Device Manager window,
you can view the name of the
network adapter corresponding to
the data card that is in use currently.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
completed.
Indicates the dialup user name.
authentication in order to establish
a data service connection.
Therefore, you need to enter the
user name before the dialup
connection.
completed.
Indicates the password for the
dialup connection.
user password before the dialup
connection.
completed.
dialup connection.

FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE)
Remote File - Indicates the file on the FTP
server.
domain name/file name.
FTP server.
GENEX Probe
14-19
Port Type The options are as follows:
to the FTP server.
network firewall.
Indicates the FTP active and
passive modes.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select either of the
following values:
Data connection is
disconnected after Valid FTP
Duration.
completed
Data connection is
disconnected after the active
FTP download service is
complete.
by time.
Indicates the data disconnection
mode.
This property is applicable to
terminals.
Valid FTP
Duration
unit is second.
Indicates the valid duration for an
FTP download test.
terminals.
Write Local File You can select either of the
following values:
l True: indicates that this file is
saved after it is downloaded.
l False: indicates that this file is
not saved after it is
downloaded.
Indicates whether a file needs to
be saved.
Local File You can set this property when
Write Local File is set to True.
Indicates the file name and the
path for storing files.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Multi Task Count The value ranges from 1 to 5, and
downloaded through FTP.
is second.
FTP download tests.
download tests.

FTP Upload
This section describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item. You can refer to this section
when performing an FTP upload test.
By performing FTP upload tests, you can check network performance during file upload. Before
performing FTP upload tests, you must check whether your account enables you to upload files
to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP server.
FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item
supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE) describes
the properties of the FTP Upload test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE network.
FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
You must perform the Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA FTP Upload test.
Remote File - Indicates the file on the FTP server.
FTP server.
Local File - Indicates the drive letter, path, and
file name identifying the file to be
uploaded.
Multi Task Count The value ranges from 1 to 5 and
uploaded to the FTP server.
GENEX Probe
14-21
Test Interval The default value is 15 and the unit
is second.
FTP upload tests.
upload tests.
to the FTP server.
network firewall.
mode of the FTP.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select one of the following
values:
l Keep Connected
After the upload is complete,
the Probe initiates the next FTP
upload test instead of
disconnecting the data
connection when the time
specified in Test Interval
arrives.
connection based on the period
when the time specified in Test
Interval arrives.
completed
connection until the active FTP
upload is complete. In the next
FTP upload test, you must
perform a dialup test first.
disconnecting the active data
connection.
Valid FTP
Duration
The default value is 300 and the
unit is second.
Indicates the valid duration for an
FTP upload test.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Dial Type You can set this property when
completed.
You can select RAS or NDIS.
l RAS: Remote Access Service.
It indicates that dialup is
performed through the modem.
Interface Specification. It
indicates that dialup is
performed through a network
adapter. In this case, Network
Card must be set.
Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei
E182E Card is recommended.
Indicates the dialup type.
Network Card You can set this property when
Dial Type is set to NDIS.
Specifies the network adapter
corresponding to the data card that
is in use currently.
Under the Network adapters node
in the Device Manager window,
you can view the name of the
network adapter corresponding to
the data card that is in use
currently.
completed.
Indicates the dialup user name.
user name before the dialup
connection.
completed.
dialup connection.
user password before the dialup
connection.
GENEX Probe
14-23
completed.
dialup connection.

FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE)
Remote File - Indicates the file on the FTP server.
FTP server.
Local File - Indicates the drive letter, path, and
file name identifying the file to be
uploaded.
Multi Task Count The value ranges from 1 to 5 and
uploaded to the FTP server.
Test Interval The default value is 1 and the unit
is second.
FTP upload tests.
upload tests.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Port Type The options are as follows:
to the FTP server.
network firewall.
mode of the FTP.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select either of the
following values:
Data connection is
disconnected after Valid FTP
Duration.
completed
Data connection is
disconnected after the active
FTP download service is
complete.
by time.
Indicates the data disconnection
mode.
terminals.
Valid FTP
Duration
unit is second.
Indicates the valid duration for the
FTP upload test.
terminals.

HTTP
This describes the properties of the HTTP test items. You can refer to this part when performing
the HTTP test, and then perform the related operations.
Through the HTTP test, you can test the network performance when accessing specified web
pages.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the HTTP test.
URL The address starting with http://. Indicates the address of the HTTP
server.
GENEX Probe
14-25
HTTP server.
Show Web Page You can select True or False.
The default value is True.
Whether the page set in URL is
displayed automatically.
is second.
HTTP tests.
Test Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of HTTP
tests.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select the following
values:
l Keep Connected
After the test is complete, the
Probe originates the next HTTP
test instead of disconnecting the
specified in Test Interval is up.
completed
connection until the current
activated HTTP service is
complete. In the next HTTP
test, you must perform the dial
up test first.
disconnecting the current
activated data connection.
completed.
connection. Therefore, you need
to enter the user name before the
dial-up connection.
completed.
dial-up connection.
connection. Therefore, you need
to enter the user password before
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
completed.
Indicates the phone number for

KeyEmul (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the KeyEmul test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the key emulation test, and then perform the related operations.
Not all functions of a test MS can be executed by issuing commands. The function such as video
phone calling can be automatically dialed through only the key emulation.
Key Emulation
List
- Indicates the key emulation list. Click the
button next to this item. The Key Emul
Config dialog box is displayed. In the
displayed dialog box, set corresponding
parameters.
Test Interval The value must be a
positive integer. The
default value is 30. The
unit is second.
Indicates the interval between two Key-Emul
tests.
Test Count The value must be a
default value is 5.
Indicates the number of tests.
Key Emul Config dialog box
Phone Type Indicates the phone types
Phone type.
Delay The value must be a
default value is 300. The
unit is ms.
Key pressing delay. Indicates the interval
between two pressings.
Key Emulation
List
- Indicates the key emulation list. Maps the key
input.
Key Input - Displays the key emulation.
Test - Indicates the test button. This item is used to
test whether the sequence of key emulation
meets the expectation.
GENEX Probe
14-27
Define Key
Value
- Defines the key emulation map. Click the
button next to this item. The Key Emulation
Map Setting dialog box is displayed. In the
displayed dialog box, set corresponding
parameters.
Key Emulation Map Setting dialog box
Key Emulation
Map
- Indicates the mapping table of key values of the
key emulation.
Phone Type - Phone type. Indicates the selected phone type.
Add & Edit - This item is used to add new phones.
Key Value - Indicates the key value.
Reset - Indicates the reset button for the key value.
Reset key values to 0x00.
Press - Press the key corresponding to a value of the
Key Value.
Next & Press - Press the key corresponding to the result of
adding 1 to a value of the Key Value.

Loop Start
This describes the properties of the Loop Start test item. You can refer to this part when
performing a cyclic test, and then perform the related operations.
Test Count The default value is 5. Indicates the times of executing test items
circularly.

PS Attach/PS Detach (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the PS Attach and PS Detach test items. You can refer to this
part when performing the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX attach or detach test, and then
NOTE
The Attach and Detach tests are performed alternately. If an Attach test is performed, the next Attach test
cannot be performed until the Detach test is performed.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PS Attach Attach
Mode
You can select the following values:
l Attach only: Only the Attach test
is performed.
If you select the Attach only
mode, you must perform a
Detach test before the next
Attach test.
l Detach before Attach: A
Detach test is performed before
the Attach test.
Indicates the packet
service attach test
mode.
Timeout The value must be a positive integer.
The value range is 15 to 60. The
default value is 15. The unit is
second.
Indicates the time to
wait for the attach
successful or attach
failed.
PS Detach Timeout The value must be a positive integer.
second.
Indicates the time to
wait for the detach
successful or detach
failed.

MMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the MMS test item. You can refer to this part when performing
the multimedia message service (MMS) test, and then perform the related operations.
Through the MMS test, you can test the network performance when multimedia files are being
sent.
The Probe supports the GSM MMS test and WCDMA MMS test performed by using Huawei
U120e or Huawei U535 test terminals. Also the Probe supports the CDMA MMS test performed
by using Huawei C5588 test terminal.
Table 14-1 describes the properties of the MMS test item. If an MMS fails to be sent, you need
to manually set the parameters listed in Table 14-2 on your test terminal.
CAUTION
By default, the Probe sends the first MMS in the inbox of the test terminal. Thus, before
performing MMS test, you should ensure that MMSs are present in the test terminal and the
MMS to be sent is the first MMS in the inbox.
You can use other terminal to send MMSs to the test terminal to ensure that MMSs are present
in the test terminal.
GENEX Probe
14-29
Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item
Test Count The default value is 5. Indicates the number of MMS tests.
is second.
MMS tests, that is, the interval
between the ended MMS test and the
MMS test to be started.

Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters
Property Description
MMS Gateway Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway of an operator. The value
is a string, for example, 10.10.10.1.
Gateway Port Indicates the gateway port on the server. For example, 80.
APN Indicates the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile
is cmwap or cmnet.
MMS Center URL Indicates the URL of the MMS center, starting with http://. For example,
http://mmsc.monternet.com.

Multi-FTP (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Multi-FTP test item. You can refer to this part when using
a terminal to perform FTP upload and download tests simultaneously, and then perform the
related operations.
FTP
Download
DL User - Indicates the user name
for accessing the FTP
server when downloading
files.
DL Password - Indicates the user
password for accessing
the FTP server when
downloading files.
DL Remote File - Indicates the file on the
FTP server.
The input format is ftp://
IP address or domain
name/File name.
DL Port The default value is 21. Indicates the port number
of the FTP server.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DL Write Local
File
The values are as follows:
l True: Indicates that the
file is saved after it is
downloaded.
l False: Indicates that the
file is not saved after it is
downloaded.
Specifies whether to save
the file.
DL Local File You can set this property
when DL Write Local File is
set to True.
Indicates the file name
and the path for saving
the file.
You need to set a
complete path, such as C:
\test.dat.
DL Multi Task
Count
and the default value is 1.
Indicates the number of
FTP download tasks.
DL Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of
FTP download tests.
FTP
Upload
UL User - Indicates the name of the
user that accesses the FTP
server when uploading
files.
UL Password - Indicates the user
the FTP server when
uploading files.
UL Remote File - Indicates the file on the
FTP server.
The input format is ftp://
IP address or domain
name/File name.
UL Port The default value is 21. Indicates the port number
of the FTP server.
UL Local File - Indicates the file name
and the path for saving
the file.
You need to set a
complete path, such as C:
\test.dat.
UL Multi Task
Count
FTP upload tasks.
GENEX Probe
14-31
UL Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of
FTP upload tests.
Common
Property
name.
authentication for
establishing a data
service connection.
Therefore, you need to
enter the user name
before originating the
dial-up connection.
Dial Password - Indicates the password
for the dial-up
connection.
authentication for
establishing a data
service connection.
Therefore, you need to
enter the user password
before originating the
dial-up connection.
Phone Number The default value is *99#. Indicates the phone
number for the dial-up
connection.
l PASV: FTP passive mode.
In this mode, the Probe
functions as the client to
actively connect to the FTP
server.
l PORT: FTP active mode.
In this mode, the FTP
server actively connects to
the client.
If this mode is used for a
test, you are advised to
disable the network
firewall.
Indicates the FTP active
and passive modes.
the unit is second.
between two continuous
Multi-FTP tests.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Multi-RAB (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Multi-RAB test item. You can refer to this part when testing
the CS and PS concurrently, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the CS and PS concurrently through the Multi-RAB test item and resolve the failed
hang up of the MS for the automatic adaptive multi rate test in the case of the normal dial-up
connection of the PS. The Multi-RAB test item involves the concurrent test of AMR and FTP
and the concurrent test of video phone (VP) and FTP.
Multi-RAB Concurrent Type You can select the
following values:
l AMR & FTP:
indicates the
concurrent tests of the
AMR and FTP.
l Video & FTP:
indicates the
concurrent tests of the
Video and FTP.
The default value is AMR
& FTP.
Indicates the type of the
concurrent test.
Startup Priority You can select the
following values:
l CS First: indicates
that the CS test is
performed first.
l FTP First: indicates
that the FTP test is
performed first.
The default value is CS
First.
Indicates the startup
priority of subservices
during the concurrent test.
Test Count The default value is 10. Indicates the number of
tests.
Test Interval The default value is 10,
and the unit is second.
Indicates the time interval
between two tests, that is,
the time from the previous
test to the beginning of the
next test.
CS and FTP Interval The default value is 3, and
the unit is second.
Indicates the time from
the call originated by the
MS to the beginning of
the FTP service.
CS Destination Number - Indicates the destination
number.
GENEX Probe
14-33
Setup Timeout The default value is 25,
time for call setup. If the
call cannot be set up
within a defined period,
the call setup fails.
l Qualcomm
Command: This
command type is
applicable to
Qualcomm chipset-
based terminals. If
terminals fail to
initiate calls through
Qualcomm
commands, you can
configure a modem
port and set
Command Type to
AT Command.
l AT Command: After
you set Command
Type to AT
Command, AT
commands can be
issued.
Before setting
Command Type to
AT Command, you
need to check that a
modem port has been
configured.
Qualcomm Command.
Indicates the terminal
command type.
Select the command type
according to the terminal
type. Otherwise, call
setup initiated by
terminals may fail.
FTP FTP Type You can select the
following values:
l Upload: indicates the
FTP upload.
l Download: indicates
the FTP download.
Download.
Indicates the FTP type.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Write Local File You can select the
following values:
l True: indicates that
this file is saved after
it is downloaded.
l False: indicates that
this file is not saved
after it is downloaded.
False.
Indicates whether the file
needs to be saved.
Local File You can set this property
when Write Local File is
set to True.
Indicates the filename and
the path for saving files.
You need to set a
complete path such as C:
\test.dat.
End Type You can select the
following values:
l By Time: indicates
that the test ends until
the time specified in
FTP Time for
transmitting data
through the FTP is up.
l By File: indicates that
the test ends until the
file download is
complete.
The default value is By
Time and is set in FTP
Time.
Indicates the end type.
FTP Time You can set this property
when End Type is set to
By Time.
The default value is 15,
Indicates the duration of a
FTP transmission.
FTP Retry Count The default value is 3. Indicates the maximum
number of allowed retries
when the FTP connection
fails.
Port The default value is 21. Indicates the port number
of the FTP server.
User - Indicates the user name
for accessing the FTP
server.
GENEX Probe
14-35
Password - Indicates the user
the FTP server.
Remote File - Indicates the IP address of
the FTP server.
The format is ftp://IP
address or domain name/
file name
Multi Thread Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of
tasks downloaded
through the FTP.
FTP Dial PDP Type You can select IP and
PPP.
Indicates the protocol of
PDP test.
PDP APN - Indicates the name of the
PDP access point. For
example, the APN of
China Mobile is cmwap
or cmnet.
name.
connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user
name before the dial-up
connection.
Dial Password - Indicates the password for
connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user
password before the dial-
up connection.
Phone Number The default value is
*99#.
Indicates the phone
number for the dial-up
connection.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
FTP QoS Traffic Class You can select the
following values:
l background class:
refers to the
background class.
l conversational class:
refers to the
l interactive class:
refers to the
interactive class.
l streaming class:
refers to the streaming
class.
l subscribed value:
refers to the
subscribed value.
background class.
UL Max Rate You can select 32, 64,
128, 256, 384, 2048, or
uplink rate.
DL Max Rate You can select 32, 64,
128, 256, 384, 2048,
kbit/s.
downlink rate.
UL Guaranteed Rate You can set this property
when Traffic Class is set
to conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.
You can select 32, 64,
128, 256, 384, 2048, or
guaranteed rate.
DL Guaranteed Rate You can set this property
when Traffic Class is set
to conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.
You can select 32, 64,
128, 256, 384, 2048,
kbit/s.
guaranteed rate.

GENEX Probe
14-37
PDP (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the PDP test item. You can refer to this part when performing
the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) activation and deactivation tests, and then perform the related
operations.
By sending the AT commands to the MS, you can test whether the MS can activate or deactivate
the GPRS properly.
PDP Type You can select IP and PPP. Indicates the PDP type.
PDP APN - Indicates the name of the PDP
access point.
Traffic Class You can select the following values:
l background class: refers to the
background class.
l conversational class: refers to the
l interactive class: refers to the
interactive class.
l streaming class: refers to the
streaming class.
l subscribed value: refers to the
subscribed value.
The default value is background
class.
UL Max Rate You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is
kbit/s.
Indicates the maximum uplink
rate.
DL Max Rate You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The
unit is kbit/s.
downlink rate.
UL Guaranteed
Rate
Traffic Class is set to conversational
class, streaming class, or subscribed
value.
You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is
kbit/s.
guaranteed rate.
DL Guaranteed
Rate
Traffic Class is set to conversational
class, streaming class, or subscribed
value.
You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The
unit is kbit/s.
guaranteed rate.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Auto Dialup You can select the following values:
l False: disables the dial-up
connection.
l True: enables the dial-up
connection.
Indicates whether to set up the
dial-up connection of the
packet service after the PDP
activation.
Reserved Duration The value must be a positive integer.
The default value is 5. The unit is
second.
Indicates the PDP duration,
that is, the time from the
previous PDP activation to the
beginning of the PDP
deactivation.
Test Interval The value must be a positive integer.
second.
Indicates the time from the
previous PDP deactivation to
the beginning of the next PDP
activation.
Test Count The default value is 5. Indicates the number of tests.
Exceptional
Interval
The value must be a positive integer.
second.
interval, that is, the time from
the failed PDP activation to the
beginning of the next PDP
activation.

Ping
This describes the properties of the Ping test item. You can refer to this part when testing the
delay of a transmitted or received packet, and then perform the related operations.
The Ping test is used to test the communication connectivity of a network. The test result acts
as an evidence for diagnosing daily network faults.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the Ping test.
IP Enter an IP address such as
10.10.10.1.
Indicates the destination IP
address.
Packet Size The range is 8 to 1024. The default
value is 32. The Unit is byte.
Indicates the packet size. The
size of a transmitted packet
affects the delay.
GENEX Probe
14-39
Fragment Flag The value can be either of the
following:
l False: Disable the fragment test.
l True: Enable the fragment test.
Indicates whether to split a Ping
packet.
Test Control Mode Currently, only the Test by Count
mode is supported. That is, the test
is controlled by Test Count.
Indicates the test control mode.
Test Count The default value is 5. Indicates the number of tests.
is second.
Indicates the interval between
two ping tests.

SMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the SMS test item. You can refer to this part when testing the
short message service (SMS), and then perform the related operations.
You can test whether the short message service is normal by sending an SMS to the destination
MS.
NOTE
The test terminal on which the SMS test is performed must be configured with the modem port. For details,
see 7.3 Configuring External Devices
Test Count The value must be a positive
integer. The default value is 5.
Test Interval The value must be a positive
integer. The default value is 5. The
unit is second.
tests.
Service Center
Number
Only numbers, * and # can be
used.
Indicates the SMS center number.
Message The length of the short message
content must be less than or equal
to 160 characters. The default
value is Happy Everyday!.
Indicates the short message
contents. You can enter a string.
Destination
Number
Only numbers, * and # can be
used.
Indicates the number of the
destination MS.

SQE(MS-PSTN) (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item. You can refer to this part when
performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminal (such
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) and the PSTN SQE
Server.
In this scenario, you need to configure the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal in
the Probe and configure the SQE test item in the PSTN SQE Server. For details about the PSTN
SQE Server, see the relevant user guide.
Call Count You can set this property when
Indicates the number of calls.
Call Duration You can set this property when
unit is second.
Call Interval You can set this property when
and the default value is 30, and
the unit is second.
Call Mode The values are as follows:
l Outgoing: Refers to the
outgoing call mode.
l Incoming: Refers to the
incoming call mode.
When selecting Incoming,
you need to set Source
Number and SaveFile only.
l Continuous Call: Refers to a
long call.
l Call by Call: Refers to a short
call, which is controlled by
the number of times a speech
file is played.
The default value is Call by
Call.
Destination
Number
Call Mode is set to Outgoing.
Indicates the called number.
Exceptional
Interval
unit is second.
interval, that is, the time from the
previous call drop to the beginning
of the next call.
GENEX Probe
14-41
l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.
862.1.
The Half duplex mode, that is the
half duplex interaction mode is
Sample Type - Indicates the type of a speech
sample.
The 5s,English type is supported by
the Probe, that is the five seconds
are spent in playing a speech
sample, and the language of the
speech sample is English.
Save All Result
Files
You can select Yes or No. Determines whether to save all
speech result files.
Source Number You can set this property when
Call Mode is set to Ingoing.
Indicates the caller number.
Score Threshold You can set this property when
Save All Result Files is set to
No.
Indicates the number of times for
scoring the speech quality during
the current call process.
unit is second.
setup.
If the call cannot be set up within
the period specified by this
parameter, the call setup fails.
Speech Sample
File
Software installation directory
\Bin\SQE\ResultFile
\VQA_Result.wav.
Indicates the storage path and name
of the recorded speech file.
Time Sync You can select Yes or No. Before performing a speech quality
evaluation test, check whether to
synchronize the PC time of the
calling part with the PC time of the
called part.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Sync SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part
when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals
(such as Huawei U120e , Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on a
Probe.
In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition,
only the calling PHU terminal needs to be configured with the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item.
Destination MS - Indicates the destination MS.
You can select the destination
MS from the drop-down list.
The MS is another terminal
that is connected to the Probe.
Destination
Number
- Indicates the called number.
l Continuous Call: refers to a long call.
l Call by Call: Refers to a short call,
which is controlled by the number of
times a speech file is played.
l Call by Count: It is controlled by the
number of speech evaluation scoring
times.
The default value is Call by Count.
Call Duration You can set this property when Call
Type is set to Call by Call.
The default value is 120, and the unit is
second.
Call Interval You can set this property when Call
second.
Test Count You can set this property when Call
Score Count You can set this property when Call
Type is set to Call by Count.
The value ranges from 1 to 9999.
Indicates the number of times
for scoring the speech quality
during the current call
process.
GENEX Probe
14-43
Exceptional
Interval
second.
the previous call drop to the
beginning of the next call.
Setup Timeout The default value is 25, and the unit is
second.
Indicates the maximum time
for call setup.
If the call cannot be set up
within the period specified by
this parameter, the call setup
fails.
l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.862.1.
Speech
Destination File
The default speech destination file is
Software installation directory\Bin
\SQE\ResultFile\VQA_Result.wav.
Indicates the storage path and
name of the recorded speech
file.
Speech Sample
File
Software installation directory\Bin
\SQE\narr_ukasts_8.wav.
Indicates the speech sample
file provided by the Probe.
Save All Result
Files
You can select Yes or No. Determines whether to save
all speech result files.
Score Threshold You can set this property when Save All
Result Files is set to No.
Indicates the MOS threshold
for saving the speech result
file.
Send DTMF You can select Yes or No. The default
value is No.
Determines whether to send
the dual tone multi-frequency
(DTMF) signaling.
When the MOS score is
smaller than the value of
DTMF Score Threshold, the
Probe sends the DTMF
signaling to the BSC.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DTMF Score
Threshold
You can set this property when Send
DTMF is set to Yes.
l When MOS Algorithm is set to
PESQ Ie, DTMF Score Threshold
ranges from 1 to 140.
l When MOS Algorithm is set to
PESQ.862.1, PESQ.862, or PESQ
LQ, DTMF Score Threshold ranges
from 1 to 5.
Indicates the MOS threshold
for sending the DTMF
signaling.
Noise Type The values are as follows:
l No Noise: not to perform noise test
l Car Noise: car noise
l Street Noise: street noise
l White Noise: white noise
The default value is No Noise.
The noise test is performed
during the speech quality
evaluation test.
Noise Type indicates the
noise type, such as the car
noise, street noise, and white
noise.
Noise Value You can set this property when Noise
Type is set to Car Noise, Street Noise,
or White Noise.
You can select 5dB, 10dB, or 10dB.
Indicates the SNR obtained
from the noise sample file.
l Qualcomm Command: This
command type is applicable to
Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If
terminals fail to initiate calls through
Qualcomm commands, you can
configure a modem port and set
Command Type to AT Command.
l AT Command: After you set
Command Type to AT Command,
AT commands can be issued.
Before setting Command Type to AT
Command, you need to check that a
modem port has been configured.
The default value is Qualcomm
Command.
command type.
according to the terminal type.
Otherwise, call setup initiated
by terminals may fail.

Video Phone (WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Video Phone test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the video phone test, and then perform the related operations.
GENEX Probe
14-45
Destination
Number
- Indicates the destination number.
unit is second.
setup.
If the call cannot be set up within the
defined period, the call setup fails.
Call Duration The default value is 120, and the
unit is second.
Indicates the duration of a call, that is,
the time from call setup to normal call
release.
Test Interval The default value is 15, and the
unit is second.
calls, that is, the time from the
previous call disconnection to the
Exceptional
Interval
unit is second.
Indicates the call Exceptional Interval,
that is, the time from the previous call
drop to the beginning of the next call.
Test Count The default value is 30. Indicates the total number of calls.

Video Streaming (WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the WCDMA Video Streaming test item. You can refer to the
description when performing a video streaming test and then perform relevant operations.
To ensure that video files can be played normally, ensure that the PC is installed with an video
player, for example, RealPlayer.
Before performing a Video Streaming test, you must perform a Dial Up test.
URL The URL starting with http://. Indicates the URL of video files.
The Probe supports only .rm video
files.
Test Interval The default value is 20, and the unit is
second.
tests.
Test Count The default value is 1. Indicates the number of times the
test is performed.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Disconnectio
n Mode
l Keep Connected
After a test is complete, the Probe
originates the next video streaming
test instead of disconnecting the
specified in Test Interval is up.
completed
connection until the current
activated video steaming service is
complete. Before the next video
steaming test, you must perform the
dial-up test first.
disconnecting the current
activated data connection.
Dial User You can set this property after selecting
completed from Disconnection
Mode.
Therefore, you need to type the
user name before the dial-up
connection.
Dial
Password
You can set this property after selecting
Mode.
dial-up connection.
Therefore, you need to type the
user password before the dial-up
connection.
Phone
Number
You can set this property after selecting
Mode.
dial-up connection.

Voice Call (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the Voice Call test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the voice call test, and then perform the related operations.
GENEX Probe
14-47
Destination
Number
- Indicates the outgoing call
number.
Call Type You can select the following values:
l Continuous Call: refers to a long
call.
The Probe does not disconnect this
call until an exception occurs. If the
call setup fails or a call drop occurs
during the calling, the Probe
terminates the current call test and
starts another call test.
l Call by Call: refers to a short call.
Under the control of the Probe, an
MS initiates a call that lasts for the
period of time specified by Call
Duration and then waits for the
period of time specified by Test
Interval before initiating another
call. The number of times call tests
are performed is defined by Test
Count.
The default value is Call by Call.
Setup Timeout The default value is 45, and the unit is
second.
for call setup.
If the call cannot be set up
within the defined period, the
call setup fails.
second.
call, that is, the time from call
setup to normal call release.
second.
between two calls, the time
from the previous call
disconnection to the
Exceptional
Interval
second.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Call Mode You can set this property when Call
l Finite: indicates that the number of
calls is limited. The number of calls
cannot exceed the value of Test
Count.
l Infinite: indicates that the number
of calls is unlimited.
The default value is Finite.
Indicates the mode of call
count.
Test Count You can set this property when Call
Type is set to Call by Call and Call
Mode is set to Finite.
Indicates the total number of
calls.
Call Start Mode You can select the following values:
l Unlimited: The Probe performs the
voice call test without determining
the current status of the terminal.
l Idle: When the terminal is not in idle
state, if the current call is not
terminated after the duration
specified by Waiting Time, the
Probe automatically disconnects the
call and performs the voice call test.
l Wait for call end: The Probe
performs the voice call test after the
current service performed on the
terminal is automatically complete.
Indicates the mode in which
the Probe starts a voice call
test.
Waiting Time You can set this property when Call
Start Mode is set to Idle.
You can select 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 30s,
60s, or 90s.
Indicates the waiting time of
a test.
GENEX Probe
14-49
l Qualcomm Command: This
command type is applicable to
Qualcomm chipset-based terminals.
If terminals fail to initiate calls
through Qualcomm commands, you
can configure a modem port and set
Command Type to AT
Command.
l AT Command: After you set
Command Type to AT
Command, AT commands can be
issued.
Before setting Command Type to
AT Command, you need to check
that a modem port has been
configured.
The default value is Qualcomm
Command.
command type.
according to the terminal
type. Otherwise, call setup
initiated by terminals may
fail.

Wait
This describes the properties of the Wait test item. You can refer to this part when setting the
time interval between two test items, and then perform related operations.
Wait Duration The default value is 5, and the
unit is second.
Indicates the wait duration, that is, the
time from the previous test item execution
to the beginning of the next test item
execution.

WAP Download (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the WAP Download test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the WAP download test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the download state of the WAP file by downloading file resources such as rings or
pictures.
You must perform the Dial Uptest before the WAP Download test.
Test Count The value must be a positive integer.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
second.
tests.
second.
Indicates the timeout period. The
timing starts when the first download
request is sent. If the download page
is not obtained within the preset time,
you can infer that the connection
fails.
Download
Type
l Ring&Picture: refers to
downloading pictures and rings.
l Java: refers to downloading
KJava.
The default value is Ring&Picture.
Indicates the type of a downloaded
file.
Local Path - Indicates the local path for saving the
downloaded file.
URL List The URL starts with http://. Indicates the URL for downloading
pictures, rings, or KJava.
IP Contact local network operators to
obtain the IP address.
Indicates the IP address of the WAP
gateway.
Port The value ranges from 0 to 1023, and
Indicates the port number of the
WAP.

WAP Gateway Connection (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the WAP Gateway Connection test item. You can refer to this
part when performing the WAP gateway connection test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the gateway connection by sending the ping packet to the gateway.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Gateway Connection test.
second.
tests.
GENEX Probe
14-51
second.
Indicates the timeout time. The
timing starts when the first gateway
connection request is sent. If the
connection is not set up within the
preset time, you can infer that the
connection fails.
gateway.

WAP Logon (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the WAP Logon test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the WAP login test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the WAP login and upload.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Logon test.
second.
tests.
second.
connection fails.
URL The URL starts with http://. Indicates the URL of the tested WAP
page.
Download
Icon
l True: downloads icons on the
title page.
l False: not download icons on the
title page.
Indicates whether to download icons
on the title page.
gateway.
WAP.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
WAP Page Refresh (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the WAP Page Refresh test item. You can refer to this part
when performing the WAP page refreshing test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the upload state of a WAP page by refreshing the same page many times.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Page Refresh test.
second.
tests.
second.
download fails.
Download
Icon
l True: downloads icons on the title
page.
l False: not download icons on the
title page.
Indicates whether to download icons
on the title page.
URL The URL starts with http://. Indicates the URL of the tested
WAP page.
gateway.
WAP.

NetEntry (WiMAX)
This section describes the properties of the WiMAX NetEntry test item. You can refer to this
section when the Probe performs NetEntry tests.
NetEntry tests are used for measuring the network access performance. Before accessing the
network during a test, the MS must exit from the network.
Test Count The default value is 10. Indicates the number of NetEntry tests.
GENEX Probe
14-53
the unit is second.
NetEntry tests.

NetSearch (WiMAX)
This section describes the properties of the NetSearch test item of the WiMAX system. You
can perform the frequency scan test by referring to this part.
The NetSearch test is used to scan the frequencies that are searched by the UE.
Scan Type The values are as follows:
l Specified Frequency Scan: Indicates the
frequency to be scanned.
You can set the frequency in Center Frequency
List.
l Continuous Frequency Scan: Indicates the
continuous frequency scan.
The default value is Specified Frequency Scan.
Indicates the scan
type.
Center Frequency
List
You can set this property when Scan Type is set to
Specified FrequencyScan.
Indicates the
center frequency
to be scanned.
CenterFreqStart You can set this property when Scan Type is set to
Continuous FrequencyScan.
Range:
l WiMAX 2.3GHz: 2.3 to 2.4
l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69
The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz.
Indicates the start
frequency of the
continuous
frequency scan.
CenterFreqStep You can set this property when Scan Type is set to
The value ranges from 0.25 to 10 and the unit is
MHz.
Indicates the step
of the continuous
frequency scan.
The value of this
property must be
multiples of 0.01.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CenterFreqEnd You can set this property when Scan Type is set to
Range:
l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69
Indicates the end
frequency of the
continuous
frequency scan.
BandWidth You can set this property when Scan Type is set to
The value can be 5, 7, 8.75, or 10.
Indicates the
bandwidth.
Exceptional
Interval
The default value is 15. The value ranges from 0 to
30 and the unit is s.
Indicates the scan
timeout period.
When the value of
CINR is set to a
small value, you
are advised to set
this property to 15
or a greater value.
0 indicates the
scan with
indefinite scan
period. In this
case, the scanner
performs
continuous scan
until an exception
occurs.

Attach/Detach (LTE)
This describes the properties of the Attach and Detach test items. You can refer to this part
when performing the LTE attach or detach test, and then perform the related operations.
NOTE
The attach and detach tests are performed alternately. If an attach test is performed, the next attach test
cannot be performed until the detach test is performed.
GENEX Probe
14-55
Test
Item
Attach Attach
Type
l PS: Indicates that the attach tests for
only data services are to be performed.
l PS_CS: Indicates that the attach tests for
data and voice services are to be
performed.
Indicates the attach
test type. Currently,
only the attach test
of PS is supported.
Timeout The value is a positive integer ranging from
15 to 60, and the default value is 15, and the
unit is second.
Indicates the time
to wait for the
attach success or
failure.
Attach
Mode
l Attach only: Indicates that only the
attach test is performed.
Before performing the next attach test,
you must configure the LTE Detach test
item.
l Detach before Attach: Indicates that a
detach test must be performed before the
PS Attach test is performed.
Indicates the attach
test mode.
TestCount - Indicates the test
count.
Detach
Type
l PS: Indicates that the detach tests for
only data services are to be performed.
l CS: Indicates that the detach tests for
only speech services are to be
performed.
l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests
for data and voice services are to be
performed.
Indicates the detach
only the detach test
of PS is supported.
Detach Detach
Type
l PS: Indicates that the detach tests of only
data services are to be performed.
l CS: Indicates that the detach tests of
only speech services are to be
performed.
l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests of
data and voice services are to be
performed.
Indicates the detach
only the detach test
of PS is supported.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Test
Item
Timeout The value is a positive integer ranging from
15 to 60, and the default value is 15. The unit
is second.
Indicates the time
to wait for the
detach success or
failure.

Cell Scan (LTE)
This section describes the properties of the Cell Scan test item. You can perform the
corresponding LTE cell scanning tests by referring to this part.
FreqBandSear
chType
l Spec Band specifies that the cell searching is
performed on the specified frequency band. The
value ranges from Low Band to High Band.
l Spec Freq specifies that the cell searching is
performed on the specified EARFCNs. Note
that the cell searching can be performed on a
maximum of three EARFCNs.
The number of EARFCNs to be scanned can be
set in FreqCount. The values of EARFCNs can
be set in SpecFreqx (x ranges from 1 to 3).
Indicates the type of a
cell to be scanned.
Low Band The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 39650,
Indicates the start
value of a frequency
band to be scanned.
High Band The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 39650,
Indicates the end
value of a frequency
band to be scanned.

Iperf (LTE)
This describes the properties of the Iperf test item. You can refer to this part when performing
the TCP or UDP of the LTE network performance test, and then perform the related operations.
GENEX Probe
14-57
Mode The values are as follows:
l Server: Indicates the server mode.
As the server, the Probe listens the
specified port, performs the related
operations according to the
configuration after receiving a
connection request or data from the
client, and displays the network
performance indicator.
l Client: Indicates the client mode.
As the client, the Probe sends TCP or
UDP packets to the specified server in
a period according to the
configuration.
Indicates the test mode.
Protocol Supports the TCP and UDP. Indicates the data transmission
protocol type.
Port The value ranges from 0 to 65535. l When Mode is set to Server,
it refers to the port listened by
the server.
l When Mode is set to Client,
it indicates the client port
connected to the server.
Report
Interval
The value is an integer, and the unit is
second.
The default value is 0, which indicates that
the data is not periodically reported.
Indicates the data report cycle.
Test Count - Indicates the number of Iperf
tests.
second.
two continuous Iperf tests.
BandWidth You can set this property when Mode is
set to Client.
The value is an integer, and the default
value is 1000. The unit is kbit/s.
Indicates the data transmission
bandwidth.
Server
Address
You can set this property when Mode is
set to Client.
Indicates the IP address of the
server accessed by the client.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Test Mode You can set this property when Mode is
set to Client.
l Normal: Indicates the unidirectional
test mode.
l DualTest: Indicates the half duplex
test mode.
l Tradeoff: Indicates the duplex test
mode.
The default value is Normal.
Indicates the client test mode.
Test Time You can set this property when Mode is
set to Client.
The value is an integer, and the default
value is 10, and the unit is second.
Indicates the test duration.

Frequency Scan (LTE)
This describes the properties of the Frequency Scan test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the LTE frequency scanning test, and then perform the related operations.
FreqBandSearch-
Type
l All Band: Search the cell in all bands
supported by the UE.
l Spec Band: Search the cell in the specified
band.
The default value is All Band.
Indicates the band
searching type.
FreqBandSearch-
Delay
The value can be set to 100, 300, 500, and 1000.
The unit is ms.
Indicates the cycle
for reporting the
frequency scanning
result.
Low Band You can set this property when
FreqBandSearchType is set to Spec Band.
The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1000,
Indicates the start
band.
High Band You can set this property when
FreqBandSearchType is set to All Band.
The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1000,
Indicates the end
band.

GENEX Probe
14-59
14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners
This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.
Test Items Supported By the PCTel Scanners
This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the PCTel series.
N
et
w
or
k
PCTel DTI EX
Test Items
PCTel DTI LX
Test Items
PCTel PCT-505
Test Items
PCTel PCT-520
Test Items
G
S
M
l CW
l GSM Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l CW
l GSM Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
- l CW
l GSM Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
W
C
D
M
A
l CW
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
l CW
l Pilot Scanning
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
l CW
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
l CW
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
C
D
M
A
- l CW
l Pilot Scanning
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
- -
W
i
M
A
X
l CW
l RSSI Scanning
l TopN Preamble
Index Scanning
- - -

CW (PCTel)
This section describes the properties of CW test item. You can refer to this section when
performing the CW test by using the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel scanners.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Property Description
Channel l For GSM, WCDMA, and CDMA scanners, Channel indicates the tested
ARFCN.
You can manually enter ARFCNs. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by
commas. A maximum of 100 ARFCNs can be set.
l For WiMAX scanners, Channel indicates the channel corresponding to
the tested frequency. The format is [frequency | channel].
You can click in the right area. Enter the value of Frequency in the
displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically
calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs.
Output Mode Indicates the interval of reporting GSM or WCDMA scanner data. You can
select either of the following values:
l Normal: Indicates that scanner data is reported at the default interval.
l Stacked: Indicates that scanner data is reported at an interval of 20 ms.
This property can be set for only EX or LX PCTel scanners.

GSM Scanning
This describes the properties of the GSM Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the scanning test by using the GSM PCTel scanner, and then perform the related
operations.
Channel List l The ARFCNs of GSM 850 (869
MHz - 894 MHz) range from
127 to 252.
l The ARFCNs of E-GSM (925
MHz - 960 MHz) range from 0
to 124.
l The ARFCNs of DCS 1800
(1805 MHz - 1880 MHz) range
from 511 to 886.
l The ARFCNs of PCS 1900
(1930 MHz - 1990 MHz) range
from 511 to 811.
Indicates the tested ARFCN. Click
on the right of the Channel List. In the
displayed GSM channel dialog box,
select the ARFCNs to be scanned.
The maximum number is 255.
RSSI
Threshold
The value ranges from -115 to -80.
The default value is -105. The Unit
is dBm.
Indicates the threshold of the received
signal strength indicator.
GENEX Probe
14-61
Option Code The values are as follows:
l BSIC & C/I, which indicates
that the scanner used for the test
supports both the BSIC and C/
I functions.
l BSIC, which indicates that the
scanner used for the test
supports only the BSIC
function.
Indicates the function option of the
scanner.
If the scanner does not support the C/I
function, Option Code must be set to
BSIC. Otherwise, the test cannot be
performed normally. In the IE view,
The C/I value is displayed as -10.

Spectrum Analysis
This describes the properties of the Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the spectrum analysis by using the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA PCTel scanner, and
then perform the related operations.
Center Frequency Unit: MHz Indicates the center frequency.
Span Unit: MHz Indicates the bandwidth
measured in the spectrum
analysis.
RBW You can select 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80.
kHz.
Indicates the resolution
bandwidth, which is used to
calculate the start frequency and
the number of ARFCNs.
NumberSweeps You can select 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16. The
default value is 2.
Indicates the number of scanning
times.

Pilot Scanning
This describes the properties of the Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the pilot scanning test by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then
Channel A maximum of six ARFCNs can
be tested simultaneously.
Multiple ARFCNs are separated
by commas. Each pilot code
ranges from 0 to 511.
Indicates the tested ARFCN.
Click on the right of Channel,
and then set the pilot code to be
scanned.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ChipWindowSize You can manually enter the size
ranging from 1 to 64. The
dB.
Indicates the size of the chip
window.
PNThreshold You can manually enter the
threshold. The value ranges
from -30 to 0. The default value
is -20. The unit is dB.
Indicates the threshold of the
available pseudo-random number.

RSSI Scanning
This section describes the properties of the RSSI Scanning test item. You can refer to this section
when performing the signal strength scan test by using the WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel
scanners.
BandWidth You can select 5MHz or
10MHz.
Indicates the used bandwidth of the
WiMAX scanner.
Channel for
BandWidth
Format: [frequency |
channel]
Indicates the channel corresponding to the
tested frequency of the WiMAX scanner.
The procedure for setting this property is
as follows:
1. Select a used bandwidth from
BandWidth.
2. Click in the right area. The
Channel Setting dialog box is
displayed.
3. Enter the value of Frequency in the
displayed Channel Setting dialog
box. The system automatically
calculates the channel to which this
frequency belongs.
Channel - Indicates the tested ARFCN of the
WCDMA or CDMA scanner.
You can manually enter ARFCNs.
Multiple ARFCNs are separated by
commas.
GENEX Probe
14-63
Output Mode You can select either of
l Normal: Indicates
that scanner data is
reported at the
default interval.
l Stacked: Indicates
that scanner data is
reported at an
interval of 20 ms.
Indicates the scanner data reporting mode.
This property can be set for only EX or LX
PCTel scanners.

TopN Pilot Scanning
This describes the properties of the TopN Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part
when measuring TopN pilots by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform
the related operations.
N You can manually enter the number ranging
from 1 to 32.
Indicates the number
of pilots to be scanned.
Channel A maximum of six ARFCNs can be tested
simultaneously. Multiple ARFCNs are
separated by commas.
Indicates the tested
ARFCN.
ChipWindowSize You can manually enter the size ranging
from 1 to 64. The default value is 32. The
unit is dB.
Indicates the size of
the chip window.
PNThreshold You can manually enter the threshold. The
value ranges from -30 to 0. The default value
is -20. The unit is dB.
Indicates the threshold
of the available
pseudo-random
number (PN).

TopN Preamble Index Scanning
This describes the properties of the TopN Preamble Index Scanning test item. You can refer
to this part when measuring Top N preamble index by using the WiMAX PCTel scanner, and
N You can manually enter
the number ranging
from 1 to 32. The default
value is 3.
Indicates the number of preamble indexes to be
scanned.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
BandWidth You can select 5MHz or
10MHz.
Indicates the used bandwidth.
Channel for
BandWidth
Format : [frequency |
channel]
Indicates the channel corresponding to the
tested frequency. The setting steps are as
follows:
1. Select a used bandwidth from
BandWidth.
2. Click in the right area. The Channel
Setting dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the value of Frequence in the
displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The
system automatically calculates the channel
to which this frequency belongs.

14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners
This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations.
Test Items Supported By the Anritsu Scanners
This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the Anritsu ML series.
No. Test Item ML8720 ML8740 ML8742
1 CW
2 GSM Specified/
UNSpecified

3 MultiNetwork Specified
4 MultiNetwork UNSpecified
5 Specified Base Station
Measurement

6 UNSpecified Base Station
Measurement

NOTE
l : indicates that the corresponding scanner supports the test item.
l : indicates that the corresponding scanner does not support the test item.
GENEX Probe
14-65
CW (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the CW test item. You can refer to this section when testing a
continuous wave by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner.
Unspecifie
d
Calibrate User Unit: dB Indicates the user correction
value, which is used for
compensating antenna loss.
Reference The value can be any of the
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether Calibrate
User is valid.
Adjust Antenna The value can be any of the
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
adjusting the antenna gain.
Conditions Carrier
Frequency
The value ranges from 925.0
to 960.0, 1805.0 to 1880.0,
and 2110.0 to 2170.0, at a
step length of 0.1. The unit is
MHz.
Indicates the carrier
frequency to be tested.
Trigger
Demultiplier
The value range is 1 to 500 Indicates the external
triggering demultiplier. One
sampling is performed every
time a triggering pulse of the
preset value is detected.
ScanRate l When External Trigger
is set to 0, ScanRate
ranges from 0.01 to 0.09,
0.1 to 0.9, 1 to 9, 10 to 90,
and 100 to 500. The unit
is second.
l When External Trigger
is set to 1, ScanRate
ranges from 1 to 500. The
unit is times.
If ScanRate is set to a value
less than 10 (ms), the
measurement duration is 10
ms.
Indicates the measurement
duration.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
External
Trigger
The value can be any of the
following:
l 0: The external triggering
mode is not adopted, that
is, CWs are sampled
according to the internal
timing mode.
l 1: The external triggering
mode is adopted, that is,
CWs are sampled
according to the external
triggering mode.
Disable.
Indicates whether to adopt
the external triggering mode.
Data Processing
Method
following:
l Median: The
measurement duration is
50.
l Average: The
measurement duration is
-1.
Average.
Indicates the method for
processing the data sampled
during each measurement
duration.
Threshold The unit is dB. Indicates the threshold of
white noise. The
recommended value is -120.

GSM Specified/UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM)
This describes the properties of the GSM Specified/UNSpecified test item. You can refer to
this section when testing a specified or unspecified GSM cell by using the GSM Anritsu scanner.
GSM
Specfied/
Unspecifi
ed BTS
Calibrate User Unit: dB Indicates the user
correction value, which is
used for compensating
antenna loss.
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether
Calibrate User is valid.
GENEX Probe
14-67
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
adjusting the antenna
gain.
Specified/
Unspecified
The value can be Unspecified
or Specified.
Specified.
Indicates the specified or
unspecified BTS
measurement.
ARFCN/
Frequency
- Enables you to set the
ARFCN or frequency of
the channel to be tested.
You can set this
parameter as follows:
1. Click on the right
of ARFCN/
Frequency. The
Unspecified Config
Dialog dialog box is
displayed.
2. In the Unspecified
Config Dialog dialog
box, set the starting
and ending ARFCNs
or frequencies, the
number of channels to
be tested, and whether
to perform the test.
Threshold The threshold must be set to a
value not greater than -120.
The unit is dB.
Indicates the threshold of
white noise.
Condition
s
BSIC Decode The value can be any of the
following:
l 0: The BSIC is decoded.
l 1: The BSIC is not
decoded.
Indicates whether to
decode the base station
identify code (BSIC).
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
External Trigger The value can be any of the
following:
l Disable: Sampling is
performed according to the
internal timing mode.
l Enable: Sampling is
external triggering mode.
adopt the external
triggering mode.
Trigger
Demultiplier
triggering demultiplier.
One sampling is
performed every time a
triggering pulse of the
Measurement
Duration
l When External Trigger is
set to Disable,
Measurement Duration
ranges from 0.02 to 0.05 at
a step length of 0.01. The
unit is second.
set to Enable,
ranges from 1 to 500 at a
step length of 1. The unit is
times.
Indicates the
measurement duration.
RSSI Methods The value can be -1 and 0% to
100% at a step length of 10%.
l The value -1 indicates
Average.
l The range 0%-100%
indicates the frequency
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate Minimum,
Median, and Maximum,
respectively.
The default value is Average.
processing the received
signal strength indicator.
GENEX Probe
14-69
C/I Methods The value can be -1 and 0% to
Average.
l The range 0%-100%
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
respectively.
processing the C/I data.

MultiNetwork Specified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork Specified test item. You can refer to this
section when testing multi-network specified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu
scanner.
Common
Setting
External Trigger The value can be any of the
following:
l Disable: CWs are
sampled according to the
l Enable: CWs are
sampled according to the
Disable.
the external triggering
mode.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Diversity The value can be any of the
following:
l OFF: The diversity
function is disabled.
If the required diversity
antenna is not installed,
you can select only
OFF.
l Receive ANT: The
diversity function is
enabled.
l Two Carrier: The two
carrier frequencies
measurement function is
enabled.
The default value is OFF.
Enables you to set the
diversity function or the
two carrier frequencies
measurement function.
GSM
Specified
BTS
antenna loss.
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
RF Input Type Only RF Input1 is
supported for the GSM
measurement.
Indicates the radio
frequency (RF) input mode.
GENEX Probe
14-71
ARFCN/
Frequency
ARFCN or frequency to be
scanned.
Click on the right of
ARFCN/Frequency. In
the displayed Unspecified
Config Dialog dialog box,
set the starting and ending
ARFCNs or frequencies,
the number of channels to
be tested, and whether to
perform the test.
Threshold The threshold must be set to
a value not greater than -120.
The unit is dB.
white noise.
following:
l 1: The BSIC is not
decoded.
Indicates whether to decode
the BSIC.
Trigger
Demultiplier
One sampling is performed
every time a triggering
pulse of the preset value is
detected.
Measurement
Duration
is set to Disable,
ranges from 0.02 to 0.05
at a step length of 0.01.
The unit is second.
is set to Enable,
ranges from 1 to 500 at a
step length of 1. The unit
is times.
duration.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RSSI Methods The value can be -1 and 0%
to 100% at a step length of
10%.
Average.
l The range 0% to 100%
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
processing method for the
received signal strength
indicator.
C/I Methods The value can be -1 and 0%
10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
C/I.
Search Band
Select
following:
l Both Band
l Each Band
The default value is Both
Band.
Indicates the specified band
to be tested for the GSM.
Both Band You can select any value
from 1 to 32.
Indicates the number of a
dual-band.
WCDMA
Specified
BTS
Carrier
Frequency
The value ranges from
2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step
length of 0.2. The unit is
MHz.
frequency of an antenna in
RF Input2 mode.
GENEX Probe
14-73
RF Input Type Only RF Input2 is
supported for the WCDMA
measurement.
Indicates the radio
frequency input mode.
antenna loss.
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01, 0.02,
0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or
10. The default value is 0.5.
The unit is second.
duration.
Fingers at ANT2 The value range is 0-6. The
value 0 indicates that the
scanner is not installed with
any diversity antenna.
number of fingers used by
antenna 2.
All Methods The value can be -1 and 0%
10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates that the same data
processing method is used
for the RSCP, ratio of the
pilot energy per chip to total
power spectral density of
the receive bandwidth (Ec/
No), and signal-to-noise
ratio (SIR).
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RSCP Method The value can be -1 and 0%
10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
RSCP.
Ec/No Method The value can be -1 and 0%
10%.
Average.
l The range 0% to -100%
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
Ec/No.
SIR Method The value can be -1 and 0%
10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
SIR.
GENEX Probe
14-75
Rake Threshold The value range is 0 to 20.
The default value is 20. The
unit is dB.
the rake receiver. The valid
receive range of the rake
receiver is from the best
finger minus the rake
threshold to the best finger.
Selection Level The value range is 0 to 20.
unit is dB.
Indicates the range of the
fingers that can be received.
A finger that is greater than
the receiver noise plus the
selection level can be
received.
Channel Code - Sets the primary and
secondary scrambling
codes and the channel
number.
You can set this parameter
as follows:
1. Click on the right of
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
dialog box is displayed.
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
primary and secondary
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.

MultiNetwork UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork UNSpecified test item. You can refer to this
section when testing multi-network unspecified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu
scanner.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Commo
n
Setting
External Trigger The value can be either of the
following:
l Disable: Sampling is
l Enable: Sampling is
the external triggering
mode.
following:
l OFF: The diversity function
is disabled.
antenna is not installed, you
can select only OFF.
l Receive ANT: The diversity
function is enabled.
l Two Carrier: The two
carrier frequencies
measurement function is
enabled.
diversity function or the
two carrier frequencies
measurement function.
GSM
UNSpec
ified
BTS
antenna loss.
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
RF Input Type Only RF Input1 is supported for
the GSM measurement.
Indicates the radio
frequency (RF) input
mode.
GENEX Probe
14-77
ARFCN/
Frequency
ARFCN or frequency to
be scanned.
as follows:
ARFCN/Frequency.
The Unspecified
box is displayed.
2. In the Unspecified
box, set the starting
and ending ARFCNs
or frequencies, the
number of channels to
be tested, and whether
to perform the test.
Threshold The threshold must be set to a
value not greater than -120. The
unit is dB.
white noise.
following:
l 1: The BSIC is not decoded.
decode the BSIC.
Trigger
Demultiplier
The value range is 1 to 500. Indicates the external
One sampling is
performed every time a
triggering pulse of the
Measurement
Duration
set to Disable, Measurement
Duration ranges from 0.02 to
0.05 at a step length of 0.01.
The unit is second.
set to Enable, Measurement
Duration ranges from 1 to
500 at a step length of 1. The
unit is times.
Indicates the
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RSSI Methods The value can be -1 and 0% to
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
respectively.
Indicates the data
received signal strength
indicator.
C/I Methods The value can be -1 and 0% to
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
respectively.
Indicates the data
C/I.
WCDM
A
UNSpec
ified
BTS
Carrier
Frequency
The value ranges from 2110.0 to
2200.0 at a step length of 0.2. The
unit is MHz.
frequency of an antenna in
RF Input2 mode.
RF Input Type Only RF Input1 is supported for
the WCDMA measurement.
Indicates the RF input
mode.
antenna loss.
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether
GENEX Probe
14-79
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01, 0.02,
0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10.
The default value is 0.5. The unit
is second.
Indicates the
Fingers at ANT2 The value range is 0 to 6. The
value 0 indicates that the scanner
is not installed with any diversity
antenna.
antenna 2.
All Methods The value can be -1 and 0% to
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively indicate
Minimum, Median, and
Maximum.
Indicates that the same
data processing method is
used for the RSCP, Ec/No,
and SIR.
RSCP Method The value can be -1 and 0% to
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
Maximum.
Indicates the data
RSCP.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Ec/No Method The value can be -1 and 0% to
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
Maximum.
Indicates the data
Ec/No.
SIR Method The value can be -1 and 0% to
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
Maximum.
Indicates the data
SIR.
Rake Threshold The value range is 0 to 20. The
dB.
the rake receiver. The
valid receive range of the
rake receiver is from the
best finger minus the rake
threshold to the best
finger.
Selection Level The value range is 0 to 20. The
default value is 4. The unit is dB.
fingers that can be
received. A finger that is
greater than the receiver
noise plus the selection
level can be received.
GENEX Probe
14-81
Channel Code - Sets the primary and
number.
as follows:
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
dialog box is
displayed.
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.
CH
Limits
Group Number
Start
The default value is 0. Indicates the starting
number of the primary
scrambling code group.
Group Number
End
The default value is 63. Indicates the ending
Cell Number
Start
default value is 0.
Indicates the starting cell
number.
Cell Number
End
default value is 7.
Indicates the ending cell
number.
Min.Secondary
SC
default value is 0.
Indicates the minimum
code.
Max.Secondary
SC
default value is 0.
code.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Searching
Method
following:
l P-CPICH: Scrambling codes
are searched on only the
Common Pilot Channel
(CPICH).
l SCH: Scrambling codes are
searched on the Primary
Synchronization Channel (P-
SCH) and Secondary
Synchronization Channel (S-
SCH).
The default value is SCH.
Indicates the searching
method.
Measurement
Channel
the channel to be
measured.
Specified
Channel
The value can be False or True.
Measurement Channel is valid
only when Specified Channel is
set to True.
the specified channel.

Specified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Specified Base Station Measurement test item. You can
refer to this section when testing a specified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner.
Unspecified Calibrate User Unit: dB Indicates the user
antenna loss.
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether
GENEX Probe
14-83
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
Conditions Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01,
0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1,
2, 5, or 10. The default
value is 0.5. The unit is
second.
duration.
Fingers at
ANT1
The value range is 1 to 6.
The recommended value is
6.
antenna 1.
Fingers at
ANT2
The value 0 indicates that
the scanner is not installed
with any diversity antenna.
antenna 2.
following:
you can select only
OFF.
l Receive ANT: The
enabled.
diversity function.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
All Methods The value can be -1 and
0% to 100% at a step
length of 10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
for the RSCP, Ec/No, and
SIR.
RSCP Method The value can be -1 and
length of 10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
Indicates the data
RSCP.
Ec/No Method The value can be -1 and
length of 10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
Indicates the data
Ec/No.
GENEX Probe
14-85
SIR Method The value can be -1 and
length of 10%.
Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
Indicates the data
SIR.
Rake
Threshold
unit is dB.
unit is dB.
fingers that can be received.
A finger that is greater than
the receiver noise plus the
selection level can be
received.
Carrier
Frequency
The value ranges from
2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step
MHz.
frequency of the antenna
RF input.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CH Code Channel Code - Sets the primary and
number.
as follows:
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.

UNSpecified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the UNSpecified Base Station Measurement test item. You
can refer to this section when testing an unspecified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner.
Unspecifie
d
antenna loss.
following:
l True
l False
Indicates whether
following:
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
GENEX Probe
14-87
Conditions Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01,
0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1,
2, 5, or 10. The default
value is 0.5. The unit is
second.
duration.
Fingers at ANT1 The value range is 1 to 6.
The recommended value is
6.
antenna 1.
Fingers at ANT2 The value range is 0 to 6.
The value 0 indicates that
the scanner is not installed
with any diversity antenna.
antenna 2.
following:
you can select only
OFF.
l Receive ANT: The
enabled.
diversity function.
All Methods The value can be -1 and
length of 10%.
Average.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
frequency distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
for the RSCP, Ec/No, and
SIR.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RSCP Method The value can be -1 and
length of 10%.
Average.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
RSCP.
Ec/No Method The value can be -1 and
length of 10%.
Average.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
Ec/No.
SIR Method The value can be -1 and
length of 10%.
Average.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Indicates the data
SIR.
GENEX Probe
14-89
Rake Threshold The value range is 0 to 20.
unit is dB.
unit is dB.
fingers that can be
received. A finger that is
greater than the receiver
noise plus the selection
level can be received.
Carrier Frequency The value ranges from
2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step
MHz.
frequency of the antenna
RF input.
CH Limits Group Number
Start
The default value is 0. Indicates the starting
Group Number
End
The default value is 63. Indicates the ending
Cell Number Start The value range is 0 to 7.
Indicates the starting cell
number.
Cell Number End The value range is 0 to 7.
Indicates the ending cell
number.
Min.Secondary SC The value range is 0 to 15.
code.
Max.Secondary
SC
code.
Searching Method The value can be any of the
following:
l P-CPICH: Scrambling
codes are searched on
only the CPICH
channel.
l SCH: Scrambling
codes are searched on
P-SCH and S-SCH.
The default value is SCH.
Indicates the searching
method.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Measurement
Channel
The value ranges from 1 to
32, and the default value is
6.
channel to be measured.
Specified Channel The value can be False or
True. The default value is
False.
Measurement Channel is
valid only when Specified
Channel is set to True.
specified channel.
CH Code Channel Code - Sets the primary and
number.
as follows:
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.

14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners
This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can
refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then
TSMX Spectrum Analysis (WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the TSMX Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this
section when performing the spectrum analysis by using the TSMX scanner.
Center
Frequency
You can manually enter a value ranging
from 80 MHz to 3 GHz.
Indicates the center
frequency.
Span You can manually enter a value. The
maximum value is 40. The unit is MHz.
Indicates the bandwidth to
be scanned.
GENEX Probe
14-91
RBW Unit: kHz Indicates the resolution
bandwidth.

TSMX TopN (WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the TSMX TopN test item. You can refer to this section when
measuring TopN pilots by using the TSMX scanner.
Frequency You can set a maximum of six frequencies by using
commas to separate the frequencies. The value ranges
from 80 MHz to 3 GHz.
Indicates the
frequency under
test.
Pilot Number The value range is 1 to 6. Indicates the
maximum number
of pilots to be
scanned.
PNThreshold The value range is -130 to -20. The default value is
-115. The unit is dBm.
Indicates the valid
threshold of the
RSCP signal.
MeasureRate The value range is 0.5 to 10. The unit is Hz Indicates the
scanning
frequency.
TimeSyncMod
e
The value can be any of the following:
l 0: You can use the internal clock to synchronize
the TSMX scanner.
l 1: You can use the GSM signal to synchronize the
TSMX scanner.
l 2: You can use the PSS or GSM signal to
synchronize the TSMX scanner.
l 3: You can use the PPS pulse to synchronize the
TSMX scanner.
l 4: This mode can be used for only the
WCDMA_3GPP PN scanner. The average of
measured CPICH signals is used.
l 256: The synchronization clock source in use is
unknown.
Indicates the time
synchronization
mode.

14.2 Description of Predefined Events
This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and
LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14.2.1 General Events
This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section
when configuring general events and then perform the related operations.
14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events
This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the GSM network.
14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events
This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the WCDMA network.
14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events
This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section
when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network.
14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE
network events by referring to the following descriptions.
14.2.1 General Events
This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section
when configuring general events and then perform the related operations.
Name Meaning Description
Call Setup
Timeout
Call setup
timeout
This event occurs when a call setup event times out.
Data Transfer Start Data transfer start This event occurs when a data service test, such as
FTP test or HTTP test, starts.
Filemark - A filemark is encountered in the logfile.
Record Pause Suspension of
logfile recording
This event occurs when you suspend the recording
of logfiles in the Probe.
Record Resume Resuming of
logfile recording
This event occurs when logfiles continue to be
recorded from the time point the recording is
suspended for the last time.
Test Stop Stopping of a test This event occurs when a test is stopped in the
Probe.
MS Connected MS connection
success
This event occurs when an MS is successfully
connected.
MS Disconnected MS
disconnection
success
This event occurs when an MS is successfully
disconnected.

GENEX Probe
14-93
14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events
This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the GSM network.
Packet Service Events
This describes the packet service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring
the packet service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations.
AttachAttem
pt
Attach
attempt
The MS attempts to attach to the packet service.
AttachSuc Attach
success
If the MS receives the Attach Accept or Attach Complete
message within the specified time after sending the Attach
Request message, you can infer that the attaching is
successful.
AttachFail Attach
failure
After sending the Attach Request message, the MS receives
the Attach Reject message or does not receive the Attach
Accept or Attach Complete message until the Attach Request
message times out.
Data
Transfer
Start
Data transfer
start
The data services such as FTP and HTTP services start to be
executed, and thus the data transfer starts.
DetachAtte
mpt
Detach
attempt
The MS attempts to detach from the packet service.
DetachSuc Detach
success
If the MS receives the Detach Accept message within the
specified time after sending the Detach Request message, you
can infer that the detaching is successful.
GSMMMS
MOAttempt
MMS
Sending
attempt
The MS attempts to send an MMS.
GSMMMS
MOSuc
MMS
sending
success
The MS sends an MMS successfully.
GSMMMS
MOFail
MMS
sending
failure
The MS fails to send an MMS.
PDPActivati
onReq
PDP
activation
request
If the MS sends the Activate PDP Context Request message,
you can infer that the PDP request is activated.
PDPActivati
onSuc
PDP
activation
success
If the MS receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message
after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you
can infer that the PDP activation is successful.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PDPActivati
onFail
PDP
activation
failure
If the MS does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept
message within the specified time after sending the Activate
PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP
activation fails.
PDPDeactiv
ationReq
PDP
deactivation
request
The MS sends the Deactivate PDP Context Request message
to request the PDP deactivation.
PDPDeactiv
ationSuc
PDP
deactivation
success
If the MS receives the Deactivate PDP Context Accept
message after sending the Deactivate PDP Context Request
message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful.
RAUpdateR
eq
Routing area
update
request
The MS sends the Routing Area Update Request message to
request the routing area update.
RAUpdateS
uc
Routing area
update
success
If the MS receives the Routing Area Update Accept or
Routing Area Update Complete message after sending the
Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the
routing area is updated successfully.
RAUpdateFa
il
Routing area
update
failure
If the MS does not receive the Routing Area Update message
after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you
can infer that the routing area fails to be updated.
RAS Dial
Attempt
RAS dial
attempt
The remote access service (RAS) dial is attempted.
RAS Dial RAS dial
success
The RAS dial is successful.
RAS Hangup RAS hangup The RAS hangs up.
RAS Error RAS error The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally.
Session Start Session start The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started. The
session start events include FTP Get and FTP Put.
Session End Session end The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are ended.
Session Drop Session drop Any of the following conditions indicates that the task is
terminated exceptionally:
l In the FTP service, the data downloading is terminated
exceptionally.
l In the HTTP and WAP Download services, if the cause
value of the Deactivate PDP Context Request message of
the MS is not Regular Deactivation, you can infer that the
PDP session is dropped.
Session
Error
Session error The data services such as FTP and HTTP fail to be executed.

GENEX Probe
14-95
Voice Service Events
This describes the voice service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring
the voice service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations.
GSMCallAttempt
(MOC)
GSM mobile originating
call attempt
The MS sends the Channel Request
message to request the traffic
channel. The situation varying
according to the cause values is
MOC. MOC indicates a mobile
originating call.
GSMCallAttempt
(MTC)
GSM mobile terminating
call attempt
The MS sends the Channel Request
message to request the traffic
channel. The situation varying
according to the cause values is
MTC. MTC indicates a mobile
terminating call.
GSMCallAttemptRet-
ry
GSM call attempt retry The MS repeatedly sends the
Channel Request message after
sending a Channel Request message
and before receiving the Immediate
Assignment message.
GSMAssignmentSuc GSM assignment success If the MS sends the Assignment
Complete message after sending the
Assignment command message, you
can infer the GSM assignment is
successful.
GSMAssignmentFail GSM assignment failure If the MS receives the Assignment
Failure message after receiving the
Assignment command message, you
can infer the GSM assignment fails.
GSMOutgoingCall-
Setup
GSM outgoing call setup The outgoing call is set up
successfully.
GSMIncomingCall-
Setup
GSM incoming call setup The incoming call is set up
successfully.
GSMOutgoingCallEs-
tablished
GSM outgoing call
establishment success
The calling MS receives the
Downlink Connect message or
Uplink Connect Ack message, you
can infer that the GSM outgoing call
is established successfully.
GSMIncomingCallEs-
tablished
GSM incoming call
establishment success
The called MS receives the
Downlink Connect message or
Uplink Connect Ack message, you
can infer that the GSM incoming call
is established successfully.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GSMOutgoingCallSe-
tupFailRF
GSM outgoing call
establishment failure
Call abnormally ended prior to
GSMOutgoingCallSetup event
(RF reason).
GSMIncomingCallSe-
tupFailRF
GSM incoming call
establishment failure
GSMIncomingCallSetup event
(RF reason).
GSMOutgoingCallSe-
tupFailNotRF
GSM outgoing call
establishment failure (not
RF reason)
GSMOutgoingCallSetup event
(not RF reason).
GSMIncomingCallSe-
tupFailNotRF
GSM incoming call
establishment failure (not
RF reason)
GSMIncomingCallSetup event
(not RF reason).
GSMCallCompleted GSM call completed If the MS receives the Disconnect,
Release, or Release complete
message, you can infer that the GSM
call is complete.
GSMCallDropped GSM call dropped The call is terminated exceptionally
after being established successfully.
GSMHandoverReq GSM inter-cell handover
request
An attempted inter-cell handover in
GSM.
GSMHandoverSuc GSM inter-cell handover
success
Successful inter-cell handover in
GSM.
GSMHandoverFail GSM inter-cell handover
failure
An attempted inter-cell handover in
GSM failed.
GSMIntracellHando-
verReq
GSM intra-cell handover
request
An attempted intra-cell handover in
GSM.
GSMIntracellHando-
verSuc
success
Successful intra-cell handover in
GSM.
GSMIntracellHando-
verFail
failure
An attempted intra-cell handover in
GSM failed.
GSMSDCCHAssigne
d
GSM SDCCH assignment
success
After the GSM call attempt event
occurs, the MS receives the
Immediate Assignment or
Immediate Assignment Extend
message to assign the stand-alone
dedicated control channel
(SDCCH).
GSMSDCCHCallDro
p
GSM SDCCH call dropped During the period from the
successful SDCCH assignment to
the call establishment, the signaling
process terminated exceptionally.
GENEX Probe
14-97
GSMCellReselection GSM cell reselection The MS selects a new serving cell in
idle status.
GSMLocationUpdate-
Suc
GSM location update
success
If the MS receives the Location
Updating Accept message, the GSM
location is updated.
GSMLocationUpdate-
Fail
GSM location update
failure
The MS fails to update the location
area code (LAC).
GSMSMSSentAt-
tempt
GSM SMS sent attempt The MS attempts to send an SMS
message.
GSMSMSSentSuc GSM SMS sent success The MS succeeds in sending an SMS
message.
GSMSMSSentFail GSM SMS sent failure The MS sends an SMS message
failed.
GSMSMSReceived GSM SMS received The MS succeeds in receiving an
SMS message.
CMServiceReq Connection management
service request
-
CMServiceAcpt Connection management
service accept
-
CMServiceReqRej Connection management
service failure
-

14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events
This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the WCDMA network.
Authentication Ciphering Events
This describes the authentication ciphering events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part
when configuring the authentication ciphering events on the WCDMA network, and then
AuthenCiph
erReq
Authenticati
on ciphering
request
If the UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REQ
message, you can infer that the UE requests the authentication
ciphering.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
AuthenCiph
erSuc
Authenticati
on ciphering
success
If the network receives the Authentication AND Ciphering
REQ message and sends the Authentication AND Ciphering
Resp message, you can infer that the authentication is ciphered
successfully.
AuthenCiph
erFail
Authenticati
on ciphering
failure
When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that
the authentication fails to be ciphered.
l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REJ
message.
l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering
Failure message.
l The UE does not receive the Authentication AND
Ciphering Resp message within the specified time.

Authentication Events
This describes the authentication events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring the authentication events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.
Authenticat
ionReq
Authenticati
on request
If the network receives the Authentication Request message,
you can infer that the UE originates an authentication request.
Authentica-
tionRsp
Authenticati
on success
If the network receives the Authentication Request message
and sends the Authentication Response message to the UE,
and then the UE does not receive the Authentication Reject
message within the specified time, you can infer that the UE
authentication is successful.
Authenticat
ionFail
Authenticati
on failure
the authentication fails.
l No response to the Authentication Request message is
received within the specified time.
l The UE receives the Authentication Failure message.
l The UE receives the Authentication Reject message.

Call Connection Events
This describes the call connection events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring call connection events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
PagingType1 Paging type 1 This is the paging event of the UE in idle status.
GENEX Probe
14-99
PagingType2 Paging type 2 This is the paging event of the UE in dedicated status
during the concurrent service.
OutgoingCallAt
tempt
Outgoing call
attempt
The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value
of the RRC request is Originating Conversational Call
or Emergency Call. If the UE does not receive the RRC
request or the cause value of the RRC request is
incorrect but receives the CM Service or Call
Proceeding request, the Outgoing Call Attempt event
also occurs.
IncomingCallAt
tempt
Incoming call
attempt
The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value
of the RRC request is any of the following values:
l Terminating Conversational Call
l Paging Type2
l Paging response
OutgoingCallSe
tupSuc
Outgoing call
setup success
-
IncomingCallSe
tupSuc
Incoming call
setup success
-
OutgoingCallSe
tupFailRFReaso
n
Outgoing call
setup failure
(RF reason)
-
IncomingCallSe
tupFailRFReaso
n
Incoming call
setup failure
(RF reason)
-
OutgoingCallSe
tupFailNotRFR
eason
Outgoing call
setup failure
(not RF reason)
The outgoing call is interrupted or cancelled.
IncomingCallSe
tupFailNotRFR
eason
Incoming call
setup failure
(not RF reason)
The incoming call is interrupted or cancelled.
CallSetupLink-
Restore
Call
establishment
link restored
The call reestablishment caused by the interrupted
signal link during the call establishment process also is
successful.
OutgoingCallEs
tablished
Outgoing call
established
The outgoing call receives the Connect message or
sends the Connect Acknowledge message.
IncomingCallEs
tablished
Incoming call
established
The incoming call sends the Connect message or
receives the Connect Acknowledge message.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CallDropped Call dropped l When the UE is in dedicated status and does not
perform inter-system handovers, if the UE receives
any of the following messages, you can infer that the
call is dropped.
Master Information Block message
System Information1 message
The RRC state is RRC Disconnected.
l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release
message whose cause value is RRC Abnormal
Release.
l The UE receives the CC Disconnect or CC Release
Complete message whose cause value is not any of
Normal Call Clearing
Normal Unspecified
User alerting no answer
User busy
Call rejected
Destination out of order
CallCompleted Call completed The call is connected and ended properly.
LinkRestoreAt-
tempt
Link restored
attempt
l The RRC state received by the UE is CELL_FACH.
l The UE sends the Cell Update message.
LinkRestoreSuc Link restored
success
l The RRC state sent to the UE is CELL_DCH.
l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration
Complete message.
LinkRestoreFail Link restored
failure
The reported RRC state is RRC_Disconnect.
WCDMASMSS
entAttempt
WCDMA SMS
sending
attempt
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message
whose cause value is Originating Low Priority
Signaling and then receives the CM Service Request
message within the specified time.
WCDMASMSS
ent
WCDMA SMS
sending
success
The UE receives the CM Service Request message.
WCDMASMSR
eceiveAttempt
WCDMA SMS
reception
attempt
The UE sends the Paging Type1 or Paging Type2
message and then receives the RRC Connection Request
message whose cause value is Terminating Low Priority
Signaling within the specified time.
WCDMASMSR
eceived
WCDMA SMS
reception
success
After receiving the Paging Response message, the UE
receives the Downlink CP-ACK message.
GENEX Probe
14-101
RAS Dial
Attempt
RAS dial
attempt
The RAS dial is attempted.
RAS Dial RAS dial
success
The RAS dial is successful.
RAS Hangup RAS hangup The RAS hangs up.
RAS Error RAS error The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally.
Session Start Session start The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started.
Session End Session end This event occurs when all data transmission or
reception are complete.
Session Drop Session
dropped
-
CMServiceReq Connection
management
service request
-
CMServiceAcpt Connection
management
service accept
-
CMServiceReq
Rej
Connection
management
service failure
-

Security Events
This describes the security events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
security events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
SecurityMo
deReq
Security
mode request
The UE sends the Security Mode Command message to
request for the security mode.
SecurityMo
deSuc
Security
mode success
If the UE receives the Security Mode Command message,
sends the Security Mode Complete message, and does not
receive the Security Mode Fail message, you can infer that the
security mode is successful.
SecurityMo
deFail
Security
mode failure
the security mode fails.
l The UE receives the Security Mode Failure message.
l The UE does not send the Security Mode Complete

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GMM Process Events
This describes the GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) process events of the WCDMA. You
can refer to this part when configuring the GMM process events on the WCDMA network, and
AttachSuc Attach
success
If the UE receives the Attach Accept or sends the Attach
Complete message, you can infer that the attaching is
successful.
AttachFail Attach
failure
The UE does not receive the Attach Accept message or does
not send the Attach Complete message.
PDPActivat
ionReq
PDP
activation
request
If the UE sends the Activate PDP Context Request message,
you can infer that the PDP request is activated.
PDPActivat
ionSuc
PDP
activation
success
If the UE receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message
after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you
can infer that the PDP activation is successful.
PDPActivat
ionFail
PDP
activation
failure
If the UE does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept
message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request
message, you can infer that the PDP activation fails.
Detach Detach If the UE receives the Detach Accept message, you can infer
that the detaching is successful.
RAUpdate
Req
Routing area
update
request
The UE sends the Routing Area Update Request message to
request the routing area update.
RAUpdateS
uc
Routing area
update
success
If the UE receives the Routing Area Update Complete message
after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you
can infer that the routing area is updated successfully.
RAUpdateF
ail
Routing area
update
failure
the routing area fails to be updated.
l The UE receives the Routing Area Update Reject message.
l The UE does not receive the Routing Area Update Accept,
Routing Area Update Complete, or GPRS Suspension
Request message.

Handover Events
This describes the handover events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
the soft handover and hard handover events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the
related operations.
GENEX Probe
14-103
SoftHOAttempt Soft
handover
attempt
The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.
SoftHO Soft
handover
The UE sends the ActiveSet Update Complete message.
SoftHOFail Soft
handover
failure
l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.
l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.
l After receiving the ActiveSet Update message, the UE
does not send the ActiveSet Update Complete
Event1A Event 1A The UE sends the Measurement Report 1A message.
Event1B Event 1B The UE sends the Measurement Report 1B message.
Event1C Event 1C The UE sends the Measurement Report 1C message.
Event1D Event 1D The UE sends the Measurement Report 1D message.
Event1E Event 1E The UE sends the Measurement Report 1E message.
Event2E Event 2E The UE sends the Measurement Report 2E message.
Event1F Event 1F The UE sends the Measurement Report 1F message.
Event2F Event 2F The UE sends the Measurement Report 2F message.
PhChannelRecfg-
Suc
Physical
channel
reconfigurat
ion success
The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration
Complete message within the fixed time.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PhChannelRecfg-
Fail
Physical
channel
reconfigurat
ion failure
The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration
Fail message in the fixed time or the event times out.
TrChannelRecfg-
Suc
Transport
channel
reconfigurat
ion success
The UE sends the Transport Channel Reconfiguration
TrChannelRecfg-
Fail
Transport
channel
reconfigurat
ion failure
The UE receives the Transport Channel Reconfiguration
Fail message within the fixed time or the event times out.
RBReconfigSuc Radio
bearer
reconfigurat
ion success
The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration
RBReconfigFail Radio
bearer
reconfigurat
ion failure
The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failed
message within the fixed time or the event times out.
RBRelease Radio
bearer
release
The UE sends the Radio Bearer Release Complete
message.
RBReleaseFail RB release
failure
The UE receives the Radio Bearer Release Fail message
within the fixed time or does not send the Radio Bearer
Release Complete message.
IntraFreqHHO Intra-
frequency
hard
handover
The UE receives any of the following messages sent from
the network:
l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration
l Transport Channel Reconfiguration
l Physical Channel Reconfiguration
If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of
this message is the same as that of the current active set,
the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH
info is not included in the current active set, and the UE
gives the response to corresponding complete message,
the intra-frequency hard handover is successful.
GENEX Probe
14-105
IntraFreqHHOFa
il
Intra-
frequency
hard
handover
failure
the network:
this message is the same as that of the current active set,
the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH
info is not included in the current active set, and the UE
gives the response to corresponding failure message, the
intra-frequency hard handover fails.
InterFreqHHO Inter-
frequency
hard
handover
the network:
this message is different from that of the current active
set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding
complete message, the inter-frequency hard handover is
successful.
InterFreqHHOFa
il
Inter-
frequency
hard
handover
failure
the network:
this message is different from that of the current active
set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding
failure message, the inter-frequency hard handover fails.
IntraFrequency-
CellReselection
Intra-
frequency
cell
reselection
In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between
intra-frequency cells.
InterFrequency-
CellReselection
Inter-
frequency
cell
reselection
In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between
inter-frequency cells.
CellReselection-
ConnectMode
Cell
reselection
connection
mode
The UE receives the Cell Reselection cause message.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CSConnectionH
O2Gto3GAttemp
t
CS
handover
attempt
from 2G to
3G
If the UE receives the (GSM RR DL_DCCH) Inter
System To UTRAN Handover Command message, you
can infer that the UE requests the CS handover from 2G
to 3G.
CSConnectionH
O2Gto3GSuc
CS
handover
succeeded
from 2G to
3G
After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE
sends the (RRC UL_DCCH) Handover to UTRAN
Complete message within the specified time, you can
infer that the CS handover from 2G to 3G is successful.
CSConnectionH
O2Gto3GFail
CS
handover
failed from
2G to 3G
receives the Handover Failure message within the
specified time or does not send the Handover Complete
message, you can infer that the CS handover from 2G to
3G fails.
CSConnectionH
O3Gto2GAttemp
t
CS
handover
attempt
from 3G to
2G
If the UE receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Handover From
UTRAN Command-GSM message, you can infer that the
UE requests the CS handover from 3G to 2G.
CSConnectionH
O3Gto2GSuc
CS
handover
succeeded
from 3G to
2G
sends the Handover Complete message within the
specified time, you can infer that the CS handover from
3G to 2G is successful.
CSConnectionH
O3Gto2GFail
CS
handover
failed from
3G to 2G
receives the Handover from UTRAN Failure message
within the specified time or does not send the Handover
Complete message, you can infer that the CS handover
from 3G to 2G fails.
PSConnectionH
O2Gto3GAttemp
t
PS handover
attempt
from 2G to
3G
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to
request for the PS handover from 2G to 3G.
PSConnectionH
O2Gto3GSuc
PS handover
succeeded
from 2G to
3G
sends the RB Setup Complete message within the
specified time, you can infer that the PS handover from
2G to 3G is successful.
PSConnectionH
O2Gto3GFail
PS handover
failed from
2G to 3G
receives the Routing Area Update Reject (NAS GMM)
message within the specified time or does not receive the
RB Setup Complete message, you can infer that the PS
handover from 2G to 3G fails.
GENEX Probe
14-107
PSConnectionH
O3Gto2GAttemp
t
PS handover
attempt
from 3G to
2G
If the UE sends the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order
From UTRAN message, you can infer that the UE
requests for the PS handover from 3G to 2G.
PSConnectionH
O3Gto2GSuc
PS handover
succeeded
from 3G to
2G
receives the (NAS GMM) Routing Area Update Accept
message or sends the RB Setup Complete message within
the specified time, you can infer that the PS handover
from 3G to 2G is successful.
PSConnectionH
O3Gto2GFail
PS handover
failed from
3G to 2G
receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order From
UTRAN Failure message within the specified time or
does not send the Routing Area Update Accept/Routing
Area Update Complete message, you can infer that the PS
handover from 3G to 2G fails.
CellResel3Gto2G Cell
reselection
from 3G to
2G
If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message
after the WtoGIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from
3G to 2G is reselected.
CellResel2Gto3G Cell
reselection
from 2G to
3G
If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message
after the GtoWIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from
2G to 3G is reselected.
CompressedMo-
deActivation
Compressio
n mode
activation
Before the hard handover (including the intra-frequency
hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, and inter-
system hard HO), the network sends the Measurement
Control message to activate the compression mode, and
then performs the measurement.
CompressedMod
eDeActivation
Compressio
n mode
deactivation
The network sends the Measurement control message to
notify the UE of activating the compression mode, and
then performs the measurement before hard handover. If
the cell measured in compression mode does not meet the
requirements for the hard handover, the network sends the
Measurement Control message to notify the UE of
deactivating the compression mode within the specified
time, and then activates the compression mode again. If
the cell is qualified, the hard handover is performed. The
UE automatically deactivates the compression mode after
the hard handover is successful.

HSDPA Events
This describes the HSDPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
HSDPA events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
H2HIntraFreqCell-
ChangeSuc
HSDPA to HSDPA intra-
frequency serving cell update
success
The UE receives the Physical
Channel Reconfiguration message
from the network and then sends the
Physical Channel Reconfiguration
Complete message to the network.
H2R99IntraFreq-
SHOSuc
HSDPA to R99 intra-
frequency soft handover
success
l The UE receives the Radio bearer
reconfiguration message from the
network and then sends the Radio
bearer reconfiguration complete
message to the network.
l The UE receives the Activeset
update message from the network
and then sends the Activeset
update complete message to the
network.
H2R99IntraFreqH-
HOSuc
HSDPA to R99 intra-
frequency hard handover
success
l The UE receives the Physical
channel reconfiguration message
from the network and then sends
the Physical channel
reconfiguration complete
R992HIntraFreq-
SHOSuc
R99 to HSDPA intra-
success
The UE receives the Radio bearer
R992HIntraFreqH-
HOSuc
R99 to HSDPA intra-
success
Channel Reconfiguration
message from the network and
then sends the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete
GENEX Probe
14-109
H2HIntraFreqCell-
ChangeFail
HSDPA to HSDPA intra-
failure
The UE receives the Physical
Channel Reconfiguration message
from the network and does not send
the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete message
to the network.
H2R99IntraFreq-
SHOFail
HSDPA to R99 intra-
failure
network and does not send the Radio
H2R99IntraFreqH-
HOFail
HSDPA to R99 intra-
failure
channel reconfiguration message
from the network and sends the
Physical channel reconfiguration
failed message to the network or
does not send the Physical
channel reconfiguration complete
message to the network within the
specified time.
R992HIntraFreq-
SHOFail
R99 to HSDPA intra-
failure
network and does not send the Radio
R992HIntraFreqH-
HOFail
R99 to HSDPA intra-
failure
Channel Reconfiguration
message from the network and
then sends the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete
network and sends the Radio
bearer reconfiguration failed
Alternatively, the UE does not
send the Radio bearer
reconfiguration complete
message to the network within the
specified time.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
H2GHHOSuc HSDPA to 2G hard handover
success
l The UE receives the Cell Change
order from UTRAN message
from the UTRAN network.
l The UE receives the Routing
Area Update Accept message
H2GHHOFail HSDPA to 2G hard handover
failure
l The UE receives the Cell Change
order from UTRAN message
l The UE receives the system
message that cannot be received
from the network in DCH state.
l The UE receives the GSM system
message, indicating the idle status
from the network.
l The UE sends the Cell Change
order from UTRAN fail message
to the network.
H2HInterFreqCell-
ChangeSuc
HSDPA to HSDPA inter-
success
-
H2HInterFreqCell-
ChangeFail
HSDPA to HSDPA inter-
failure
-
H2R99InterFreqH-
HOSuc
HSDPA to R99 inter-
success
-
H2R99InterFreqH-
HOFail
HSDPA to R99 inter-
failure
-
R992HInterFreqH-
HOSuc
R99 to HSDPA inter-
success
-
R992HInterFreqH-
HOFail
R99 to HSDPA inter-
failure
-
CompressedMo-
deActivation
Compression mode
activation
Before the hard handover (including
the intra-frequency hard handover,
inter-frequency hard handover, and
inter-system hard HO), the network
sends the Measurement Control
message to activate the compression
mode, and then performs the
measurement.
GENEX Probe
14-111
CompressedMode-
DeActivation
Compression mode
deactivation
The network sends the Measurement
control message to notify the UE of
activating the compression mode,
and then performs the measurement
before hard handover. If the cell
measured in compression mode does
not meet the requirements for the
hard handover, the network sends the
Measurement Control message to
notify the UE of deactivating the
compression mode within the
specified time, and then activates the
compression mode again. If the cell
is qualified, the hard handover is
performed. The UE automatically
deactivates the compression mode
after the hard handover is successful.

HSUPA Events
This describes the HSUPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
HSUPA events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
CellChangeUtoU-
BySHOAttempt
HSUPA serving
cell update attempt
triggered by soft
handovers
l The active set has multiple links. One of them
is served as the enhanced dedicated channel
(E-DCH) serving cell.
l The UE receives the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration message send by the RNC.
CellChangeUtoU-
ByIntraHHOAt-
tempt
HSUPA serving
cell update attempt
triggered by intra-
frequency hard
handovers
is served as the E-DCH serving cell.
l The UE reports the measurement report on the
1D event and obtains the primary scrambling
code of the reported cell.
Reconfiguration message from the RNC.
CellChangeUtoU-
ByInterHHOAt-
tempt
HSUPA serving
cell update attempt
triggered by inter-
frequency hard
handovers
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CellChangeUtoU-
BySHOSuc
HSUPA serving
cell update success
triggered by soft
handovers
l The UE sends the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete message to the
SRNC.
CellChangeUtoU-
ByIntraHHOSuc
HSUPA serving
cell update success
triggered by intra-
frequency hard
handovers
SRNC.
CellChangeUtoU-
ByInterHHOSuc
HSUPA serving
cell update success
triggered by inter-
frequency hard
handovers
SRNC.
CellChangeUtoU-
BySHOFail
HSUPA serving
cell update failure
triggered by soft
handovers
l The active set has multiple links. One cell is
the E-DCH serving cell.
Reconfiguration Failure message to the
SRNC.
CellChangeUtoU-
ByIntraHHOFail
HSUPA serving
cell update failure
triggered by intra-
frequency hard
handovers
SRNC.
GENEX Probe
14-113
CellChangeUtoU-
ByInterHHOFail
HSUPA serving
cell update failure
triggered by inter-
frequency hard
handovers
SRNC.
PSConnectionHO
UtoGPRSAttempt
Handover attempt
between HSUPA
and GPRS
The UE receives the Cell Change Order from
UTRAN message from the UTRAN network.
PSConnectionHO
UtoGPRSSuc
Handover success
between HSUPA
and GPRS
l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from
l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept
Complete message to the GPRS network.
PSConnectionHO
UtoGPRSFail
Handover failure
between HSUPA
and GPRS
l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from
l The UE receives the system message of the
GSM or WCDMA, returns to the UTRAN
network and responds the Cell Change Order
from UTRAN Failure message, or receives no
message indicating success or failure in the
fixed time.
PSConnection-
HOGPRStoUSuc
GPRS to HSUPA
inter-system
handover success
l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup
Request message to the UTRAN network.
l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept
Complete message to the UTRAN network.
PSConnection-
HOGPRStoUFail
GPRS to HSUPA
inter-system
handover failure
l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup
Request message to the UTRAN network.
l The UE receives the system message of the
GSM or WCDMA, receives the RRC
Connection Setup Request message, receives
the Routing Area Update Failure message, or
does not receive the response of the RRC
Connection Setup message.
ChannelChangeIn
terCellIntraFreE-
toDAttempt
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell intra-
frequency hard
handover attempt
l The UE receives the Radio Bearer
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ChannelChangeIn
terCellIntraFreE-
toDSuc
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell intra-
frequency hard
handover success
l The UE sends the Radio Bearer
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
terCellIntraFreE-
toDFail
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell intra-
frequency hard
handover failure
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
terCellInterFreE-
toDAttempt
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell inter-
frequency hard
handover attempt
ChannelChangeIn
terCellInterFreE-
toDSuc
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell inter-
frequency hard
handover success
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
terCellInterFreE-
toDFail
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell inter-
frequency hard
handover failure
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellEtoDAt-
tempt
HSUPA to R99
intra-cell channel
type change
attempt
GENEX Probe
14-115
ChannelChangeIn
traCellEtoDSuc
HSUPA to R99
intra-cell channel
type change
success
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellEtoDFail
HSUPA to R99
intra-cell channel
type change failure
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellDtoEAt-
tempt
R99 to HSUPA
intra-cell channel
type change
attempt
ChannelChangeIn
traCellDtoESuc
R99 to HSUPA
intra-cell channel
type change
success
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellDtoEFail
R99 to HSUPA
intra-cell channel
type change failure
SRNC.
ChannelChangeE-
toFAttempt
EDCH to FACH
channel change
attempt
l The latest active set of the UE has multiple
links. One of them is served as the E-DCH
serving cell.
Reconfiguration message from the network.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ChannelChangeE-
toFSuc
EDCH to FACH
channel change
success
serving cell.
network.
ChannelChangeE-
toFFail
EDCH to FACH
channel change
failure
serving cell.
network and receives no corresponding
fixed time.
ChannelChangeF-
toEAttempt
FACH to EDCH
channel change
attempt
serving cell.
ChannelChangeF-
toESuc
FACH to EDCH
channel change
success
serving cell.
network.
ChannelChangeF-
toEFail
FACH to EDCH
channel change
failure
serving cell.
network and receives no corresponding
fixed time.

GENEX Probe
14-117
MM Process Events
This describes the mobility management (MM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer
to this part when configuring the MM process events on the WCDMA network, and then perform
the related operations.
LAUpdateR
eq
Location update
request
The UE sends the Location Updating Request message
to update its location.
LAUpdateS
uc
Location update
success
If the UE receives the Location Updating Accept
message, you can infer that the location is updated
successfully.
LAUpdateF
ail
Location update
failure
If any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that
the location fails to be updated.
l The UE receives the Location Update Reject
message.
l If the UE does not receive the Location Update
Accept message within the specified time.
IMSIDetac
h
International mobile
subscriber identity
(IMSI) detach
If the UE sends the IMSI Detach Indication message,
you can infer that the IMSI detach occurs.
IdentityReq Identity request The UE sends the Identity Request message to request
the identity identification.
IdentityRsp Identity response If the UE sends the Identity Request message and
receives the Identity Response message, you can infer
that the identity identification is successful.

MMS Events
This describes the MMS events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
MMS events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
MMSMOAtte
mpt
MMS mobile originating
(MO) attempt
The following process is referred to as an
MMSMOAttempt event.
1. The UE sends the RRC Connection Request
message.
2. The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup
Complete message.
3. The UE sends the Service Request message.
4. The UE sends the Activate PDP Context
Request message within the specified time.
5. The UE receives the Activate PDP Context
Accept message.
MMSMOSuc MMS MO sending
success
The following process is referred to as an
MMSMOSuc event.
1. After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, the
UE sends the Deactivate PDP Context
Request message during the period from the
time when the service is ended to the time
when the UE receives the system message.
2. The UE receives the Deactivate PDP Context
Accept and RRC Connect Release messages,
and the Release Cause value of the RRC
Connect Release message is Normal
Event.
3. The UE sends the RRC Connection Release
Complete message.
MMSMOFail MMS MO sending
failure
After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, during
the period from the time when the service is
ended to the time when the UE receives the
system message, if any of the following
situations occurs, the MO fails to sent the MMS.
l The UE does not send the Deactivate PDP
Context Request message.
l The UE does not receive the Deactivate PDP
Context Accept message.
l The UE receives the RRC Connect Release
signaling but the Release Cause value of the
RRC Connection Release message is not
Normal Event.

Radio Bearer Establishment Events
This describes the radio bearer (RB) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring RB events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
GENEX Probe
14-119
RBSetupRe
q
RB setup
request
The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup message to request
the RB setup.
RBSetupSu
c
RB setup
success
If the UE sends the Radio Bearer Setup Complete message,
you can infer that the RB is set up successfully.
RBSetupFai
l
RB setup
failure
When any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that the
RB setup fails.
l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup Failure message.
l The UE does not receive the Radio Bearer Setup Complete

RRC Events
This describes the radio resource control (RRC) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this
part when configuring RRC events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
RRCSetup
Req
RRC
connection
setup request
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the
network to request for the RRC connection setup.
RRCSetupS
uc
RRC
connection
setup success
If the UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message
to the network, you can infer that the RRC connection setup
is successful.
RRCSetupF
ail
RRC
connection
setup failure
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the
network and does not receive the RRC Connection Setup
RRCConne
ctionRel
RRC
connection
release
The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose
cause value is Normal Event or User Inactivity. Alternatively,
the UE sends the RRC Connection Release Complete
message.
RRCConne
ctionAbnor
mal
RRC
connection
abnormal
release
the RRC connection is released exceptionally.
l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message
whose cause value is not Normal Event or User Inactivity.
l If RRC state is set to CELL_DCH and the UE does not
receive RRC Connection Release, the received RRC state
is Disconnected, Master Information Block, System
Information 1, or System Information 2.
RRCState RRC State This event occurs when the UE sends the RRC State packets.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events
This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
The system defines the following states of the MS:
l INITorIDLE: indicates the state combining the initial state with the idle state.
l SYS_ACC: indicates the system access state.
l TC: indicates the traffic state.
EV-DO Events
This describes events of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the CDMA2000 EV-DO network, and then perform the related operations.
DO-
ATConnectR
eq
AT connection
request
The AT sends the Connection Request message on
the access channel.
DO-
ATConnectSu
c
AT connection
success
The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete message
on the reverse traffic channel.
DO-
ATConnectFa
il
AT connection
failure
When any of the following situations occurs, you can
infer that the connection fails.
l The AT receives the Connection Deny message
on the control channel.
l The AT does not send the Traffic Channel
Complete message within the specified time after
sending the Connection Request message.
DO-
ANConnectR
eq
AN connection
request
The AN sends the Connection Request message on
the access channel.
DO-
ANConnectS
uc
AN connection
success
The AN sends the Traffic Channel Complete
message on the reverse traffic channel.
DO-
ANConnectF
ail
AN connection
failure
When any of the following situations occurs, you can
infer that the connection fails.
l The AN receives the Connection Deny message
on the control channel.
l The AN does not send the Traffic Channel
Complete message within the specified time after
sending the Connection Request message.
GENEX Probe
14-121
DO-
ANNormalRe
lease
AN normal release When any of the following situations occurs, you can
infer that the release is normal.
l The AN receives the Connection Close message
on the forward traffic channel.
l The AT gives the response to the Connection
Close message on the reverse traffic channel.
DO-
ATNormalRe
lease
AT normal release The AT sends the Connection Close message on the
reverse traffic channel.
DO-CallDrop Call dropped -
DO-
ReverseSoftH
OReq
Reverse soft handoff
request
The AN sends the Traffic Channel Assignment
message on the control channel or on the forward
traffic channel.
DO-
ReverseSoftH
OSuc
success
The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete
message.
DO-
ReverseSoftH
OFail
failure
On the reverse traffic channel, the AT does not
receive the Traffic Channel Complete message
corresponding to the Traffic Channel Assignment
sent from the AN within the specified time.
DO-
SessionReq
Session request An EV-DO session request occurs.
DO-
SessionSuc
Session success An EV-DO session attempt completed successfully.

MMS Events (1x)
This describes the MMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the MMS on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations.
1x-
MMSESendReq
MMS sending request In idle status, the MS sends an Origination
Message, and then parses it to determine
whether this call is about the MMS service.
If yes, the MS requests for sending MMSs.
1x-
MMSESendCon
MMS sending connected In sync status, the MS sends the Service
Connect Complete Message.
1x-
MMSESendCompl
ete
MMS sending complete The MS originates an Order Release
message or receives an Order Release
message from the mobile switching center
(MSC).
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Packet Service Events (1x)
This describes the packet service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the PS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related
operations.
1x-
PSOutgoing
CallReq
PS outgoing
call request
In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination Message,
and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the
PS service. If yes, the MS requests the PS outgoing call.
1x-
PSOutgoing
CallSuc
PS outgoing
call success
After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services,
if the MS receives any of the following log packets in
SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is
successful.
l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of
the Reverse Link Channel Traffic
l Diagnostic packet in TC status
1x-
PSOutgoing
CallFail
PS outgoing
call failure
if the MS receives any of the following log packets in
SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is
failed.
l Log packet of the Sync Channel
l Log packet of the Paging Channel
l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status
1x-
PSCallDrop
ped
PS call
dorpped
if the MS receives any of the following log packets and does
not receive or originate the Release Order message before
receiving the log packet, you can infer that the PS call is
dropped.
1x-
PSCallCom
pleted
PS call
completed
In TC status, if the MS originates a Release Order and the BSS
also originates a Release Order, you can infer that the PS call
is complete.

SMS Events (1x)
This describes the SMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring
the SMS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations.
GENEX Probe
14-123
1x-
SMSSentReq
SMS sending
request
In idle status, the MS sends an Origination Message,
and then parses it to determine whether this call is
about the SMS service. If yes, the MS requests for
sending SMSs.
1x-
SMSSendCon
SMS sending
connected
In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect
Complete Message.
1x-SMSSend SMS sending In dedicated status, the MS sends the Data Burst
Message.
1x-
SMSSendComp
lete
SMS sending
complete
The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.
1x-
SMSReceiveRe
q
SMS reception
request
In idle status, the MS receives the Service Connect
Complete message.
1x-
SMSReceiveCo
n
SMS reception
connected
In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect
Complete Message.
1x-SMSReceive SMS received In dedicated status, the MS receives the Data Burst
Message.
1x-
SMSReceiveCo
mplete
SMS reception
complete
The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.

Voice Service Events (1x)
This describes the voice service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the CS voice service events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the
related operations.
1x-
CSOutgoingCall-
Req
CS outgoing call
request
In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination
Message, and then parses it to determine whether
this call is about the CS service. If yes, the MS
requests the CS outgoing call.
1x-
CSOutgoingCall-
Suc
CS outgoing call
success
After originating an outgoing call request for the CS
services, if the MS receives any of the following
information in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that
the CS outgoing call is successful:
l Service Connect Completion Message in the log
packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1x-
CSOutgoingCall-
Fail
CS outgoing call
failure
After originating an outgoing call request for the CS
services, if the MS receives any of the following log
packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the
CS outgoing call is failed.
1x-
CSIncomingCall-
Req
CS incoming
call request
In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends a Paging
Response Message, and then parses it to determine
whether this call is about the CS service. If yes, the
MS requests the CS incoming call.
1x-
CSIncomingCall-
Suc
CS incoming
call success
After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if
the MS receives any of the following information,
you can infer that the CS incoming call is successful.
l Service Connect Completion Message in the log
packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic
1x-
CSIncomingCall-
Fail
CS incoming
call failure
After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if
the MS receives any of the following log packets,
you can infer that the CS incoming call is failed.
1x-
CSCallDropped
CS call dropped After originating an outgoing call request for the CS
services, if the MS receives any of the following log
packets and does not receive or send the Release
Order message before receiving the log packet, you
can infer that the CS call is dropped.
1x-
CSCallCompleted
CS call
completed
In TC status, if the MS sends a Release Order
message and the base station subsystem (BSS) also
sends a Release Order message, you can infer that
the CS call is complete.
1x-
SoftHandoffReq
Soft handoff
request
The request for adding, deleting, or replacing pilots
in the active set occurs. When pilots are replaced,
the number of pilots in the active set must be greater
than one.
GENEX Probe
14-125
1x-
SoftHandoffSuc
Soft handoff
success
The pilots in the active set are added, deleted, or
replaced successfully. When pilots are replaced, the
number of pilots in the active set must be greater than
one.
1x-
SoftHandoffFail
Soft handoff
failure
The pilots in the active set fail to be added, deleted,
or replaced. When pilots are replaced, the number of
pilots in the active set must be greater than one.
1x-
InterFreqHandof-
fReq
Inter-frequency
hard handoff
request
Refers to the handoff in traffic state to another
frequency or a different band.
1x-InterFreqHan-
doffSuc
Inter-frequency
hard handoff
success
Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to
another frequency or a different band.
1x-InterFreqHan-
doffFail
Inter-frequency
hard handoff
failure
Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to another
frequency or a different band.
1x-
IntraFreqHandof-
fReq
Intra-frequency
hard handoff
request
Refers to the handoff in traffic state to the same
frequency.
1x-IntraFreqHan-
doffSuc
Intra-frequency
hard handoff
success
Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to the
same frequency.
1x-IntraFreqHan-
doffFail
Intra-frequency
hard handoff
failure
Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to the
same frequency.

14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section
when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network.
WX-
BSDeREGSuc
Base station (BS) out of
service success
The BS is out of service.
WX-BSDSAFail BS service flow setup failure The service flow setup fails.
WX-BSDSAReq BS service flow setup
request
The BS initiates a service flow setup
request.
WX-BSDSASuc BS service flow setup
success
The service flow setup is successful.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
WX-BSDSCFail BS service flow change
failure
The service flow change fails.
WX-BSDSCReq BS service flow change
request
The BS initiates a service flow change
request.
WX-BSDSCSuc BS service flow change
success
The service flow change is successful.
WX-BSDSDFail BS service flow deletion
failure
The service flow deletion fails.
WX-BSDSDReq BS service flow deletion
request
The BS initiates a service flow deletion
request.
WX-BSDSDSuc BS service flow deletion
success
The service flow deletion is successful.
WX-
BSEnterIdleFail
BS entering idle state failure The BS fails to initiate the state
conversion of an MS to idle state.
WX-
BSEnterIdleReq
BS entering idle state
request
The BS initiates a request for triggering
the state conversion of an MS to idle
state.
WX-
BSEnterIdleSuc
BS entering idle state
success
The BS successfully initiates the state
conversion of an MS to idle state.
WX-Drop MS call drop at the data link
layer
Signal loss occurs on an MS.
WX-DSAFail Dynamic service addition
failure
The service flow allocation fails.
WX-DSAReq Dynamic service addition
request
The MS initiates a request for the service
flow allocation.
WX-DSASuc Dynamic service addition
success
The service flow allocation is successful.
WX-HOCancel Handover cancellation After sending a handover request, the
MS sends a MOB_HO-IND message to
cancel the handover.
WX-HOFail Handover failure After sending a handover request, the
MS does not receive a Ranging response
message or sends a MOB_HO-IND
message with the cause value of
rejection.
WX-HOReq Handover request After sending a MOB_MSHO-REQ
message to the BS, the MS receives a
MOB_BSHO-RSP message from the BS
or sends a Ranging request for handover.
GENEX Probe
14-127
WX-HOSuc Handover success After MS sends a handover request, a
new BS serves as the serving BS and
services are not disrupted.
WX-
LocationUpdate-
Fail
MS location update failure The MS fails to perform location update.
WX-
LocationUpdateR-
eq
MS location update request The BS initiates a request for MS
location update.
WX-
LocationUpdate-
Suc
MS location update success The MS performs location update
successfully.
WX-
MSDeREGReq
MS request for out of service The MS requests for out of service.
WX-
MSDeREGSuc
MS out of service success The MS is out of service.
WX-MSDSAFail MS service flow setup
failure
-
WX-MSDSAReq MS service flow setup
request
-
WX-MSDSASuc MS service flow setup
success
-
WX-MSDSCFail MS service flow change
failure
-
WX-MSDSCReq MS service flow change
request
-
WX-MSDSCSuc MS service flow change
success
-
WX-MSDSDFail MS service flow deletion
failure
-
WX-MSDSDReq MS service flow deletion
request
-
WX-MSDSDSuc MS service flow deletion
success
-
WX-
MSEnterIdleFail
MS entering idle state
failure
-
WX-
MSEnterIdleReq
request
-
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
WX-
MSEnterIdleSuc
success
-
WX-
MSExitIdleFail
MS exiting idle state failure -
WX-
MSExitIdleReq
MS exiting idle state request -
WX-
MSExitIdleSuc
MS exiting idle state success -
WX-
NetEntryAttempt
Network access attempt The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial
network access) message to the BS to
request for accessing the network.
WX-NetEntryFail Network access failure The MS fails to access the network when
the WX-RNGFail, WX-SBCFail, WX-
PKMFail, and WX-REGFail events
occur or the MS receives an RNG-REQ
message before the service flow
allocation is successful.
WX-NetEntrySuc Network access success MS access success refers to that the MS
registers on the BTS before the service
stream is allocated successfully.
WX-PKMFail Authentication failure The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Fail)
message.
WX-PKMReq Authentication request The specified MS initiates an
authentication request for network
access during the basic capability
negotiation.
WX-PKMSuc Authentication success The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Success)
message after the authentication on the
BS side is successful.
WX-REGFail Registration failure The MS receives the registration failure
message from the network side or does
not receive any registration response.
WX-REGReq Registration request The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial
network access) message to the BS to
request for registration.
WX-REGSuc Registration success After sending a registration request, the
MS receives an REG-RSP message from
the BS.
WX-RNGFail Initial distance
measurement failure
The MS receives an RNG-RSP (Fail)
message.
GENEX Probe
14-129
WX-RNGReq Initial distance
measurement request
The MS initially accesses the network,
performs handover or accesses the
network again.
WX-RNGSuc Initial distance
measurement success
The MS receives an RNG-RSP
(Success) message.
WX-SBCFail Basic capability negotiation
failure
The MS does not receive an SBC-RSP
WX-SBCReq Basic capability negotiation
request
The basic capability negotiation request
is initiated when the MS initially
accesses the network or after the
distance measurement is successful.
WX-SBCSuc Basic capability negotiation
success
The MS receives an SBC-RSP message.
WX-
NetConnectSuc
MS connection success A service stream is set up successfully
after the MS is connected to the network.
WX-
NetConnectFail
Network connection failure A service stream setup fails when the MS
accesses the network.

14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE
network events by referring to the following descriptions.
AttachAttem
pt
Attach attempt A UE attempts to attach to the data service.
AttachSuc Attach success A UE attaches to the data service successfully.
AttachFail Attach failure A UE fails to attach to the data service.
DetachAttem
pt
Detach attempt A UE attempts to detach from the data service.
DetachSuc Detach success A UE detaches from the data service successfully.
RRCSetupRe
q
RRC connection
setup request
A UE sends an RRC Connection Request message to
the network to request for the RRC connection setup.
RRCSetupSu
c
RRC connection
setup success
If a UE sends an RRC Connection Setup Complete
message to the network, you can infer that the RRC
connection setup is successful.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RRCSetupFa
il
RRC connection
setup failure
A UE receives an RRC Connection Reject message
or does not receive an RRC Connection Setup
message within the specified time after sending an
RRC Connection Request message to the network.
ERABSetup
Attempt
ERAB setup attempt If an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message
contains the specified information element (drb-
ToAddModList or drb-ToAddModifyList), you
can infer that a UE attempts to set up the Evolved
Radio Access Bearer (ERAB).
ERABSetupS
uc
ERAB setup success If a UE receives an RRC Connection
Reconfiguration Complete message after the
ERABSetupAttempt event occurs, you can infer that
the ERAB setup is successful.
ERABSetupF
ail
ERAB setup failure If a UE does not receive an RRC Connection
Reconfiguration Complete message within the
specified time after the ERABSetupAttempt event
occurs, you can infer that the ERAB setup fails.
ERABNorma
lRel
ERAB normal
release
If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection
Reconfiguration message after receiving a
Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message,
you can infer that the ERAB is released normally.
ERABAbnor
malRel
ERAB abnormal
release
If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection
Reconfiguration message but does not receive a
Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message,
you can infer that the ERAB is released abnormally.
HOA3Measu
rereport
Handover A3
measurement report
If measId of a MeasurementReport message is the
same as measId of the previous RRC
ConnectionReconfiguration message, a handover A3
measurement report is generated.
HOAttempt Handover attempt A UE attempts to perform a handover.
HOSuc Handover success A UE performs a handover successfully.
HOFail Handover failure A UE fails to perform a handover.

14.3 Description of Information Elements
This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer
to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window.
14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs
This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views.
14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs
GENEX Probe
14-131
This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views.
14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs
This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views.
14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs
This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views.
14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs
This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views.
14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners
This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to
the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners.
14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements
This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views.
14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table
provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service.
14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides
the information noise test information elements.
14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs
This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views.
3G Neighboring Cell Measurement
This describes meanings of the IEs related to 3G Neighboring Cell Measurement of the GSM.
The following table provides the information about the 3G neighboring cells, such as the
ARFCN, quality, and level.
IE Name Range/Unit Description
UARFCN Range: 0 to 16383 Indicates the ARFCNs of measured GSM
neighbors.
P-SC Range: 0 to 511 Indicates the primary scrambling code of
measured GSM neighbors.
Diversity 0 or 1 Indicates whether to use the diversity mode. 0
refers to No and 1 refers to Yes.
Squal Unit: dB Indicates the quality of the received signal,
which is applicable to cell selection criteria S.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Srxlev Unit: dB Indicates the rank of the received signal level,
which is applicable to cell selection criteria S.
RSCP Range: -115 to -25. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal code power.
Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Indicates the ratio of energy per chip to the total
power density of received bandwidth.

AMR Call Average
This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Call Average of the GSM. The following
table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage for the whole of the call currently in progress.
Codec Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the AMR codec:
l 0: 12.2 kbit/s
l 1: 10.2 kbit/s
l 2: 7.95 kbit/s
l 3: 7.40 kbit/s
l 4: 6.70 kbit/s
l 5: 5.90 kbit/s
l 6: 5.15 kbit/s
l 7: 4.75 kbit/s
Uplink Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec
usage for the current call. This IE is invalid if no
call is ongoing.
Downlink Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR
codec usage for the current call. This IE is invalid
if no call is ongoing.

AMR Cell Average
This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Cell Average of the GSM. The following
table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage in the current serving cell before the
handover..
GENEX Probe
14-133
Codec Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the AMR codec:
l 0: 12.2 kbit/s
l 1: 10.2 kbit/s
l 2: 7.95 kbit/s
l 3: 7.40 kbit/s
l 4: 6.70 kbit/s
l 5: 5.90 kbit/s
l 6: 5.15 kbit/s
l 7: 4.75 kbit/s
Uplink Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR
codec usage since the MS started using the
current serving cell.
Downlink Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the distribution of downlink
AMR codec usage since the MS started
using the current serving cell.

AMR Codec Usage
This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Codec Usage of the GSM. The following
table provides the information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the current
terminal.
Codec UL l 12.2 kbit/s
l 10.2 kbit/s
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s
Indicates the uplink codec rate.
Uplink Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec
usage across the active set being used.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Codec DL l 12.2 kbit/s
l 10.2 kbit/s
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s
Indicates the downlink codec rate.
Downlink Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR
codec usage across the active set being used.

AMR Setting GSM
This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Setting GSM of the GSM. The following
table provides the current active set of AMR speech coders on the uplink and downlink
respectively, along with hysteresis and threshold values governing AMR mode switches.
Active Set UL Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the current active set of AMR speech
codecs on the uplink, each codec being
described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s
rate.
Active Set DL Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the current active set of AMR speech
codecs on the downlink, each codec being
described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s
rate.
Hysteresis Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the hysteresis value in the AMR
mode switch mechanism.
Threshold Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the threshold value in the AMR
mode switch mechanism.
Lower Limit Range: -5 to 35. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to
lower bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and
Threshold.
The C/I value used as input to mode control in
AMR. This parameter is distinct from the
ordinary C/I information elements, although
the value should be similar.
GENEX Probe
14-135
Upper Limit Range: -5 to 35. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to
higher bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and
Threshold.
The C/I value used as input to mode control in
AMR. This parameter is distinct from the
ordinary C/I information elements, although
the value should be similar.

BA List
This describes meanings of the IEs related to BA List of the GSM. The following table provides
the signal strength of the neighboring cells of the current cell, including the information about
IEs such as the BCCH, level and BSIC.
BCCH ARFCN Range: 0 to 1023
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124,
975 to 1023
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885
l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast
control channel.
BAND l GSM-R 850
l P-GSM 900
l E-GSM 900
l DCS 1800
l PCS 1900
Indicates the frequency band of BCCH
carrier.
RxLev Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength.
BSIC Range: 00 to 77 Indicates the base station identity code.

GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received of the GPRS.
The following table provides the total data bytes that are sent and received through the
application, subnetwork dependent convergence protocol (SNDCP), logical link control (LLC),
and radio link control (RLC) layers.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Application Bytes
Received (DL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
Indicates the number of bytes
received at the application protocol
level.
Application Bytes
Sent (UL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
Indicates the number of bytes sent
at the application protocol level.
SNDCP Bytes
Received (DL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
received at the SNDCP protocol
level since GPRS attach.
SNDCP Bytes Sent
(UL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
at the SNDCP protocol level since
GPRS attach.
LLC Bytes Received
(DL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
received at the LLC protocol level
since PS attach.
LLC Bytes Sent (UL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
at the LLC protocol level since PS
attach.
RLC Bytes Received
(DL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
received at the RLC protocol level
since GPRS attach.
RLC Bytes Sent (UL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 10
9
. Unit:
byte.
at the RLC protocol level since
GPRS attach.

GPRS Data Throughput
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Throughput of the GPRS. The
following table provides the information about IEs related to the data throughput ratio at the
application, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC layers.
App Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the data throughput on the
uplink and downlink at the
application layer.
SNDCP Throughput Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/
s.
Indicates the data throughput on the
uplink and downlink at the SNDCP
layer.
LLC Throughput Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/
s.
uplink and downlink at the LLC
layer.
GENEX Probe
14-137
RLC Throughput Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/
s.
uplink and downlink at the RLC
layer.
LLC Retrasimission
Rate
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the retransmission rate on
the uplink at the LLC layer.
RLC Retrasimission
Rate
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the retransmission rate on
the uplink at the RLC layer.
RLC BLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the block error rate on the
downlink at the RLC layer.

GPRS Data Timeslots
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Timeslots of the GPRS. The following
table provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS data timeslots.
TS used - Indicates the used timeslot number on the
uplink and downlink.
TS Channel Type - Indicates the type of channel in each timeslot
on the uplink and downlink.
CS-n Data
n: 1 to 4
Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
These elements contain the distribution of
coding scheme usage for each timeslot.
MCS-n Data
n: 1 to 9
%.
These elements contain the distribution of
modulation coding scheme usage for each
timeslot.
GMSK rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the usage percentage of the
Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying
(GMSK) coding scheme.
8PSK rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the usage percentage of 8 phase
shift keying (8PSK) coding scheme.

GPRS Line Chart
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Line Chart of the GPRS. The following
table provides the information about IEs such as the APP, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC throughput
ratio and timeslot usage of the GPRS.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
APP Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the data throughput on the uplink
and downlink at the application layer.
SNDCP Throughput Range: 0 to 400. Unit:
kbit/s.
Indicates the data throughput on the uplink
and downlink at the SNDCP layer.
LLC Throughput Range: 0 to 400. Unit:
kbit/s.
and downlink at the LLC layer.
RLC Throughput Range: 0 to 400. Unit:
kbit/s.
and downlink at the RLC layer.
Number Of Used
Timeslot (DL)
- Indicates the number of used timeslots on
the downlink.
Number Of Used
Timeslot (UL)
- Indicates the number of used timeslots on
the uplink.
Current CS (DL) Range: 1 to 4 Indicates the coding scheme currently
used on downlink.
Current CS (UL) Range: 1 to 4 Indicates the coding scheme currently
used on uplink.
Current MCS (DL) Range: 1 to 9 Indicates the modulation coding scheme
currently used on downlink.
Current MCS (UL) Range: 1 to 9 Indicates the modulation coding scheme
currently used on uplink.

GPRS PDP Context
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS PDP Context of the GPRS. The following
table provides the information about IEs related to the PDP.
Active PDP Contexts 0 or 1 Indicates whether to active the PDP
contexts.
l 0: Active
l 1: Inactive
PDP NSAPI An integer ranging
from 5 to 15
Indicates the service access point identity at
the network layer.
PDP LLC SAPI Range: 3 to 11 Indicates the service access point identity at
the logical link control layer.
PDP Delay Class - Indicates the delay class as defined by
subscription.
GENEX Probe
14-139
PDP Reliability Class - Indicates the reliability class as defined by
subscription.
PDP Precedence Class - Indicates the precedence class as defined by
subscription.
PDP Peak Throughput - Indicates the peak throughput as defined by
subscription.
PDP Mean
Throughput
- Indicates the mean throughput.
PDP Radio Priority - Indicates the radio priority as defined by
subscription.
PDP Access Point
Name
- Indicates the host name or network address
for each active PDP context.
PDP Address IPv4 or IPv6 Indicates the user address.

GPRS Status
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Status of the GPRS. The following table
provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS status.
Number of TS Used
(DL)
Range: 0 to 8 Indicates the number of timeslots used on
the downlink.
Number of TS Used
(UL)
Range: 0 to 8 Indicates the number of timeslots used on
the uplink.
PBCCH TS Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the timeslots of the packet
broadcast control channel.
RAC Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the Routing Area Code.
GMM State - Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility
Management (GMM) protocol: Idle,
Ready, or Standby.
GRR State - Indicates the state of GPRS Radio Resource
(GRR) protocol: Packet Idle or Packet
Transfer.
TLLI - Indicates the temporary logical link
identity.
TFI (DL) Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the
downlink. Used to identify the temporary
block flow.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
TFI (UL) Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the
uplink. Used to identify the temporary
block flow.
NC - Indicates the network control mode.
NMO - Indicates the network operation mode.
Coding Scheme UL l 1 to 4 corresponds
to CS 1 to CS 4.
l 7 to 15 corresponds
to MCS 1 to MCS
9.
Uplink coding scheme. Refers to the coding
mode with the maximum usage ratio on the
uplink within 500 ms.
Coding Scheme DL l CS 1 to CS 4
l MCS 1 to MCS 9
Downlink coding scheme. Refers to the
coding mode with the maximum usage ratio
on the downlink within 500 ms.
Mean BEP - Mean value of the bit error probability
(BEP)
CV BEP - Coefficient of variation of BEP

GSM C/A
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/A of the GSM. The following table
provides the information about IEs such as the signal strength of the frequency used by the
current MS and the adjacent-frequency signal strength.
The Probe disables the GSM C/A measurement function by default. You can obtain
corresponding IE information only after the C/A measurement function is enabled. For details
about how to enable the C/A measurement function, see 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A
Measurements.
SS Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent
frequencies of the current serving cell.
C/A +1 Range: -110 to +100.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation
formula: Received signal strength at the serving
frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent
frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus
200 kHz.
C/A +2 Range: -110 to +100.
Unit: dB.
frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus
400 kHz.
GENEX Probe
14-141
C/A -1 Range: -110 to +100.
Unit: dB.
frequency that is equal to the serving frequency
minus 200 kHz.
C/A -2 Range: -110 to +100.
Unit: dB.
frequency that is equal to the serving frequency
minus 400 kHz.

GSM C/I
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/I of the GSM. The following table provides
the information about IEs such as the channel ARFCN, received signal strength, and intra-
frequency carrier-to-interference ratio.
ARFCN - Indicates the channel ARFCN.
RxLev Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength.
C/I Unit: dB Indicates the intra-frequency carrier-to-
interference ratio.

Hopping Parameters
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Hopping Parameters of the GSM. The following
table provides the GSM hopping parameters.
Hopping State 0 or 1 Indicates whether to use the frequency
hopping. 0 indicates no and 1 indicates
yes.
Hopping Freq List Range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the ARFCNs of the channels
in the hopping frequency list, for
example, 1, 10, 19, and 28.
Hopping Freq count - Indicates the number of hopping
frequencies in the Hopping Freq
List.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
MAIO Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the mobile allocation index
offset. The mobile allocation index
offset indicates the position from
which the frequency hopping starts in
the hopping frequency list. This IE is
valid only when the frequency
hopping is used.
HSN Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the hopping sequence
number. The hopping sequence
number indicates which hopping
frequency list is being used.

Other Radio Parameters
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Other Radio Parameters of the GSM. The
following table provides the GSM channel and cell reselection parameters.
ATT 0 or 1 Indicates whether to allow IMSI attach. 0
indicates no and 1 indicates yes.
AGBLK Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the number of reserved blocks.
CBA Not allowed or Allowed Indicates the cell bar access.
CBQ Not barred or Barred Indicates the cell bar qualify.
T3212 Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the periodical location update
counter.
Max Retrans 1, 2, 4, or 7 Indicates the maximum number of
retransmissions.
Reestablishment Not qualify or Qualify Indicates whether to limit cell
reconstruction.
Tx Integer 3 to 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,
or 50
Indicates the number of extended
transmission timeslots.
MS_TXPWR_M
AX_CCH
Range: 0 to 31. Unit: dBm. Indicates the maximum level of the
transmit power allowed for an MS to
access the control channel.
RXLEV_ACCE
SS_MIN
Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the minimum strength of the
received signal allowed for an MS to
access the system.
POWER_OFFSE
T_VALID
- Indicates whether POWER_OFFSET is
valid.
GENEX Probe
14-143
POWER_OFFSE
T
Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the power offset, which must be
used with MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH.
l 0: 0 dB
l 1: 2 dB
l 2: 4 dB
l 3: 6 dB
CELL_RESELE
CT_HYSTERES
IS
Range: 0 to 14. Step: 2.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the cell reselection hysteresis.
CELL_RESELE
CT_OFFSET
Range: 0 to 63
corresponding to 0 dB to
126 dB. Step: 2 dB.
Indicates the cell reselection offset.
TEMPORARY_
OFFSET
Range: 0 to 7. The values
from 0 to 6 correspond to 0
dB to 60 dB. The value 7
corresponds to .
Indicates the temporary offset.
PENALTY_TIM
E
Range: 0 to 31,
corresponding to 20s to
620s.
Indicates the penalty time.

Radio Parameters
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Radio Parameters of the GSM. The following
table provides the information about IEs such as the received signal strength and transmit powers
of each cell of the GSM.
Rxlev Full Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength
(Full value).
Rxlev Sub Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength (Sub
value).
Rxlev Idle Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength of
the serving cell in idle status.
RxQual Full Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the received signal quality (Full
value).
RxQual Sub Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the received signal quality (Sub
value).
TA Range: 0 to 63. Unit: bit. Indicates the timing advance. Valid only
in dedicated mode.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Tx Power The value range is:
l GSM 850 MHz: 5 to 39
(Unit: dBm)
l GSM 900 MHz: 5 to 39
(Unit: dBm)
l GSM 1800 MHz: 0 to 36
(Unit: dBm)
l GSM 1900 MHz: 0 to 33
(Unit: dBm)
Indicates the transmit power. Valid only
in dedicated mode.
Power Control
Level
Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the transmit power level ordered
by the base station. Valid only in
dedicated mode.
NCell RxLev 1-6 Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength of a
neighboring cell.
RLT Actual Range: 0 to 64 Indicates the actual radio link timeout.
RLT Max Range: 0 to 64 Indicates the maximum radio link
timeout.
C/I Worst Range: -5 to +35. Unit: dB Indicates the worst carrier-to-interference
ratio.
FER Full Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the frame error rate (Full value).
The formula is as follows: Number of
error frames/Total number of frames x
100%.
FER Sub Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the frame error rate (Sub value).
error frames/Total number of frames x
100%.
BER Full Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the bit error rate (Full value).
error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.
BER Sub Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the bit error rate (Sub value).
error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.
DSC Actual Range: 0 to 45 Indicates the current value of Downlink
Signalling Counter (DSC).
Valid only in idle mode.
MS_DTX - Indicates the discontinuous transmission
of the MS.
GENEX Probe
14-145
CGI - Indicates the Cell Global Identity,
consisting of the Mobile Country Code,
Mobile Network Code, Location Area
Code, and cell ID.
Cell Name - Indicates the cell name.
TCH ARFCN Range: 0 to 1023
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124,
975 to 1023
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885
l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number of Traffic Channel. This
IE is valid only in dedicated mode and
only for channels where no frequency
hopping is used.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124,
975 to 1023
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885
l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number of Broadcast Control
Channel. This IE is valid only in the idle
mode and only for channels where no
frequency hopping is used.
Timeslot Range: 0 to 8 Indicates the number of timeslots.
Cell Priority - Indicates the cell priority.
Mode - Indicates the service type performing by
the MS currently, such as Voice. This IE
is displayed as Idle in idle state.
Channel Type - Indicates the channel type that a speech
coder uses.
Ciphering
Algorithm
- Indicates the ciphering algorithm used for
the CS or PS domain, for example, A5/1,
A5/2, or GEA5/1.
Sub Channel
Number
- Indicates the number of subchannels.
Cell GPRS
Support
YES or NO Indicates whether to support the GPRS.
Cell EGPRS
Support
YES or NO Indicates whether to support the enhanced
general packet radio service (EGPRS).
Speech Codec - Indicates the currently used speech codec:
EFR, HR, FR, or AMR.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Serving and Neighboring Cells
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving and Neighboring Cells of the GSM. The
following table provides the information about IEs such as the ARFCNs of the broadcast control
channel (BCCH), base station identity codes (BSICs), cell names, frequency bands, received
signal strength, parameters of cell selection and reselection, and location area codes of the
serving and neighboring cells.
BAND l GSM-R 850
l P-GSM 900
l E-GSM 900
l DCS 1800
l PCS 1900
Indicates the frequency band of BCCH
carrier.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975
to 1023
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885
l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast
control channel.
Cell Name - Indicates the cell name. Present only if an
engineering parameter file is used.
Cell ID - Indicates the cell identity. Present only if
an engineering parameter file is used.
C1 Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB. Indicates the cell selection criterion. This
IE is valid only in idle mode.
C2 Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB. Indicates the cell reselection criterion.
This IE is valid only in idle mode.
C31 Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB. Indicates the GPRS cell selection
criterion. This IE is valid only in the
packet service.
C32 Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB. Indicates the GPRS cell reselection
criterion. This IE is valid only in the
packet service.
Distance Unit: km Indicates the distance between the MS
and the cell.
LAC Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the Location Area Code of the
serving cell.
GENEX Probe
14-147
Rxlev (Sub
+Idle)
Range: -110 to -47. Unit:
dBm.
(Sub value) or the idle value in idle status
of the serving cell.

Vocoder Usage
This section describes the IEs related to Vocoder Usage in the GSM network. The following
table provides the usage information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the
test terminal.
EFR Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the percentage of the enhanced full rate
(EFR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or
downlink.
FR Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the percentage of the full rate (FR) to all
the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.
HR Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the percentage of the half rate (HR) to all
the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.
FAMR Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the percentage of the full adaptive multi-
rate (FAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or
downlink.
HAMR Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the percentage of the half adaptive multi-
rate (HAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or
downlink.

14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs
This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views.
AMR Codecs
This section describes the IEs related to AMR Codecs in the WCDMA network. The following
table provides the information about the WCDMA AMR uplink and downlink codecs, voice
type, and frame rate.
Bad Frame Indicator BFI not set or BFI set Indicates the bad frame indicator
on the downlink.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Error Flag Normal or Encoder error Indicates the error flag on the
uplink.
Frame Rate l 12.2 kbit/s
l 10.2 kbit/s
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s
Indicates the frame rate on the
uplink or downlink.
Frame Type - Indicates the frame type on the
uplink or downlink.
Time Alignment Flag TAF not set or TAF set Indicates the time alignment flag
on the downlink.
UnStable Frame
Indicator
UFI not set or UFI set Indicates the unstable frame
indicator on the downlink.
Vocoder Data - Indicates the vocoder data on the
uplink or downlink.
Vocoder Mode - Indicates the vocoder mode on the
uplink or downlink, such as
AMR, EFR, FR, or HR.

Cell Search
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Search of the WCDMA. The following table
provides the parameter information about searching cells.
The steps for searching cells are as follows:
1. Synchronize timeslots.
The UE synchronizes timeslots of a cell according to the basic synchronization codes of
the supplemental channel (SCH).
2. Identify the frame alignment and code group.
The UE searches the frame alignment according to the secondary synchronization codes
of the SCH, and then identifies the obtained timeslot synchronization code groups.
3. Identify the scrambling code.
The UE confirms that the basic scrambling code of the cell is found.
GENEX Probe
14-149
Chart of Step One Search - Indicates the first step of searching
cells.
Chart of Step Two Search - Indicates the second step of
searching cells.
Chart of Step Three Search - Indicates the third step of searching
cells.
Step Three P-SC Range: 0 to 511 Indicates the primary scrambling
code.
S-SC Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the secondary scrambling
code.
Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the ratio of the energy per
chip to the total power density of the
received bandwidth.
PN_POS - Indicates the peak position in chipx8
units.

DRX Mode
This describes meanings of the IEs related to DRX Mode of the WCDMA. The following table
provides the parameter information about the discontinuous reception.
IE Name Description
DRX Cycle Num Indicates the number of discontinuous reception
mechanism (DRX) cycles.
Paging indicator bit Indicates the paging indicator bit.

Finger
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the WCDMA. You can check whether
a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.
Finger ID Range: 0 to 11 Indicates the Rake finger identifier.
P-SC Range: 0 to 511 Indicates the primary scrambling code for
each Rake finger.
Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to
the total power density of the received
bandwidth.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Finger Pos - Indicates the PN position offsets of the
finger.

HSDPA Link Statistics
This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Link Statistics of the HSDPA. The
following table provides the information about the HSDPA link statistics.
Scheduled Rate-Delta Unit: kbit/s Indicates the rate delta of scheduling data
at the MAC layer.
Scheduled Rate-Average Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate of scheduling
data at the MAC layer.
Served Rate-Delta Unit: kbit/s Indicates the rate delta of transmission at
the MAC layer, including the rate of
failed transmissions and retransmissions.
Served Rate-Average Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate of transmission
at the MAC layer, including the rate of
MAC Layer Rate-Delta Unit: kbit/s Indicates the rate delta of transmission at
the MAC layer, excluding the rate of
MAC Layer Rate-Average Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate of transmission
at the MAC layer, excluding the rate of
HS-SCCH Success Rate-
Delta
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH
channel (transient value).
HS-SCCH Success Rate-
Average
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH
channel (phase average value).
HS-DSCH SBLER-Delta Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate at
the MAC layer (transient value).
HS-DSCH SBLER-
Average
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate at
the MAC layer (phase average value).
HS-DSCH Res.BLER-
Delta
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the residual block error rate at
the RLC layer (transient value).
HS-DSCH Res.BLER-
Average
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the residual block error rate at
the RLC layer (phase average value).
GENEX Probe
14-151
HS-DSCH Retrans. Rate-
Delta
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the retransmission rate of the
High Speed Downlink Shared Channel
(HS-DSCH) (transient value).
HS-DSCH Retrans. Rate-
Average
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the retransmission rate of the
HS-DSCH channel (phase average
value).
CQI Range: 0 to 30 Indicates the average value of the
Channel Quality Indicator (CQI).
Single Stream CQI
(MIMO)
- Indicates the single stream CQI.
Dual Stream CQI1
(MIMO)
- Indicates the CQI of stream 1 in double
stream transmission mode.
Dual Stream CQI2
(MIMO)
- Indicates the CQI of stream 2 in double
stream transmission mode.
Number of HS-PDSCH
Codes
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the average number of codes
used by the UE.

HSDPA Physical Channel
This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Physical Channel of the HSDPA. The
following table provides the configuration information about the HSDPA physical channel.
HS-DSCH
Configuration
H-RNTI UE ID - Indicates the temporary
ID of the UE.
DL DPCH to HS-
SCCH Timing
Offset
Unit: chip Indicates the timing
offset of the downlink
dedicated physical
channel (DPCH) relative
to the high speed shared
control channel (HS-
SCCH).
HARQ Processes - Indicates the number of
processes of the hybird
automatic repeat request
(HARQ).
HS-SCCH
Configuration
HS-SCCH - Indicates the coding and
validity of the HS-SCCH.
OVSF - Indicates the orthogonal
variable spreading factor.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Uplink HS-DPCCH
Configuration
CQI Feedback
Cycle
Unit: ms Indicates the feedback
cycle of the channel
quality indicator (CQI).
CQI Repetition
Factor
- Indicates the CQI
repetition factor.
Ack/Nack
Repetition Factor
- Indicates the repetition
factor of the
ACKnowledgement
(ACK) or Negative
ACKnowledgement
(NACK).
UL DPCCH to HS-
DPCCH Timing
Offset
Unit: chip Indicates the timing
offset of the high speed
dedicated physical
control channel (HS-
DPCCH) relative to the
uplink dedicated physical
control channel
(DPCCH).
PO-ACK - Indicates the power offset
of the ACK relative to the
downlink DPCCH.
PO-NACK - Indicates the power offset
of the NACK relative to
the downlink DPCCH.
PO-CQI - Indicates the power offset
of the CQI relative to the
downlink DPCCH.
MAC-d Flow
Mapping List
MAC-d Flow ID - Indicates the ID of the
MAC-d flow.
CCTrCH ID - Indicates the ID of the
coded composite
transport channel.
Queue ID List - Indicates the list for
queue ID.
Reordering Queue
Parameters
Queue ID - Indicates the queue ID.
Receive Window
Size
- Indicates the MAC-hs
window size.
Reordering Release
Timer
- Indicates duration of the
MAC-hs reordering
release
GENEX Probe
14-153
MAC-d PDU Sizes - Indicates the size of the
MAC-d PDU.

HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics
This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA.
The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0,
carrier 1, and the two carriers.
Carrier - Indicates the carrier for statistics, which can be
Carrier0, Carrier1, or Total.
TBS Unit: bit Indicates the transport block size. Each frame
transmits only one TB.
QPSK Unit: frame Indicates the number of frames modulated in
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode.
16QAM Unit: frame Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM)
mode.
64QAM Unit: frame Indicates the number of frames modulated in
64QAM mode.
SB- - Indicates the number of frames failing to be
transmitted at the MAC layer.
SB+ - Indicates the number of frames successfully
transmitted at the MAC layer.
Dup.SB+ - Indicates the number of NACK messages to
which the NodeB translates the ACK messages
returned by the UE upon successful decoding.
Other - Indicates the number of exceptional frames, for
example, the frame whose TBS of the current
successful retransmission is different from that of
the latest successful transmission.
SBLER Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate at the
MAC layer, which is calculated through the
following formula: Number of transmission
failures / Total number of transmissions x 100%.
1st SBLER Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate of the first
frame at the MAC layer.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Block- - Indicates the number of frames that fail to be
transmitted at the RLC layer. After several
failures at the MAC layer, the RLC initiates the
retransmission.
Block+ - Indicates the number of frames successfully
transmitted at the RLC layer. The value of Block
+ is the same as the value of SB+.
Res.BLER Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC
layer, which is calculated through the following
formula: Number of frames that fail to be
transmitted at the RLC layer / Total number of
transmissions at the RLC layer x 100%.
1 - Indicates the number of frames successfully
transmitted at the MAC layer during the first
transmission.
transmitted in the second retransmission after the
first transmission fails.
transmitted in the third retransmission after the
first transmission and the second retransmission
fail.
transmitted in the fourth retransmission after the
first three transmissions fail.
transmitted in the fifth retransmission after the
first four transmissions fail.
>=6 - Indicates the number of frames successfully
transmitted in the sixth or later retransmission
after all the previous transmissions fail.

HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics
This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA.
The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0,
carrier 1, and the two carriers.
HS-SCCH Attempts - Indicates the total number of frames.
GENEX Probe
14-155
HS-SCCH Success - Indicates the number of HS-SCCH
frames scheduled to the UE that is in
the communication.
HS-SCCH Success
Rate
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the success ratio of the HS-
SCCH channel.
ACK->NACK/DTX
(Duplicate SB +)
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the ratio of NACK messages
to which the NodeB translates the
ACK messages transmitted by the UE
upon successful decoding.
HS-SCCH Less
Operation Rate
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the rate of the transport
blocks (TBs) that use the HS-SCCH
Less operation mode to total TBs.
1 TB - Indicates the number of single stream
transmissions used in the multiple
input multiple output (MIMO).
2 TBs - Indicates the number of double stream
transmissions used in the MIMO.
Percent 1TB Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the percentage of single
stream transmission used in the
MIMO.
Percent 2TBs Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the percentage of double
stream transmission used in the
MIMO.
Percent Single Stream Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the percentage of data using
single stream transmission.
Percent Dual Stream Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the percentage of data using
double stream transmission.
Single Stream SBLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the schedule block error rate
of single stream transmission, which
is calculated through the following
formula: NACK / (ACK + NACK)
100%.
Dual Stream1 SBLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the schedule block error rate
of stream 1 in double stream
transmission mode, which is
calculated through the following
formula: NACK1 / (ACK1 + NACK1)
100%.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Dual Stream2 SBLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the schedule block error rate
of stream 2 in double stream
transmission mode, which is
calculated through the following
formula: NACK2 / (ACK2 + NACK2)
100%.

HSUPA DL Channel Configuration
This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA DL Channel Configuration of the
HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel
of the HSUPA.
HSUPA DL
All Channel
Configuration
SERV_CELL_
INDEX
- Indicates the serving cell index of
the uplink packet access (UPA)
service.
TTI - Indicates the transmission time
interval.
SG_SEL - Indicates the type of the initial
serving grant (SG).
P_ERNTI - Indicates the temporary identifier of
the primary radio network, which is
allocated for the UE that performs
the EUL service.
S_ERNTI - Indicates the temporary identifier of
the secondary radio network, which
is allocated for the UE that performs
the EUL service.
AGCH_ACTI
ON
- Indicates whether the access grant
channel (AGCH) is activated.
AGCH_VALI
D
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates whether AGCH
information fields are valid.
AGCH_OVSF - Indicates the spreading factor of the
AGCH.
AGCH_STAR
T
- Indicates the start frame number or
subframe number of the AGCH.
AGCH_END - Indicates the end frame number or
subframe number of the AGCH.
GENEX Probe
14-157
AGCH_DPCH
_OFFSET
Range: 0 to 149 Indicates the offset from the first
AGCH transmission time interval
to the DPCH.
STTD_AGCH - Indicates whether the space time
transmit diversity (STTD) is used
on the AGCH.
HSUPA DL
Each Cell
Configuration
in the EUL
Active Set
CELL_IDX Range: 1 to 6 Indicates the EUL cell number.
PSC Range: 0 to 511 Indicates the scrambling code.
SERV_CELL - Indicates whether the current cell is
the serving cell of the EDCH.
RLS_IDX Range: 0 to 5 Indicates the index of the radio link
set.
REF_FINGER Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the reference finger index.
TPC_INDEX Range: 0 to 5 Indicates the index of the hybrid
ARQ indicator channel (HICH).
RGCH_ACTI
ON
- Indicates whether the relative grant
channel (RGCH) is activated.
RGCH_VALI
D
- Indicates whether RGCH
HICH_ACTIO
N
- Indicates whether the HICH is
activated.
HICH_VALID - Indicates whether HICH
HICH_OVSF Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the OVSF code for the
HICH and RGCH.
HICH_START - Indicates the start frame number or
subframe number for the HICH.
HICH_END - Indicates the end frame number or
subframe number for the HICH.
HICH_DPCH_
OFFSET
Range: 0 to 149 Indicates the offset from the HICH
to the DPCH.
TAU_HICH - Indicates the timeslot offset of the
HICH to the P-CCPCH.
HICH_SIGNA
TURE
Range: 0 to 39 Indicates the ID of the Handamard
codes for the HICH.
HICH_STTD - Indicates whether the space time
transmit diversity (STTD) is used
on the HICH.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RGCH_STAR
T
- Indicates the start frame number or
subframe number of the RGCH.
RGCH_END - Indicates the end frame number or
subframe number of the RGCH.
RGCH_DPCH
_OFFSET
Range: 0 to 149 Indicates the offset from the RGCH
to the DPCH.
RGCH_SIGN
ATURE
Range: 0 to 39 Indicates the signature sequence ID
of the RGCH.
DPCH_CHAN
NEL
Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the number of downlink
dedicated physical channel.

HSUPA Link Statistics
This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA Link Statistics of the HSUPA. The
following table provides the information about the HSUPA link statistics.
HSUPA Link
Throughput
Statistics
MAC-e PDU Non-
DTX Rate
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the non-
DTX (non
discontinuous
transmission) rate.
MAC-e PDU Served
Rate
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the served
rate.
MAC-e PDU
Available Rate
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the
available rate.
HSUPA Link
Quality Statistics
RxNon-DTX
Probability
%.
Indicates the non-
DTX probability.
SBLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the schedule
block error rate.
1st SBLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the schedule
block error rate of the
first frame.
Power Limited Rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the limited
rate of power.
SG Limited Rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
rate of serving grant
(SG).
Buffer Limited Rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
rate of buffer.
GENEX Probe
14-159
Happy Rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the HAPPY
rate.
HSUPA Grant
Statistics
Average AG - Indicates the average
value of absolute
grant (AG).
Combined RG Hold
Rate
%.
Indicates the
combined hold rate of
relative grant (RG).
Combined RG Up
Rate
%.
Indicates the
combined up rate of
relative grant.
Combined RG Down
Rate
%.
Indicates the
combined down rate
of relative grant.
Average SG - Indicates the average
value of serving grant.

HSUPA UL Channel Configuration
This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA UL Channel Configuration of the
HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel
of the HSUPA.
HSUPA DL
Channel
Configuration
TTI - Indicates the transmission time
interval.
IR_CC - Indicates the coding scheme.
DPDCH_PRES - Indicates whether the current
R99 dedicated physical data
channel (DPDCH) is valid.
HS_DPCCH_P
RES
- Indicates whether the downlink
HSDPA is valid.
SLOT_FORM
AT
Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the timeslot format of
the DPCCH.
ACTION_TYP
E
- Indicates the ACTION type.
MAX_EUL_S
F
- Indicates the maximum EUL
spreading factor.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
UE_MAX_SF - Indicates the maximum EUL
spreading factor exported by
UE.
START_FRA
ME_NUM
- Indicates the start EUL frame
number or subframe number.
END_FRAME
_NUM
- Indicates the end EUL frame
number or subframe number.
PL_NON_MA
X
Range: 44 to 100 Indicates the maximum
punctuating limit.
MAX_TX_PW
R
Range: -50 to
33. Unit: dBm
Indicates the maximum transmit
power of UE.
IQ_MAP - Indicates the E-DPDCH I/Q
mapping.
SERVING_GR
ANT
- Indicates the service grant.
GRANT_SEL - Indicates the grant selection.
2IDX_STEP_T Range: 0 to 37 Indicates the threshold of the
enhanced transport format
combination indicator (ETFCI).
3IDX_STEP_T Range: 0 to 37 Indicates the ETFCI threshold.
EDPCCH_PO Range: 0 to 8 Indicates the power offset from
E-DPCCH to DPCCH.
HSUPA UL
Channel Each
Reference Power
Offset
TFCI_CONFI
G
1 indicates that
the indicator is
configured, and
0 indicates that
the indicator is
not configured.
Indicates whether an indicator is
configured for the Ref E-TFCI.
REF_TFCI Range: 1 to 127 Indicates the enhanced transport
format combination indicator.
REF_PWR_OF
FSET
Range: 0 to 29 Indicates the power offset.

Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information of the
WCDMA. The following table provides the inter-system (such as GSM) cell information.
GENEX Probe
14-161
BCCH
ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number for
the BCCH.
BAND - Indicates the inter-system frequency band. The following
frequency bands are included:
l GSM 900 MHz
l DCS 1800 MHz
l PCS 1900 MHz
l GSM 850 MHz
RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the received signal strength indicator.

Power Control
This section describes the IEs related to Power Control in the WCDMA network. The following
table lists the information about power control, such as the signal to interference ratio, transmit
power, and receive power.
SIR Range: -20 to 30. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the signal to interference ratio of
the dedicated physical control channel
(DPCCH).
Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the transmit power.
Rx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the receive power.
Rx Carr0 Chain0 Range: -128 to -20. unit:
dBm.
link 0 on carrier 0.
dBm.
dBm.
dBm.
UE Tx TPC/frame - Indicates the power control bit that is sent
from the NodeB to the UE for adjusting the
transmit power on the uplink.
Cell Tx TPC/frame - Indicates the power control bit that is sent
from the UE to the NodeB for adjusting the
transmit power on the downlink.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RACH and PRACH
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RACH and PRACH of the WCDMA. The
following table provides the information about the UE access.
RACH AICH State - Indicates the state of the acquisition
indicator channel (AICH) sent by the
latest access timeslot.
Number of
Preamble
Range: 0 to 64 Indicates the number of transmitted
preambles.
Signature Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the signature for the preamble of
the latest access channel.
Slot No Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the subchannel where the latest
preamble signature is transmitted.
SFN Range: 0 to 4095 Indicates the number of the system frame
where the latest preamble is transmitted.
AICH Timing - Indicates the timeslot of the AICH.
PRAC
H
Max Tx Pwr Range: -50 to 33.
Unit: dBm.
Indicates the allowed maximum transmit
power.
Avail Sig
Mask
- Indicates the 16-bit mask of the available
signal.
Sub Ch Mask - Indicates the 12-bit mask of the available
signal.
SF Min - Indicates the minimum spreading factor
used for each random access channel
(RACH) with the period 10 ms.
SC Num Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the number of scrambling codes.
UL Punct
Lmt
- Indicates the limit for punctuating on the
uplink.
Trch Id Range: 1 to 32 Indicates the ID of the transport channel.
Pwr Offset Unit: dB Indicates the offset of preamble power.
Max Pream
Num
Range: 1 to 64 Indicates the maximum number of
transmitted preambles.

RLC Throughput
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLC Throughput of the WCDMA. The following
table provides the information about the uplink and downlink throughput at the RLC layer of
the WCDMA.
GENEX Probe
14-163
RLC UL
Throughput
RLC PDU
Throughput UL
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink
packet data unit (PDU)
throughput at the RLC
layer.
RLC SDU
Throughput UL
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink
signaling data unit (SDU)
throughput at the RLC
layer.
RLC PDU
Retransmission Rate
UL
Unit: % Indicates the uplink PDU
retransmission rate at the
RLC layer.
RB UL Assigned
Throughput
ChannelIdentity - Indicates the channel
identifier.
Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the throughput.
RLC DL
Throughput
RLC PDU
Throughput DL
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink
PDU throughput at the
RLC layer.
RLC SDU
Throughput DL
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink
SDU throughput at the
RLC layer.
RLC PDU Errors Rate
DL
Unit: % Indicates the downlink
PDU error rate at the RLC
layer.
RB DL Assigned
Throughput
ChannelIdentity - Indicates the channel
identifier.
Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the throughput.

Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells of the
WCDMA. The following table provides the parameters of the active set, monitoring set, or
detection set of a UE.
Freq DL Unit: MHz Indicates the downlink frequency.
P-SC Range: 0 to 511 Indicates the primary scrambling code.
Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the ratio of the combined peak energy per
chip to the total power density of the received
bandwidth.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Peak Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the ratio of the peak energy per chip to
the total power density of the received bandwidth.
RSCP Range: -115 to -25. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the combined received signal code
power.
Peak RSCP Range: -115 to -25. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the peak received signal code power.
PS DL - Indicates the downlink resource block bearer type
of an active set for PS services, such as R99 and
HSDPA.
PS UL - Indicates the uplink resource block bearer type of
an active set for PS services, such as R99 and
HSUPA.
S-SC Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the secondary scrambling code.
Cell ID Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the identifier of the cell configured on the
RNC. Present only if an engineering parameter file
is used.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the UE and the cell.
LAC Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the Location Area Code of the serving
cell.
RNC ID Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the RNC identifier. Present only if an
Carrier - l In non-DC-HSDPA mode, the value of
Carrier is null.
l In DC-HSDPA mode, Carrier displays the
information about the carrier in an active set
cell.

UE State
This describes meanings of the IEs related to UE State of the WCDMA. The following table
provides the state information about the UE.
Cell Barred - Indicates the cell barred indicator.
Cell ID - Indicates the cell identity.
Cell Reserved - Indicates the cell reserved flag.
GENEX Probe
14-165
Cell Reserved for
SoLSA
- Indicates the flag of the cell reserved for
Support of Localized Service Area (SoLSA).
GMM State - Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility
Management (GMM) protocol: Idle, Ready,
or Standby.
GMM Sub State - Indicates the GPRS mobility management
substate.
IMEI - Indicates the international mobile equipment
identity.
IMSI - Indicates the international mobile subscriber
identity.
LAC Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the Location Area Code of the
serving cell.
MCC Range: 000 to 999 Indicates the Mobile Country Code of the
serving cell.
MM State - Indicates the mobility management state.
MM Sub State - Indicates the mobility management substate.
MM Update - Indicates the mobility management update.
MNC Range: 000 to 999 Indicates the Mobile Network Code of the
serving cell. May consist of two or three
digits.
RAC Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the Routing Area Code.
RF Mode - Indicates the radio frequency mode.
RNC ID - Indicates the Radio Network Controller
identity.
RRC State - Indicates the radio resource control state.
Service State - Indicates the service state.
UARFCN DL - Indicates the downlink ARFCN of the
UTRAN terrestrial radio access network.
UARFCN UL - Indicates the uplink ARFCN of the UTRAN
terrestrial radio access network.
UE Camped on a cell - Indicates the flag of the UE camped on a cell.
URA ID - Indicates the identity of the user registration
area (URA)

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
WCDMA BLER
This describes meanings of the IEs related to WCDMA BLER of the WCDMA. The following
table provides the information about IEs such as the transport channel number, block error rate
(BLER), size of the window, and number of received blocks that are checked by cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) in the WinSize.
TrCH - Indicates the transport channel number.
BLER - Indicates the block error rate.
WinSize Unit: frame Indicates the size of the window.
CRC REC - Indicates the number of received blocks that
are checked by CRC in the WinSize.
CRC ERROR - Indicates the number of received error blocks
that are checked by CRC in the WinSize.
RACH BLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the block error rate of the random
access channel.
FACH BLER Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the block error rate of the forward
access channel.

14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs
This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views.
MS State
This describes meanings of the IEs related to MS State of the CDMA. The following table
provides the basic information about the MS.
IE Name Description
ESN Indicates the equipment serial number.
IMSI Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity.
RF Mode Indicates the radio frequency mode.
Channel Indicates the central ARFCN.
Slot Cycle Index Indicates the index of the timeslot cycles.
BS P_REV Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the base
station.
P_REV in use Indicates the protocol revision currently used between the
base and mobile stations.
GENEX Probe
14-167
IE Name Description
Mobile P_REV Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the
CDMA MS.

Combined Ec/Io (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Combined Ec/Io of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides value changes of Combined Ec/Io.
Combined Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the strength of the pilot, computed by
the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total
power spectral density.

FCH/SCH FER (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to FCH/SCH FER of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides frame erasure ratios on the forward FCH, SCH 0, and SCH 1.
F-FCH FER Unit: % Indicates the frame error rate on the forward FCH.
F-SCH0 FER Unit: % Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH
0.
F-SCH1 FER Unit: % Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH
1.

Finger (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 1x. You can check
whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.
PN - Indicates the pilot PN offset of the finger.
Sector - Indicates the sector name corresponding to the pilot of
the finger.
Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip of the
finger to total power spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
Delay Unit: chip Indicates the absolute finger position.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Status - Indicates the finger state. The following states are
included:
l Locked: indicates the finger is locked in the symbol
combiner.
l UnLocked: indicates the finger is unlocked in the
symbol combiner.
SectorName - Indicates the sector name.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving
cell.

Forward Link Info (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Forward Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic channel
and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
IE Name Description
FFCH Indicates the forward fundamental channel.
FSCH0 Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 0.
FSCH1 Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 1.
Full Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the forward traffic
channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.
Half Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the forward traffic
channel. Exists on only the FCH.
Quarter Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the forward
traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.
Eighth Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the forward
Erasure Indicates the statistics for the erasure frames of the forward traffic

Markov Statistics (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Markov Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides information about IEs such as the statistics for the Markov call frames.
GENEX Probe
14-169
IE Name Description
Mode Indicates the current call type of the MS. Involves all
call types supported by the MS.
Total frames Indicates the total number of frames received by the
Markov call. The number is cleared when a new Markov
call starts.
State Indicates the reception state of the MS. The following
states are involved:
l Entering CDMA State: refers to the CDMA
acquisition state.
l Sync Channel State: refers to the synchronization
state.
l Paging Channel State: refers to the paging state.
l Traffic Channel Initialization State: refers to the
traffic initialization state.
l Traffic Channel State: refers to the normal traffic
state.
l Exit State: refers to the exit state.
Bad frames Indicates the number of bad frames during the Markov
call, including the number of the erasure frames and
full-rate frames with error bits. The number is cleared
when a new Markov call starts.
Markov rate Indicates the current Markov call rate. The following
rates are involved:
l Rate Variable: refers to the variable rate.
l Rate 1/8: refers to the one-eighth rate.
l Rate 1/4: refers to the one-quarter rate.
l Rate 1/2: refers to the half rate.
l Full: refers to the full rate.
Error rate Indicates the Markov call error rate. The calculation
formula is Bad frames/Total frames.
Received Frames
Counts
Full Indicates the number of full-rate frames received
actually.
D1/2 Indicates the number of half-rate unavailable frames
received actually.
D1/4 Indicates the number of one-quarter rate unavailable
frames received actually.
D1/8 Indicates the number of one-eighth rate unavailable
frames received actually.
Bsig Indicates the number of signaling frames received
actually.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name Description
Half Indicates the number of half-rate frames received
actually.
Quarter Indicates the number of one-quarter rate frames
received actually.
Eighth Indicates the number of one-eighth rate frames received
actually.
FErrs Indicates the number of full-rate frames that are actually
received with error bits.
Erasures Indicates the number of erasure frames received
actually on the fundamental channel (FCH).
BitErrs Indicates the number of frames that are actually
received with error bits.
Percent Indicates the percentage of error frames (the frames
with error rates or bits except for the signaling) to total
frames.
Expected Full Indicates the expected number of full-rate frames.
Half Indicates the expected number of half-rate frames.
Quarter Indicates the expected number of one-quarter rate
frames.
Eighth Indicates the expected number of one-eighth rate
frames.

Pilot Sets (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Sets of the CDMA2000 1x. The following
table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS on the
CDMA network.
The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN
phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring
pilot set.
Active Set - Indicates the active set.
Candidate Set - Indicates the candidate set.
Neighbor Set - Indicates the neighboring pilot set.
PN Range: 0 to 511 Indicates the PN offset of the pilot.
GENEX Probe
14-171
Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip
to total power spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the MS and the
serving cell.

Power (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table
provides power information about the MS.
Rx Power Range: -120 to -10. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the received signal power.
Tx Power Range: -127 to -36. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the transmit power.
TxAdj Range: -127 to 128.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the power control value, that is, the
adjustment step of the transmit power.

Reverse Link Info (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Reverse Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic channel
and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
IE Name Description
RFCH Indicates the reverse fundamental channel.
RSCH0 Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 0.
RSCH1 Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 1.
Full Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the reverse traffic
Half Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the reverse traffic
channel. Exists on only the FCH.
Quarter Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the reverse
Eighth Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the reverse
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name Description
Erasure Indicates the statistics for the error frames of the reverse traffic

RLP Statistics (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the radio link protocol (RLP)
layer.
IE Name Description
Service ID Indicates the service ID.
Last Reset Time Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset
time (ms).
Retransmitted Frames Not Found Indicates the number of retransmissions that is not
found.
Retransmitted Frames Missing Indicates the number of missing transmitted frames.
Last RTT Measurement Frames Indicates the number of 20 ms frames for the last
round-trip time measurement.
Largest Consecutive Erasures Indicates the largest block of consecutive erasures.
Number of Resets Indicates the number of resets.
Number of NAK Aborts Indicates the number of NAK aborts.
Block of Bytes Used Indicates the method for adding the block of bytes.
RX Queue Idle Frames Indicates the number of received idle frames.
Fill Frames Indicates the number of received fill frames.
Blank Frames Indicates the number of received blank frames.
Null Frames Indicates the number of received null frames.
New Data Frames Indicates the number of received new data frames.
Fundamental
Data Frames
Indicates the number of received 20 ms fundamental
data frames.
Erasures Indicates the number of received erasures at the radio
link layer.
Multiplexer
Erasures
Indicates the number of received erasures at the
multiplexer layer.
Total Bytes Indicates the total number of received bytes.
GENEX Probe
14-173
IE Name Description
TX Queue Retransmitted
Frames
Indicates the number of retransmitted frames.
Idle Frames Indicates the number of transmitted idle frames.
New Data Frames Indicates the number of transmitted new frames.
Fundamental
Data Frames
Indicates the number of transmitted 20 ms
fundamental data frames.
Total Bytes Indicates the total number of transmitted bytes.
TX NAK Counts Single Indicates the number of single NAKs.
Double Indicates the number of double NAKs.
Triple Indicates the number of triple NAKs.

RLP Throughput (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Throughput of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides changes of the throughput received and transmitted at the RLP layer.
1x RLP Rx Throughput
Instantaneous
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous throughput
on the downlink.
1x RLP Tx Throughput
Instantaneous
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous throughput
on the uplink.

Signaling (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Signaling of the CDMA2000 1x. The following
table provides information about the receive and transmit power of the MS.
Rx Power Range: -120 to -10. Unit: dBm. Indicates the received signal power.
Tx Power Range: -127 to -36. Unit: dBm. Indicates the transmit power.
TxAdj Range: -127 to 128. Unit: dB. Indicates the power control value,
that is, the adjustment step of the
transmit power.
F-FCH FER Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the frame error rate of the
forward fundamental channel.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Combined Ec/Io Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Indicates the strength of the pilot,
computed by the ratio of the pilot
energy per chip to total power
spectral density.
F-SCH Rate The rate ranges are 0X-1X,
1X-2X, 2X-4X, 3X-8X, 4X-16X,
5X-18X, and 6X-32X. If the rate
is outside the ranges, N/A is
displayed.
Indicates the assignment rate on the
forward supplemental channel.
R-SCH Rate - Indicates the assignment rate on the
reverse supplemental channel.

Air Link Summary (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Air Link Summary of the CDMA2000 EV-DO.
The following table provides information about IEs of the forward signals on the air interface
on the CDMA2000 EV-DO.
Best Predicted ASP Index Range: 1 to 6 Indicates the sector index of the best
active set pilot (ASP).
Best ASP SINR Range: -15 to 20.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the signal-to-interference-and-
Noise ratio (SINR) of the best ASP.
Best ASP Filtered SINR Range: -15 to 20.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the filtered SINR of the best
ASP.
Data Rate - Current Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous data rate.
Data Rate - Short Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average data rate in a short
period.
Data Rate - Long Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average data rate in a long
period.
PER - Current Unit: % Indicates the instantaneous packet error
rate (PER).
PER - Short Unit: % Indicates the average PER in a short
period.
PER - Long Unit: % Indicates the average PER in a long
period.
ASP[1] Filtered RPC - Indicates the filtered reverse power
control (RPC) of the ASP 1.
ASP[2] Filtered RPC - Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 2.
GENEX Probe
14-175

AT Status (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to AT Status of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The
following table provides the state of the AT, including the parameters of the sector to which the
AT is connected, AT connection state, session connection state, and pilot set.
IE Name Description
Protocol States AT state Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as
follows:
l Inactive
l Acquisition
l Sync
l Idle
l Access
l Connected
Session state Indicates the session connection state. The contained
states are as follows:
l Closed
l AMP setup
l AT-initiated negotiation
l AN-initiated negotiation
l Open
l Closing
ALMP state Indicates the state of the air link management
protocol (ALMP). The contained states are as
follows:
l Inactive
l Initialization
l Idle
l Connected
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name Description
Initialization state Indicates the initialization state. The contained states
are as follows:
l Inactive
l Network determination
l Pilot acquisition
l Sync
Idle state Indicates the idle state. The contained states are as
follows:
l Inactive
l Monitor
l Sleep
l Connection setup
l Suspend
Connected state Indicates the connection state. The contained states
are as follows:
l Inactive
l Open
Route update
state
Indicates the route update state. The contained states
are as follows:
l Inactive
l Idle
l Connection Setup
l Connected
l Synchronize connection setup
Overhead state Indicates the state of overhead message processing.
The contained states are as follows:
l Inactive
l Process All messages
l Sleep
l Frequency Change In Progress
l Access Handoff In Progress
l Wait for Link
Session Attempt Result Indicates the session attempt result. The results are
as follows:
l Received UATIAssignment message
l Did not received UATIAssignment message
RATI Indicates the random access terminal identifier.
GENEX Probe
14-177
IE Name Description
UATI Indicates the unicast access terminal identifier
(UATI). When Result is set to 1, the value of
UATI is null.
Color Code Indicates the color code. When Result is set to 1, the
value of UATI is null.
PN Indicates the PN offset of the pilot. When Result is
set to 1, the value of UATI is null.
SectorName Indicates the name of the current serving sector.
AT Status AT state Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as
follows:
l Inactive
l Acquisition
l Sync
l Idle
l Access
l Connected
Session state Indicates the session connection state. The contained
states are as follows:
l Closed
l AMP setup
l AT-initiated negotiation
l AN-initiated negotiation
l Open
l Closing
Sector ID Indicates the ID of the current serving sector.
UATI024 Code Indicates the latter 24 codes of the UATI.
MAC index Indicates the MAC index.
Channel Indicates the ARFCN.
Band Class Indicates the frequency band.
Subnet mask Indicates the subnet mask of a sector.
Color code Indicates the color code.
Serving Sector
PN
Indicates the PN of the current serving sector.
User count Indicates the number of users.
SectorName Indicates the name of the current serving sector.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Finger (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can check
whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.
State
Information
Search State - Indicates the search state.
MSTR (chip
x8)
Unit: 1/8 chip Indicates the mobile station time
reference (MSTR) offset relative to the
real time control (RTC) timebase.
MSTR Error Unit: 1/8 chip Indicates the MSTR offset relative to
the earliest arriving in-lock and enabled
active set pilot.
MSTR Pilot
PN
- Indicates the pilot PN of the earliest
arriving finger.
Finger
Information
PN - Indicates the PN offset of the pilot of
the finger.
RTC Offset Unit: 1/8 chip Indicates the offset in the RTC buffer
for this pilot.
C/I Unit: dB Indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio.
Locked 0 or 1 Indicates the locked state. 0 refers to the
unlocked state and 1 refers to the locked
state.
Antenna 0 or 1 Indicates the antenna selection, only
valid when diversity is disabled. 0
refers to Antenna 0, and 1 refers to
Antenna 1.
Diversity 0 or 1 Indicates whether the diversity is
enabled for the AT. 0 refers to Disabled,
and 1 refers to Enabled.
Finger Idx The range is 1000
to 1011, referring
to finger 0 to finger
11.
Finger index, which indicates the index
of the demodulator finger.
RPC Cell Idx Range: 1 to 6 Cell index, which indicates the index
assigned to a cell by AT.
ASP Idx Range: 1 to 6 Sector index, which indicates the index
assigned to a sector by AT.
C/I (Ant0) - C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna
0, only valid when diversity is enabled.
GENEX Probe
14-179
C/I (Ant1) - C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna
1, only valid when diversity is enabled.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the MS
and the serving cell.

Pilot Set (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Set of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following
table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS of the
CDMA.
The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN
phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring
pilot set.
Neighbor
Set
Pilot PN - Indicates the pilot PN of the
neighboring pilot set.
Pilot Energy Unit: dB Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the
neighboring pilot set, that is, the ratio
of the energy per chip to total power
spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
Channel
Number
- Indicates the ARFCN of the
neighboring pilot set.
Band Class Unit: MHz Indicates the frequency band.
Window Size - Indicates the search window size of the
neighboring set.
and the neighboring cell.
Active Set Pilot PN - Indicates the pilot PN of the active set.
active set, that is, the ratio of the energy
per chip to total power spectral density
of the received bandwidth.
Mac Index - Indicates the MAC index of the active
set.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Window Center
(x2)
- Indicates the search window center of
the active set.
and the active set cell.
Candidate
Set
Pilot PN - Indicates the pilot PN of the candidate
set.
candidate set, that is, the ratio of the
energy per chip to total power spectral
density of the received bandwidth.
Channel
Number
- Indicates the PN offset of the pilot.
Window Center
(x2)
- Indicates the search window center of
the candidate set.
and the candidate set cell.
General Pilot PN
Increment
- Indicates the PN increment of the pilot.
Searcher State - Indicates the search state of the AT.
Active Set
Channel
- Indicates the ARFCN of the active set.
Active Set
Window
- Indicates the search window size of the
active set.
Remaining Set
Window
- Indicates the search window size of the
remaining set.

Power (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following
table provides power information about test terminals.
GENEX Probe
14-181
Power Amplifier
State
On or Off. Indicates the power amplifier
state.
TX Open Loop Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Indicates the open loop transmit
power.
TX Closed Loop Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Indicates the closed loop
transmit power.
TX Pilot Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Indicates the pilot power.
TX Total Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Indicates the total transmit
power.
RX Antenna 0 Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Indicates the received power of
antenna 0.
RX Antenna 1 Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Indicates the received power of
antenna 1.

Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EV-
DO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic
channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
IE Name Description
Rates Indicates the frame rate.
Good CRC Indicates the number of frames that pass the cyclic
redundancy check (CRC).
Bad CRC Indicates the number of the frames that do not pass
the CRC.
Total Indicates the sum of Good CRC and Bad CRC
of each rate.
Forward Traffic
Channel
Statistics
Frames at 38.4 kbit/s Indicates the statistics for the frames at 38.4 kbit/
s.
s.
Frames at 153.6 kbit/
s
Indicates the statistics for the frames at 153.6 kbit/
s.
Short frames at 307.2
kbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 307.2
kbit/s.
Long frames at 307.2
kbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 307.2
kbit/s.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name Description
kbit/s
kbit/s.
kbit/s
kbit/s.
Frames at 921.6 kbit/
s
Indicates the statistics for the frames at 921.6 kbit/
s.
Mbit/s
Mbit/s.
Mbit/s
Mbit/s.
Frames at 1.843
Mbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the frames at 1.843
Mbit/s.
Frames at 2.457
Mbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the frames at 2.457
Mbit/s.
Total frames Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum
of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all
rates.
Control Channel
Statistics
s.
s.
Total frames Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum
of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all
rates.
TX Queue Mean served
throughput
Indicates the mean throughput.
Packet Error Rate
(PER)
Indicates the total PER, which is calculated based
on the formula: Total CRC Bad Frames/(Total
CRC Bad Frames + Total CRC Good
Frames).

Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EV-
DO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic
channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
GENEX Probe
14-183
IE Name Description
Reverse Rate Indicator Actual RRI Indicates the actual reverse rate
indicator. The following values are
included:
l 0 kbit/s
l 9.6 kbit/s
l 19.2 kbit/s
l 38.4 kbit/s
l 76.8 kbit/s
l 153.6 kbit/s
Reverse Rate Limit Indicates the reverse rate limit. The
following values are included:
l 0 kbit/s
l 9.6 kbit/s
l 19.2 kbit/s
l 38.4 kbit/s
l 76.8 kbit/s
l 153.6 kbit/s
Power Amplifier Limit Indicates the power amplifier limit.
Traffic Statistics 9.6kbit/s Indicates the number of packets
transmitted at 9.6 kbit/s.
19.2kbit/s Indicates the number of packets
153.6kbit/s Indicates the number of data packets

Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about the data source control
(DSC) and data rate control (DRC).
DRC Cover Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the DRC coverage.
DSC Value Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the DSC value.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DRC Rate Range: 0 to 3072. Unit:
kbit/s.
Indicates the DRC rate.
ASP DRC Lock - Indicates the DRC lock for ASP1 to
ASP6.

Rev. A Forward Link User Packet Throughput (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Forward Link User Packet
Throughput of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides the throughput of the
forward link user packet.
SUP Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the throughput of the single service user
packet.

Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides statistical information about the forward or
reverse multi-RLP layer.
Forward Link
Statistics
Flow ID - Indicates the ID of the RLP
flow.
Version - Indicates the version.
Reset time - Indicates the latest reset time,
that is, the last reset time.
Retransmissions
not found
- Indicates the number of
retransmissions that is not
found.
AT NAK bytes
requested
Unit: byte Indicates the number of NAK
bytes requested by the AT for
retransmission.
RX retransmitted
bytes
Unit: byte Indicates the number of
received retransmitted bytes.
RX new data bytes Unit: byte Indicates the number of
received new data bytes.
RX total bytes Unit: byte Indicates the total number of
received data bytes.
GENEX Probe
14-185
NAK timeouts/
aborts
- Indicates the number of NAK
timeouts or aborts.
Resets - Indicates the number of resets.
AT reset request
count
- Indicates the number of resets
requested by the AT.
AN reset ACK
count
- Indicates the number of ACKs
received from the AN.
AN reset request
count
requested by the AN.
Reverse Link
Statistics
Flow ID - Indicates the ID of the RLP
flow.
Reset time - Indicates the latest reset time,
that is, the last reset time.
Retransmissions
not found
- Indicates the number of frames
that are not received in the
retransmission.
AN NAK bytes
requested
Unit: byte Indicates the number of NAK
bytes requested by the AN for
retransmission.
TX retransmitted
bytes
retransmitted bytes.
TX new data bytes Unit: byte Indicates the number of
transmitted new data bytes.
TX total bytes Unit: byte Indicates the total number of
transmitted data bytes.
Resets - Indicates the number of resets.
AT reset request
count
AN reset ACK
count
- Indicates the number of ACKs
received from the AN.
AN reset request
count

Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics
of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides multi-user packet forward statistics.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CRC Count - Indicates the number of transmitted
multi-user traffic channel packets.
Termination Slot Count - Indicates the number of CRCs
transmitted by each timeslot.
Packet Error Rate Unit: % Indicates the PER.
Throughput When Served Unit: kbit/s Indicates the terminal throughput.
Instantaneous Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous throughput.
Instantaneous Throughput
(1s)
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous throughput,
which is calculated according to the
difference of the previous packet.
Sequence (Elapsed Time) - Indicates the sequence number of the
log packet.

Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics of the CDMA2000
EV-DO. You can obtain counters of the reverse link statistics.
HiCap SPn ACKs
n: 0 to 3
- Indicates the number of ACKs of the
high capacity (HiCap), which is received
by the current instance.
HiCap PARQ NAKs - Indicates the number of NAKs of the
HiCap, which is received by the current
instance.
LoLat SPn ACKs
n: 0 to 3
- Indicates the number of ACKs of the low
latency (LoLat), which is received by the
current instance.
LoLat PARQ NAKs - Indicates the number of NAKs of the
LoLat, which is received by the current
instance.
Packets Sent - Indicates the number of transmitted
packets.
Good Packets - Indicates the number of packets
transmitted successfully.
PER Unit: % Indicates the PER.
Total Packet TX Time Unit: ms Indicates the duration for packet
transmission.
GENEX Probe
14-187
Transmitted Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the transmission throughput.
Overall Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the overall throughput.
Total PER Unit: % Indicates the total PER.
Total Instantaneous PER Unit: % Indicates the total instantaneous PER.
Total Transmitted
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the total transmission
throughput.
Total Overall Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the overall throughput.
Total Instantaneous
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the total instantaneous
throughput.
Average Latency Unit: ms Indicates the average latency.
Total Packets Sent - Indicates the total number of transmitted
packets.
Unexpected HARQ NAKs - Indicates the number of HARQ NAKs
received by the same packet of the
current instance.
HARQ-PARQ Mismatch
Rate
Unit: % Indicates the ratio of error packets to
total transmitted packets.

Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. statistical information about the reverse link throughput.
Throughput-Average Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average throughput.
Throughput-Instantaneous Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous throughput.
Throughput-TX Average Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average transmit
throughput.

Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides single-user forward statistics.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name Range/
Unit
Description
DRC Info Forward Traffic
Channel Statistics
- Indicates the forward traffic
channel statistics.
Format - Indicates the DRC information
format. The format is [Rate,
Transmit Slot, Transmit Bit].
Passed - Indicates the number of passed
CRCs.
Failed - Indicates the number of failed
CRCs.
Total - Indicates the total number of
CRCs.
Termination Slot
Count
Info - Indicates the transmit slot.
Avg - Indicates the average value.
1-16 - Indicates the N slot. N ranges from
1 to 16.
Forward Control
Channel Statistics
DRC kbit/s - Indicates the DRC rate.
DRC Format - Indicates the DRC format.
CRC Count Passed - Indicates the number of CRCs
transmitted successfully.
CRC Count Failed - Indicates the number of CRCs
failed to be transmitted.
CRC Count Total - Indicates the total number of
CRCs.
Termination Slot
Count
- Indicates the number of packets
transmitted at each slot.
General Sequence Number
(Elapsed Time)
- Indicates the sequence number of
the log packet.
Traffic Channel Packet Error Rate Unit: % Indicates the PER.
Throughput When
Served
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the terminal throughput.
Instantaneous
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the instantaneous
throughput.
Instantaneous
Throughput (1s)
throughput, which is calculated
according to the deviation of the
previous packet.
GENEX Probe
14-189
IE Name Range/
Unit
Description
Short Control
Channel
Throughput When
Served
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the terminal throughput.
Instantaneous
Throughput
throughput.
Instantaneous
Throughput (1s)
throughput, which is calculated
according to the deviation of the
previous packet.

RLP (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following
table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the RLP layer.
Service ID - Indicates the service ID.
Last Reset Time Unit: ms Indicates the latest reset time, that is,
the last reset time.
Total AN/AT Resets - Indicates the total number of resets
requested by the AN or AT.
AN Resets - Indicates the number of resets
AT Resets - Indicates the number of resets
Received Reset AN ACKs - Indicates the number of ACKs
received by the AN.
RX
Queue
Total AT Bytes Unit: byte Indicates the total number of bytes
received by the AT.
New AT Bytes Unit: byte Indicates the number of new data
bytes received by the AT.
Duplicate AT
Bytes
Unit: byte Indicates the number of duplicate
Retransmitted AT
Bytes
Unit: byte Indicates the number of retransmitted
AT NAK
Requests
Unit: byte Indicates the number of NAK bytes
requested by the AT for
retransmission.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
AT NAK Aborts - Indicates the number of NAK
timeouts or aborts of the AT.
AT NAK Bytes - Indicates the number of NAK bytes
received by the AT.
TX Queue Total AT Bytes Unit: byte Indicates the total number of bytes
transmitted by the AT.
New AT Bytes Unit: byte Indicates the number of new data
bytes transmitted by the AT.
Duplicate AT
Bytes
Unit: byte Indicates the number of duplicate
bytes transmitted by the AT.
Retransmissions
Not Found
Unit: byte Indicates the number of bytes that are
not received in retransmission.
AN NAK
Requests
Unit: byte Indicates the number of NAK bytes
requested by the AN for
retransmission.
AN NAK Bytes - Indicates the number of NAK bytes
transmitted by the AN.

14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs
This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views.
NETEntry/HO Delay
This describes meanings of the IEs related to NETEntry/HO Delay of the WiMAX. The
following table provides the parameters related to the network entry and handover delay of the
test terminal.
NetEntry Delay Time Unit: ms Indicates the delay time of the network
entry.
HO Delay Time Unit: ms Indicates the handover delay time.

Basic Information (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell
identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency.
GENEX Probe
14-191
MS State Base ID - Indicates the ID of the BS.
Preamble Index Range: 0 to 114 Indicates the preamble index.
IDCell - Indicates the cell ID.
Current Frequency Unit: Hz Indicates the current
frequency.
Frame Ratio
(DL:UL)
- Indicates the frame ratio on the
Permutation - Indicates the downlink
permutation zone.
MAC State - Indicates the MAC state.
Max Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the maximum
transmit power.
Present only if an engineering
parameter file is used.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between
the MS and the serving cell.
Network Entry State 0 refers to success,
and 1 refers to
failure.
Indicates the network entry
state of the MS.
Connection No. of Provisioned
Connection
- Indicates the number of the
provisioned connection.
No. of Admitted
Connection
- Indicates the number of the
admitted connection.
Basic CID - Indicates the basic connection
identifier (CID).
Primary CID - Indicates the primary CID.
Second CID - Indicates the secondary CID.
DL Traffic
Connections
downlink traffic connections.
UL Traffic
Connections
- Indicates the number of uplink
traffic connections.
Frame Frame Number - Indicates the frame number.
Logical Frame
Number
- Indicates the logical frame
number.
DL PDU Number - Indicates the number of
downlink PDUs.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
UL PDU Number - Indicates the number of uplink
PDUs.
DL SDU Number - Indicates the number of
downlink SDUs.
UL SDU Number - Indicates the number of uplink
SDUs.
DL Discard Frame
Number
- Indicates the number of frames
discarded on the downlink.
Burst Uplink Burst Data
Zone
- Indicates the uplink
permutation zone.
Downlink Burst
Data Zone
- Indicates the downlink
permutation zone.
Uplink Burst Data
Duration
Unit: slot Indicates the uplink burst data
duration.
Downlink Burst
Data Duration
Unit: slot Indicates the downlink burst
data duration.
Uplink Burst Data
Size
Unit: byte Indicates the size of the uplink
burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data Size
Unit: byte Indicates the size of the
downlink burst data.
Uplink Burst Data
CID
- Indicate the CID
corresponding to the uplink
burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data CID
- Indicate the CID
corresponding to the downlink
burst data.
Uplink Burst Data
UIUC
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the uplink interval
usage code (UIUC) of the burst
data.
Downlink Burst
Data DIUC
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the downlink
interval usage code (DIUC) of
the burst data.
Uplink Burst Data
FEC Scheme
- Indicates the FEC scheme of
the uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data FEC Scheme
- Indicates the FEC scheme of
the downlink burst data.
DL Map FEC
Scheme
- Indicates the MCS of the
downlink MAP.
GENEX Probe
14-193
Uplink Burst Data
FEC Repetition
- Indicates the MCS repetition
of the uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data FEC Repetition
- Indicates the MCS repetition
of the downlink burst data.

Cell Measurement (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Measurement of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides information about the cell measurement.
BSID - Indicates the ID of the BS.
Preamble Range: 0 to 114 Indicates the preamble code.
CINR mean Range: -50 to -30.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the mean CINR.
CellName - Indicates the cell name. Present only if an
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the UE and
the serving cell.
RSSI mean Range: -110 to -10.
Unit: dBm.
Indicates the mean RSSI.

CS_Info (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to CS_Info of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following
table provides information about the convergence sublayer (CS).
No. - Indicates the number.
SFID - Indicates the ID of the service flow.
Direction - Indicates the direction.
CID - Indicates the CID.
SF Type - Indicates the type of the service flow.
CS Type - Indicates the type of the convergence
sublayer.
Service Class Name - Indicates the service type.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Basic SFID - Indicates the ID of the service flow.
Direction - Indicates the direction.
CID - Indicates the CID.
SF Type - Indicates the type of the service flow.
Source Port Low
Value
- Indicates the low value of the source
port.
Source Port high
Value
- Indicates the high value of the source
port.
Destination Port
Low Value
- Indicates the low value of the
destination port.
Destination Port
High Value
- Indicates the high value of the
destination port.
CS Type - Indicates the CS type.
Qos Set Flag
Provisioned
- Indicates whether to use the
provisioned QoS set.
Qos Set Flag
Admitted
- Indicates whether to use the admitted
QoS set.
Qos Set Flag Active - Indicates whether to use the active
QoS set.
Classifier Priority - Indicates the classifier priority.
Service Class Name - Indicates the service name.
PHS PHSI - Indicates the ID of the payload header
suppression.
PHSS Unit: byte Indicates the size of the payload
header suppression.
PHSV - Indicates whether the payload header
suppression is valid.
PHSM - Indicates the mask of the payload
header suppression.
PHSF - Indicates the payload header
suppression field.
Qos Profile Traffic Priority - Indicates the traffic priority.
Maximum Sustained
Traffic Rate
Unit: bit/s Indicates the maximum sustained
traffic rate.
Minimum Reserved
Traffic Rate
Unit: bit/s Indicates the minimum reserved
traffic rate.
GENEX Probe
14-195
Tolerated Jitter Unit: ms Indicates the tolerated jitter.
SDU Size Unit: byte Indicates the SDU size.
Maximum Latency Unit: ms Indicates the maximum latency.
Unsolicited Grant
Interval
Unit: ms Indicates the unsolicited grant
interval.
Unsolicited Polling
Interval
Unit: ms Indicates the unsolicited polling
interval.
IP Protocol - Indicates the protocol at the IP layer.
IP Source Address - Indicates the source IP address.
IP Source Mask
Address
- Indicates the source IP address mask.
IP Destination
Address
- Indicates the destination IP address.
IP Destination Mask
Address
- Indicates the destination address
mask.
Tos Low - Indicates the service type range of IP
packets (lower limit).
Tos high - Indicates the service type range of IP
packets (upper limit).
Tos Mask - Indicates the service type mask of IP
packets.

DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability of the
WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the uplink frames and MS
capabilities.
DL Frame
Prefix
FFT Size - Indicates the number of
subcarriers supported by the BS.
Used Subchannel - Indicates the used subchannel.
FFC Repetition Code - Indicates the number of DL_Map
repetitions.
FEC Coding - Indicates the DL_Map coding
scheme.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
MS Physical
Capability
TTG - Indicates the transmit-to-receive
time interval.
RTG - Indicates the receive-to-transmit
time interval.
Max Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the maximum transmit
power.
FFT Support - Indicates the number of
subcarriers supported by the MS.

Handover and Neighboring Cells (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the
WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the handover and
neighboring cells.
HO Event HO Type - Indicates the handover
type.
HO Latency Time - Indicates the handover
latency.
Serving BSID - Indicates the BS ID of the
serving cell.
CellName - Indicates the cell name.
Present only if an
engineering parameter file
is used.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance
between the UE and the
serving cell.
Recom. BSID - Indicates the ID of the
recommended BS.
HO Statistic The Number of HO Drop - Indicates the number of
handover drops.
The Number of HO Trial - Indicates the number of
handover trials.
Ping Pang Count During
HO
ping pang handovers.
HO Drop Rate - Indicates the handover
drop rate.
GENEX Probe
14-197
Cells List NO. - Indicates the number.
Cell ID - Indicates the cell ID.
Preamble Index Range: 0 to 114 Indicates the preamble
index.
CINR mean Range: -50 to -30.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the mean carrier-
to-interference-and-noise
ratio (CINR).
RSSI mean Range: -110 to -10.
Unit: dBm.
SNR mean Unit: dB Indicates the mean SNR.
CellName - Indicates the cell name.
Present only if an
engineering parameter file
is used.
serving cell.
Freq Unit: Hz Indicates the central
frequency.

MAC Throughput (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to MAC Throughput of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides information about the uplink and downlink throughput.
DL App Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput at the
application layer
UL App Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput at the
application layer
DL Bit Data Rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink bit rate.
UL Bit Data Rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink bit rate.
DL Packet Data Rate Unit: pkt/s Indicates the downlink packet rate.
UL Packet Data Rate Unit: pkt/s Indicates the uplink packet rate.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Modulation and Coding (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_Runcom.
The following table provides information about the current or history MCS.
IE Name Description
Active CID Indicates the CID.
Direction Indicates the direction.
FEC Type Indicates the MCS type.
FEC Type ID Indicates the ID of the MCS type.

Power and PER (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception
quality.
Power RSSI Mean Range: -110 to
-10. Unit: dBm.
RSSI Deviation - Indicates the RSSI deviation.
CINR Mean Range: -50 to
-30. Unit: dB.
CINR Deviation - Indicates the CINR deviation.
Tx Reference
Power
- Indicates the reference transmit power.
Tx Headroom Unit: dB Indicates the headroom between the current
transmit power and the maximum transmit
power that can be used for the UE.
Tx Power BS
Offset
- Indicates the transmit power offset of the
BS.
Power Work
Mode
- Indicates the power work mode.
PER - Indicates the packet error rate.

Ranging (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following
table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging.
GENEX Probe
14-199
Ranging
Method
UL Ranging Code - Indicates the uplink ranging
codes.
UL Ranging Seed - Indicates the random seed of the
uplink ranging.
Ranging Type - Indicates the ranging type. The
following types are included:
l Initial: refers to the initial
ranging.
l Periodic: refers to the
periodic ranging.
l BW Request: refers to the
bandwidth request ranging.
l Handover: refers to the
handover ranging.
Ranging Method - Indicates the ranging method.
UL Initial Ranging
Power
Unit: dBm Indicates the uplink initial
ranging power.
Tx Reference Power - Indicates the reference transmit
power.
Ranging Code Start of Ranging
Codes Group
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the start of a ranging
code group.
Initial Ranging Codes Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the initial ranging
codes.
Periodic Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the periodic ranging
codes.
Bandwidth Requests
Codes
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the bandwidth request
ranging codes.
Handover Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the handover ranging
codes.
Ranging
Backoff
Initial Ranging Codes
2
N
. The range
of N is 0 to 15.
Indicates the backoff window
size of the initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging
Codes
2
N
. The range
of N is 0 to 15.
size of the periodic ranging.
BW Request Ranging
Codes
2
N
. The range
of N is 0 to 15.
size of the bandwidth request
ranging.
Handover Ranging
Codes
2
N
. The range
of N is 0 to 15.
size of the handover ranging.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Ranging
Statistic
Initial Ranging - Indicates the initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging - Indicates the periodic ranging.
BW Request Ranging - Indicates the bandwidth request
ranging.
Handover Ranging - Indicates the handover ranging.

Secondary Connect Profile (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Secondary Connect Profile of the
WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides the information about the secondary CID.
Secondary CID - Indicates the secondary CID.
ARQ Support Not Supported: supports the ARQ.
Supported: not support the ARQ.
Indicates whether to support
the automatic repeat request
(ARQ).
IP Management Mode Unmanaged: disables the IP
management mode. Managed:
enables the IP management mode.
Indicates the IP management
mode.
IP Version The IP versions are IP4 and IPv6. Indicates the supported IP
versions.

Basic Information (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_GCT. The
MS State BSID - Indicates the ID of the BS.
IDCell - Indicates the cell ID.
Frequency Unit: kHz Indicates the central frequency.
Frame Ratio - Indicates the frame ratio on the
MAC State - Indicates the MAC state.
GENEX Probe
14-201
power.
Segment Range: 0 to 2 Indicates the preamble carrier set.
DL PermBase Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the permutation base for
specified downlink.
UL PermBase Range: 0 to 69 Indicates the permutation base for
specified uplink.
Cell Name - Indicates the cell name. Present
only if an engineering parameter
file is used.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the
MS and the serving cell.
FA Index - Indicates the frequency
assignment (FA) index.
FCH FCH Bitmap - Indicates the bitmap information
about the frame control header
(FCH).
DL MapLen - Indicates the length of the
downlink MAP message.
CodingInd - Indicates the FCH coding
scheme.
RptCodingInd - Indicates the index of the FCH
repeat coding.
UsedSubch (Total
6 Group)
- Indicates the number of used
subchannels.
Frame Frame Number - Indicates the number of frames.
UL PDU Number - Indicates the uplink PDU number.
DL PDU Number - Indicates the downlink PDU
number.
Burst Uplink Burst Data
CID
Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the connection
identifier (CID) corresponding to
the uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data CID
Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the CID corresponding
to the downlink burst data.
Uplink Burst Data
UIUC
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the UIUC
corresponding to the uplink burst
data.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Downlink Burst
Data DIUC
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the DIUC
corresponding to the downlink
burst data.
Uplink Burst Data
FEC Scheme
- Indicates the FEC scheme of the
uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data FEC Scheme
- Indicates the FEC scheme of the

BCS (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to BCS of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table
provides information about the parameters related to the background cell search (BCS) test.
Preamble Index - Indicates the preamble index.
CINR mean Unit: dB Indicates the mean CINR.
RSSI mean Unit: dBm Indicates the mean RSSI.

Handover and Neighboring Cells (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the
WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the handover and neighboring
cells.
HO Event HO Type - Indicates the handover type:
l HO Intra FA: refers to
the intra-FA handover.
l HO Inter FA: refers to
the inter-FA handover.
Current Preamble
Index
Range: 0 to 133 Indicates the preamble index
of the current serving cell.
Current Serving
ACOR
- Indicates the ACOR of the
Previous Preamble
Index
Range: 0 to 133 Indicates the preamble index
of the previous cell.
Previous Serving
ACOR
- Indicates the ACOR of the
previous cell.
GENEX Probe
14-203
HO Traffic Latency
Time
Unit: ms Indicates the handover traffic
latency.
HO Latency Time Unit: ms Indicates the handover
latency.
HO Statistic The Number of HO
Drop
handover drops.
The Number of HO
Trial
handover trials.
Ping Pang Count
During HO
- Indicates the number of ping
pang handovers.
HO Drop Rate - Indicates the handover drop
rate.
Cells List Preamble Index Range: 0 to 114 Indicates the preamble index.
CINR mean Range: -50 to
-30. Unit: dB.
RSSI mean Range: -110 to
-10. Unit: dBm.
Freq Unit: kHz Indicates the central
frequency.

Modulation and Coding (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_GCT.
The following table provides information about the current or history modulation coding scheme
(MCS).
CID - Indicates the ID of the CID.
Direction - Indicates the transmit direction.
UIUC/DIUC Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the uplink interval usage
code or downlink interval usage
code.
FEC Type - Indicates the type of the forward
error correction (FEC).
Repetition - Indicates the number of repetitions.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Power and PER (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_GCT. The
following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception
quality.
Power Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the transmit power.
Tx Power Offset
(BS)
Unit: dBm Indicates the transmit power
offset on the BS side.
Tx Power Offset
(SS)
Unit: dBm Indicates the transmit power
offset on the subscriber station.
Min Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the minimum transmit
power in a period.
Max Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the maximum
transmit power in a period.
Noise Interference
(BS)
Unit: dBm Indicates the noise interference
on the BS side.
Noise Interference
(SS)
Unit: dBm Indicates the noise interference
on the subscriber station.
Power Work Mode - Indicates the power work mode.
PER Burst PER Unit: % Indicates the burst PER.
Burst Lost - Indicates the number of lost
burst packets.
Burst - Indicates the number of
received burst packets.
MAP PER Unit: % Indicates the MAP PER.
MAP Lost - Indicates the number of lost
MAP packets.
MAP - Indicates the number of
received MAP packets.
PDU PER Unit: % Indicates the PDU PER.
PDU ERROR - Indicates the number of error
PDU packets.
PDU RX - Indicates the number of
received PDU packets.

GENEX Probe
14-205
Ranging (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_GCT. The following
table provides information about the initial ranging codes, periodic ranging codes, bandwidth
request ranging codes, and handover ranging codes.
IE Name Description
Ranging Backoff Initial Ranging Codes Indicates the backoff window size of the
initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging Codes Indicates the backoff window size of the
periodic ranging.
BW Request Ranging
Codes
Indicates the backoff window size of the
bandwidth request ranging.
Handover Ranging Codes Indicates the backoff window size of the
handover ranging.
Ranging Code Start of Ranging Codes
Group
Indicates the start of a ranging code group.
Initial Ranging Codes Indicates the initial ranging codes.
Periodic Ranging Codes Indicates the periodic ranging codes.
BW Requests Ranging
Codes
Indicates the bandwidth request ranging
codes.
Handover Ranging Codes Indicates the handover ranging codes.

UL and DL (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to UL and DL of the WiMAX_GCT. The following
table provides information about the uplink, downlink, and antenna.
ATN 1 RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the RSSI value.
CINR Unit: dB Indicates the CINR value.
AGC - Indicates the value of the automatic gain
control (AGC).
ATN 2 RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the RSSI value.
AGC - Indicates the AGC value.
DL Frequency
Offset
Unit: Hz Indicates the downlink frequency
offset.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Min FO Unit: Hz Indicates the minimum downlink
frequency offset.
Max FO Unit: Hz Indicates the maximum downlink
frequency offset.
Sync Lost - Indicates the synchronization lost.
UL Tx Timing
Offset
Unit: m Indicates the transmit timing offset.
BR ranging
tries
- Indicates the number of bandwidth
request ranging tries.
BRH Tries - Indicates the number of BRH tries.

Max200
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Max200 of the WiMAX Max. The following table
provides the basic information about the current UE.
CINR Mean Range: -50 to -30.
Unit: dB.
BSID - Indicates the base ID.
CINR Deviation Unit: dB Indicates the CINR deviation.
Cell ID - Indicates the cell ID.
RSSI Range: -110 to -10.
Unit: dBm.
Indicates the RSSI value.
Frequency - Indicates the central frequency.
UL Data Rate Unit: bit/s Indicates the uplink data rate.
DL Data Rate Unit: bit/s Indicates the downlink data rate.
WiMAX State - Indicates the state of the WiMAX.
MAC Address - Indicates the MAC address.
PER Unit: % Indicates the packet error rate.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the UE and
the serving cell.

GENEX Probe
14-207
Basic Information (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Sequans. The
IE Name Range/
Unit
Description
MS State BSID - Indicates the ID of the BS.
Bandwidth Unit: MHz Indicates the bandwidth.
Distance Unit: m Indicates the distance between the MS and the
serving cell.
FFT Size - Indicates the number of subcarriers.
MAC
Address
- Indicates the MAC address.
MAC Version - Indicates the MAC version.
PHY Type - Indicates the multiple access type:
l SC, that is single carrier.
l SCA, that is selective call acceptance.
l OFDM, that is orthogonal frequency division
multiplex.
l OFDMA., that is orthogonal frequency
division multiple access.
Preamble
Index
Range: 0 to
114
Indicates the preamble index.
SS State - Indicates the signal strength (SS) state of the MS.
Connect
ion
Basic CID - Indicates the basic CID.
Frame
Number
- Indicates the frame number.
Primary CID - Indicates the primary CID.
Second CID - Indicates the secondary CID.
UL Permbase Range: 0 to
69
Indicates the uplink permutation base, which
determines the combination mode of uplink
subchannels.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Burst Profiles (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Burst Profiles of the WiMAX_Sequans. The
following table provides burst information about the uplink and downlink frames such as interval
usage code (IUC), and FEC.
IE Name Description
DL Qty Indicates the number of burst profiles on the downlink.
FEC Code Indicates the FEC scheme of the burst data on the downlink or
uplink.
IUC Code Indicates the interval usage code on the downlink or uplink.
UL Qty Indicates the number of burst profiles on the uplink.

Downlink Channel Descriptor (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Downlink Channel Descriptor of the
WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the
downlink channel descriptor (DCD) signaling.
DCD Info Configuration
Count
- Indicates the number of DCDs.
BS EIRP
Unit: dBm Indicates the effective isotropic
radiated power (EIRP) of the BS.
MaxRSS For
InitRanging
Unit: dBm Indicates the maximum EIRP
received by the initial ranging on the
BS side.
Frequency Unit: kHz Indicates the center frequency.
MAC Version - Indicates the MAC version.
HysteresisMargin - Indicates the handover hysteresis.
TimeToTrigger
Duration
- Indicates the statistics duration.
BS Restart Count
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the number of BS restart
attempts.
DLBurstProfiles
Qty
- Indicates the number of downlink
burst profiles.
DCD PHY
Specific
PHY Type - Indicates the multiple access type.
Channel Number
- Indicates the channel number. This
IE is displayed only when the
channel is assigned manually.
GENEX Probe
14-209
Channel Switch
Frame Number
- Indicates the channel switch frame
number.
TTG (PS)
- Indicates the transmit-to-receive
time interval.
RTG (PS)
- Indicates the receive-to-transmit
time interval.
HARQ ACK Delay
UL
Unit: frame Indicates the acknowledgement
delay of the HARQ on the uplink.
Perm Type For
Broadcast In
HARQ
- Indicates the permutation zone used
by the HARQ.
Max
Retransmission
- Indicates the maximum number of
HARQ retransmissions on the
downlink.
Def RSSI And
CINR Aver
Parameter
- Indicates the default RSSI and CINR.
DL AMC Allocated
Band Bitmap
- Indicates the bitmap of the downlink
AMC assignment.
H-Add Threshold
- Indicates the threshold for adding
neighboring cells.
H-Delete
Threshold
- Indicates the threshold for deleting
neighboring cells.
ASR Slot Len And
Switching Period
- Indicates the slot length and
switching period of the anchor switch
reporting (ASR).
HO Type Support
- Indicates the supported handover
type.
DL BP For Multi
FEC Types
- Indicates the FEC type of the
Paging Group Qty
- Indicates the number of paging
groups.
Neighbor BS
Trigger Qty
- Indicates the target threshold of the
neighboring cell quality.
HO Aver Params
- Indicates the average value of the
handover.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Cell Name
- Indicates the cell name. Present only
if an engineering parameter file is
used.
Distance
Unit: m Indicates the distance between the
UE and the serving cell.
Paging Interval Len Unit: frame Indicates the paging interval time.

Frame Configuration Definition (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Frame Configuration Definition of the
WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the frame structure.
FCD Configuration
Count
frame configuration
definitions (FCDs).
Channel Started TURE or FALSE Indicates the start channel.
Channel Gain Ratio - Indicates the ratio of the
cyclic prefix to the available
frame duration.
Frame Duration - Indicates the frame duration.
PHY Type - Indicates the multiple access
type.
FFT Size - Indicates the number of
subcarriers.
SubChannel
Bitmap
- Indicates the subchannel
structure bitmap.

MCS and Zone Info (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to MCS and Zone Info of the WiMAX Sequans.
The following table provides information about the current or historical modulation coding
scheme.
IE Name Description
DL FEC Type Indicates the downlink forward error correction (FEC) type.
GENEX Probe
14-211
IE Name Description
UL FEC Type Indicates the uplink FEC type.
DL Repetition Indicates the number of repetitions on the downlink.
UL Repetition Indicates the number of repetitions on the uplink.
Current Zone Indicates the current zone where the terminal transmits data. The
values are as follows:
l pusc with all: indicates that all the channels can be used for
data transmission.
l pusc with 1/3: indicates that 1/3 of all the channels can be
used for data transmission.
MIMO Type Indicates the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) used by the
terminal. The values are as follows:
l MIMO A: indicates that the data stream is divided into
multiple data streams. Within the same duration, the data
transmitted by multiple antennas is the same.
l MIMO B: indicates that the high-speed data stream is
divided into multiple data streams based on the number of
antennas, and then data streams are modulated separately and
transmitted through the corresponding antennas to improve
the channel capacity directly.

Neighbor BS List (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Neighbor BS List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The
following table provides information about the neighboring cells such as the ID of the BS,
preamble index, SINR value, and signal strength.
BS
Information
Neighbor BS Qty - Indicates the number of
neighboring cells.
Current Serving
BSID
- Indicates the BS ID of the
Current Serving
PreambleIdx
- Indicates the preamble index
of the current serving cell.
Current Serving
Frequency
Unit: kHz Indicates the central
frequency of the current
serving cell.
BS List BSID - Indicates the ID of the BS.
PreambleIdx - Indicates the preamble index.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Frequency Unit: kHz Indicates the central
frequency.
RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the RSSI value.
Present only if an engineering
serving cell.
HO Statistics Min HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms Indicates the minimum
handover latency.
Max HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms Indicates the maximum
handover latency.
Mean HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms Indicates the mean handover
latency.
Last HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms Indicates the last handover
latency.

Power and PER (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Sequans. The
following table provides information about the power and signal of the UE.
MeanRSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the mean RSSI.
StdDevRSSI Unit: dB Indicates the RSSI standard
deviation.
MeanCINR Unit: dB Indicates the mean CINR.
StdDevCINR Unit: dB Indicates the CINR standard
deviation.
MeanCINRReuse1 Unit: dB Indicates the mean CINR of the
serving cell when all subchannels
are used.
StdDevCINRReuse1 Unit: dB Indicates the CINR standard
deviation of the serving cell when
all subchannels are used.
GENEX Probe
14-213
MeanCINRReuse3 Unit: dB Indicates the mean CINR of the
serving cell when one-third
subchannels are used.
StdDevCINRReuse3 Unit: dB Indicates the CINR standard
deviation of the serving cell when
one-third subchannels are used.
BS EIRP Unit: dBm Indicates the dffective isotropic
radiated power of the BS.
Up PowerOffset Adjust Step Unit: dB Indicates the power control
adjustment step on the uplink.
Down PowerOffset Adjust
Step
Unit: dB Indicates the power control
adjustment step on the downlink.
Min PowerOffset
Adjustment
Unit: dB Indicates the minimum power
control adjustment value.
Max PowerOffset
Adjustment
Unit: dB Indicates the maximum power
control adjustment value.
Current Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the current transmit
power.
power of the UE.
PER Unit: % Indicates the packet error rate.
Frequency Offset Unit: Hz Indicates the downlink frequency
offset.
Power Mode The power control mode
includes open loop and
closed loop.
Indicates the power control mode.

Ranging (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ranging of the WiMAX Sequans. The
following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging.
Ranging Backoff
Initial Ranging
2
N
. The range of
N is 0 to 15.
size of the initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging
2
N
. The range of
N is 0 to 15.
size of the periodic ranging.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
BW Request
Ranging
2
N
. The range of
N is 0 to 15.
size of the bandwidth request
ranging.
Handover Ranging
2
N
. The range of
N is 0 to 15.
size of the handover ranging.
Ranging Code
and Other
RangingCode
Group Start
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the start number of
the ranging codes.
Initial Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the initial ranging
codes.
Periodic Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the periodic ranging
codes.
Bandwidth
Request Codes
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the bandwidth
request ranging codes.
Handover Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the handover ranging
codes.
MaxRSS For
InitRanging
Unit: dBm Indicates the maximum
effective isotropic radiated
power (EIRP) of the initial
ranging.
InitRanging
Interval
Unit: frame Indicates the assignment
interval of the initial ranging.

SF List (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to SF List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following
table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the server flower (SF).
ARQ
The value is Disabled or Enabled. Indicates whether to support
the ARQ.
Authenticate
Algorithm
- Indicates the authentication
algorithm.
Baisc CID
- Indicates the basic
connection identifier.
CID
- Indicates the connection
identifier.
Delivery Service
- Indicates the delivery
service.
GENEX Probe
14-215
Direction The value is Uplink or Downlink. Indicates the direction.
Encrypt Algorithm
- Indicates the encrypt
algorithm.
HARQ
The value is Disabled or Enabled. Indicates whether to support
the HARQ.
Max Traffic Rate
Unit: bit/s Indicates the maximum
traffic rate.
Maximum Latency
Unit: ms Indicates the maximum
latency.
Min Traffic Rate
Unit: bit/s Indicates the minimum
traffic rate.
SAID
- Indicates the ID of the safety
set.
Scheduling Service
Type
- Indicates the scheduling
service type.
Service Class Name - Indicates the service class.
SF Qty
server flowers.
SF State
- Indicates the SF state:
l Provisioned
l Admitted
l Active
SF Type
- Indicates the SF type:
l Basic SF
l Primary SF
l Secondary SF
l Data SF
l Multicast SF
SFID
- Indicates the ID of the server
flower.
ToleRated Jitter Unit: ms Indicates the tolerated jitter.
Traffic Priority - Indicates the traffic priority.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Uplink Channel Descriptor (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Uplink Channel Descriptor of the
WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the uplink
channel descriptor (UCD) signaling.
UCD Info Configuration Count - Indicates the number of
UCDs.
Initial Ranging Backoff
Start
- Indicates the start backoff
window size of the initial
ranging.
Initial Ranging Backoff
End
- Indicates the end backoff
window size of the initial
ranging.
BW Request Backoff
Start
- Indicates the start backoff
window size of the bandwidth
request ranging.
BW Request Backoff
End
- Indicates the end backoff
window size of the bandwidth
request ranging.
Reservation Timeout - Indicates the interval for
originating the rangings of the
same type.
Frequency Unit: kHz Indicates the central
frequency.
ULBrustProfile Qty - Indicates the number of
uplink burst profiles.
UCD PHY
Specific
PHY Type
- Indicates the multiple access
type.
Initial Ranging Codes
- Indicates the initial ranging
codes.
Periodic Ranging Codes
- Indicates the periodic ranging
codes.
Bandwidth Request
Codes
- Indicates the bandwidth
request ranging codes.
Periodic Ranging
Backoff Start
- Indicates the start of the
periodic ranging backoff
codes.
Periodic Ranging
Backoff End
- Indicates the end of the
periodic ranging backoff
codes.
GENEX Probe
14-217
RangingCode Group
Start
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the start of a ranging
code group.
Permutation Base
- Indicates the uplink
permutation zone.
Ul Alloc Subch Bitmap
- Indicates the bitmap of all the
uplink subcarriers.
Optional Ul Alloc
Subch Bitmap
- Indicates the bitmap of
optional uplink subcarriers.
Band AMC Alloc
Threshold
Unit: dB Indicates the threshold for
allocating the band AMC.
Band AMC Release
Threshold
releasing the band AMC.
Band AMC Allo Timer
Unit: frame Indicates the allocation
duration of the band AMC.
Band AMC Release
Timer
Unit: frame Indicates the release duration
of the band AMC.
Band Status ReportMax
Period
Unit: frame Indicates the maximum
period for refreshing the band
CINR.
Band AMC Retry Timer
Unit: frame Indicates the assignment and
retry duration of the band
AMC.
Safety Ch Allo
Threshold
assigning the channel.
Safety Ch Release
Threshold
releasing the channel.
Safety Ch Allo Timer
Unit: frame Indicates the duration of the
channel assignment.
Safety Ch Release
Timer
Unit: frame Indicates the duration of the
channel release.
Bin Status ReportMax
Period
Unit: frame Indicates the maximum
period for refreshing the bin
CINR.
Safety Ch Retry Timer
Unit: frame Indicates the re-assignment
duration.
HARQ ACK Delay DL
Unit: frame Indicates the HARQ
acknowledgement delay.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CQICH Band AMC
Trans Delay
- Indicates the AMC
transmission delay of the
channel quality information
channel (CQICH).
Max Retransmission In
UL-HARQ
- Indicates the maximum
number of HARQ
retransmissions.
Normalized C/N
Overrides
- Indicates the normalized
carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N)
overrides.
CQICH Field Size
Range: 0-7 Indicates the CQICH field
size.
Handover Ranging
Backoff Start
Range: 0-15 Indicates the size of the start
backoff window where the
UE performs the ranging
during the handover.
Handover Ranging
Backoff End
Range: 0-15 Indicates the size of the end
backoff window where the
UE performs the ranging
Normalized C/N
Overrides2
- Indicates the normalized C/N
overrides 2.
Band AMC Entry
Average CINR
Unit: dB Indicates the average CINE
required for the band AMC
entry.
UpperBound AAS
Preamble
Unit: dB Indicates the preamble upper
bound step of the adaptive
antenna system (AAS).
LowerBound AAS
Preamble
Unit: dB Indicates the preamble lower
bound step of the AAS.
Allow AAS Beam
Select Messages
The value is No or
Yes.
Indicates whether to send the
AAS Beam Select message.
Use CQICH Indication
Flag
- Indicates whether to use the
CQICH.
Up PowerOffset Adjust
Step
Unit: dB Indicates the upper
adjustment step of the uplink
power.
Down PowerOffset
Adjust Step
Unit: dB Indicates the lower
adjustment step of the uplink
power.
GENEX Probe
14-219
Min PowerOffset
Adjustment
Unit: dB Indicates the adjustment step
of the minimum power.
Max PowerOffset
Adjustment
Unit: dB Indicates the adjustment step
of the maximum power.
Handover Ranging
Codes
- Indicates the handover
ranging codes.
InitRanging Interval
- Indicates the interval for
transmitting the initial
ranging.
Tx Power Report bitmap
- Indicates the report on the
transmit power.
Tx Power Report
Threshold
The value ranges
from 0 to 14, and
the unit is dB.
Indicates the threshold for
transmitting the report on the
transmit power.
Tx Power Report
Interval
transmitting the report on the
transmit power.
Tx Power Report a
(p_avg)
- Indicates the p_avg value.
Tx Power Report
Threshold-CQICH
The value ranges
from 0 to 14, and
the unit is dB.
assigning the CQICH.
Tx Power Report
Interval-CQICH
assigning CQICH.
Tx Power Report a
(p_avg)-CQICH
- Indicates the p_avg value
after the CQICH is assigned.
Normalized C/N
Channel Sounding
- Indicates the normalized C/N
during the channel sounding.
Up BurstProfile For
MultiFECTypes
- Indicates the burst profile on
the uplink.

Basic Information (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Beceem.
The following table provides the information about the status information of the current terminal.
Bandwidth Range: 5 MHz, 7 MHz, 8.75
MHz, and 10 MHz. Unit: MHz.
Indicates the bandwidth.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
BSID - Indicates the ID of the BS. It is
displayed only if an engineering
Cell Name - Indicates the name of a cell. It is
CINR Deviation Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Indicates the standard deviation of the
carrier-to-interference-and-noise
ratio (CINR).
CINR Diversity
Ant
Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Indicates the CINR of the diversity
antenna.
CINR Mean Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Indicates the mean CINR.
CINR Primary Ant Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Indicates the CINR of the primary
antenna.
terminal and the serving cell.
DL Bit Data Rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink bit rate.
DL PermBase Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the permutation base for the
specified downlink subchannel.
Frame Ratio - Indicates the frame ratio on the uplink
and downlink.
Frequency Offset Unit: kHz Indicates the frequency offset on the
downlink.
MAC Address - Indicates the MAC address.
Network Entry
State
- Indicates the network entry state,
including wait for sync, phy sync
achieved, wait for RNG RSP, wait
for SBC RSP, wait for REGRSP,
wait for DSA, and network entry
complete.
Number of SFIDs - Indicates the number of service flows.
Power Mode - Indicates the power mode, including
close loop, openloop passive
retention, open loop passive, and
open loop active.
Ranging Code Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the ranging code.
GENEX Probe
14-221
Ranging Seed - Indicates the ranging seed.
RSSI Deviation Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Indicates the standard deviation of the
received signal strength indicator
(RSSI).
RSSI Diversity
Ant
Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Indicates the RSSI of the diversity
antenna.
RSSI Mean Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Indicates the mean RSSI.
RSSI Primary Ant Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Indicates the RSSI of the primary
antenna.
Support ARQ Range: Disable (does not
support the ARQ), or Enable
(support the ARQ)
Indicates whether to support the
automatic repeat request (ARQ).
Tx Headroom Unit: dBm Indicates the difference between the
current transmission power and the
maximum transmission power
available for the UE.
Tx Power Unit: dBm Indicates the transmission power.
UL Bit Data Rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink bit rate.
UL PermBase Range: 0 to 69 Indicates the permutation base for the
specified uplink subchannel.

CS Information (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to CS Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The
following table provides the information about the convergence sublayer.
IP Associated PHSI Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the associated payload
header suppression index (PHSI). It
is the mirror of the PHSI.
Destination MAC
Address
- Indicates the destination MAC
address.
Destination Port Range - Indicates the destination port range.
IP Destination Address - Indicates the destination IP address.
IP Source Address - Indicates the source IP address.
Protocol - Indicates the IP layer protocol.
Source MAC Address - Indicates the source MAC address.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Source Port Range - Indicates the source port range.
Tos-High - Indicates the lower limit of the IP
packet service type.
Tos-Low - Indicates the upper limit of the IP
packet service type.
Tos-Mask - Indicates the mask of the IP packet
service type.
PHS Classifier Rule Priority - Indicates the priority of data packet
classifier rules.
Classifier rules map data packets to
transmission connections.
Packet Classification
Rule Index
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the packet classification
rule index. It provides references for
the formulation of PHS rules.
PHSF - Indicates the payload header
suppression field (PHSF), which is a
set of bytes. It specifies the header
part to be suppressed in the packet
data unit (PDU) message.
PHSI - Indicates the ID of the payload
header suppression, which is a 8-bit
mask. It specifies the bytes that are
suppressed and those are not
suppressed in the PHSF.
PHSM - Indicates the mask of the payload
header suppression. It specifies the
bytes to be suppressed in the PHSF.
PHSS Range: 1 to 255.
Unit: byte
Indicates the size of the payload
header suppression. The value is
equal to the number of bytes in the
PHSF or the number of valid bits in
the PHSM.
PHSV - Indicates whether the payload
header suppression is valid. It
determines whether to perform
suppression verification before
suppressing the payload header.
SF List
Inform
ation
CID Range: 0 to
65535
Indicates the connection ID. It can
map service flows to the
transmission connections on the
MAC layer.
GENEX Probe
14-223
Direction - Indicates the direction of the service
flow.
The service flow may be used in the
uplink or downlink direction, and
each PDU message correlates with
an independent service flow.
SF Scheduling Type - Indicates the scheduling type of the
service flow, including the BE,
nrtPS, rtPS, ErtPS, and UGS.
SF state - Indicates the state of the service
flow, including Provisioned Set,
Admitted Set, and Active Set.
SFID - Indicates the ID of the service flow.
TID Range: 0 to
65535
Indicates the transaction ID.

HARQ and FER Information (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to HARQ and FER Information of the WiMAX
Beceem. The following table provides the information about the hybrid automatic retransmission
request (HARQ) and frame error rate.
FER Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the frame error rate.
PER Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the packet error rate.
SDU Reject - Indicates the number of the rejected
signaling data unit (SDU) packets.
PDU Reject - Indicates the number of the rejected
packet data unit (PDU) packets.
PDU CRC Error - Indicates the number of PDU packets
with cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
errors.
PDU HCS Error - Indicates the number of PDU packets
with header check sequence (HCS)
errors.
DL MAP CRC Error - Indicates the number of downlink Map
packets with CRC errors.
DL MAP HCS Error - Indicates the number of downlink Map
packets with HCS errors.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
SDU Number - Indicates the number of the transmitted
or received SDU packets
PDU Number - Indicates the number of the transmitted
or received PDU packets
Control Packet
Number
- Indicates the number of the transmitted
or received control packets
UL BURST HARQ
ASK DELAY
Range: Sync, one frame
offset, two frames offset,
and three frames offset
Indicates the acknowledgement delay of
the burst HARQ on the uplink.
DL BURST HARQ
ACK DELAY
Range: Sync, one frame
offset, two frames offset,
and three frames offset
Indicates the acknowledgement delay of
the burst HARQ on the downlink.

Ranging (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX Beceem. The
following table provides the information about the uplink channel descriptor (UCD) message.
Initial ranging code Start Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the start number of the initial
ranging code.
Periodic ranging code
Start
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the start number of the
periodic ranging code.
Handover ranging code
Start
handover ranging code.
Bandwidth ranging code
Start
bandwidth request ranging code.
Initial ranging code End Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the end value of the initial
ranging code.
Periodic ranging code
End
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the end value of the periodic
ranging code.
Handover ranging code
End
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the end value of the handover
ranging code.
Bandwidth ranging code
End
Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the end value of the bandwidth
request ranging code.

GENEX Probe
14-225
Physical Information (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Physical Information of the WiMAX Beceem.
The following table provides the information about the physical channel coding.
IE Name Range/
Unit
Description
DL MAP DL Map FEC Scheme - Indicates the modulation coding
scheme (MCS) of the downlink MAP.
The downlink MAP is used to identify
the usage of downlink burst intervals
in the physical layer in burst mode.
Frame Number - Indicates the frame number.
Local Frame Number - Indicates the number of the current
frame, namely the frame on which the
downlink Map message is received.
PHY state - Indicates the physical layer state,
including SYNC_ACHIEVED,
SYNC_TRYING_TO_SYNC, and
SYNC_INVALID.
DL Burst DCD Change Count - Indicates the number of downlink
channel descriptor (DCD) message
changes.
Downlink Burst Data
CID
- Indicates the connection ID of the
Downlink Burst Data
DIUC
- Indicates the downlink interval usage
code (DIUC) of the burst data.
Downlink Burst Data
Duration
Unit: slot Indicates the downlink burst data
duration.
Downlink Burst Data
FEC Repetition
- Indicates the MCS repetition of the
Downlink Burst Data
FEC Scheme
- Indicates the MCS of the downlink
burst data.
Downlink Burst Data
Size
Unit: byte Indicates the downlink burst data size.
Downlink Burst Data
Zone
- Indicates the uplink permutation zone.
UL Burst UCD Change Count - Indicates the number of uplink channel
descriptor (UCD) message changes.
Uplink Burst Data CID - Indicates the connection ID of the
uplink burst data.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name Range/
Unit
Description
Uplink Burst Data
Duration
Unit: slot Indicates the uplink burst data
duration.
Uplink Burst Data FEC
Repetition
- Indicates the MCS repetition of the
uplink burst data.
Uplink Burst Data FEC
Scheme
- Indicates the MCS of the uplink burst
data.
Uplink Burst Data Size Unit: byte Indicates the uplink burst data size.
Uplink Burst Data UIUC - Indicates the uplink interval usage
code (UIUC) of the burst data.
Uplink Burst Data Zone - Indicates the downlink permutation
zone.

Handover and Neighboring Cells (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the
WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about terminal handover and
neighboring cells.
BSID - Indicates the ID of the BS. It is
CellName - Indicates the name of a cell. It is
CINR Mean Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Indicates the mean CINR.
terminal and the neighboring cell.
HO Type - Indicates the handover type.
Last HO Latency Time Unit: ms Indicates the delay of the last
handover.
Ping Pang Count During
HO
- Indicates the number of ping pang
handovers.
GENEX Probe
14-227
RSSI Mean Range: -110 to -10. Unit:
dBm.
The Number of HO - Indicates the number of successful
handovers.
The Number of HO Drop - Indicates the number of handover
drops.
The Number of HO
Ranging Failure
- Indicates the number of ranging
handover failures.
The Number of HO Trial - Indicates the number of handover
trials.

14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs
This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views.
BandWidth
This section describes the IEs related to the Bandwidth of the LTE network. You can obtain
the information about the uplink bandwidth by referring to the following descriptions.
UL RB Num Range: 0 to 100 Indicates the number of uplink resource
blocks.
UL RB Start Range: 0 to 99 Indicates the start uplink resource block.

BLER
This section describes the IEs related to the BLER of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the block error rate (BLER) by referring to the following descriptions.
Initial Error TB
Count
- Indicates the statistics of transport blocks
(TBs) with initial transmission errors on
codeword 0 or 1.
Initial Total TB
Count
- Indicates the statistics of TBs initially
transmitted on codeword 0 or 1.
Residual Error TB
Count
- Indicates the statistics of TBs with
retransmission errors on codeword 0 or 1.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Residual Total TB
Count
- Indicates the statistics of TBs
retransmitted on codeword 0 or 1.
Code0 Initial
BLER
Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 0.
Code1 Initial
BLER
Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 1.
Code0 Residual
BLER
Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Indicates the residual BLER on codeword
0.
Code1 Residual
BLER
Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Indicates the residual BLER on codeword
1.
PDSCH BLER Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Indicates the BLER on the physical
downlink shared channel (PDSCH).

Buffer Status Report
This section describes the IEs related to the Buffer Status Report of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the buffer status report (BSR) by referring to the following
descriptions.
Long BSR0 Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the status reports of long buffer 0.
Short BSR Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the status reports of short buffer.

Camp Cell Information
This section describes the IEs related to the Camp Cell Information of the LTE network. You
can obtain the information about the camp cell by referring to the following descriptions.
CP Length Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates
the normal CP length. 1
indicates the extended CP
length.
Indicates the cyclic prefix length.
C-RNTI - Indicates the cell radio network
temporary identifier.
GENEX Probe
14-229
Dl BandWidth Range: 0 to 5
l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz.
l 1 indicates 3 MHz.
Indicates the downlink bandwidth.
DL Frequency - Indicates the downlink central
frequency.
EARFCN - Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio
frequency channel number.
eNBTxAntennas-
Number
1, 2, or 4 Indicates the eNodeB transmit
antenna number.
NeighbourAntennas-
Number
1, 2, or 4 Indicate the neighbor antenna number.
PCI Range: 0 to 503 Indicates the physical cell identity.
P-RNTI - Indicates the paging radio network
RA-RNTI - Indicates the random access radio
network temporary identifier.
SI-RNTI - Indicates the system information radio
SpecialSubFramePat-
terns
- Indicates the ratio of special sub
frames such as DwPTS, GP, and
UpPTS, available only for TDD.
SPS C-RNTI - Indicates the semi-persistent
scheduling cell radio network
SubFrameAssign-
mentType
- Indicates the ratio of sub frames on the
uplink and downlink, available only
for TDD.
SyncFlag Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates
the synchronization. 1
indicates the
asynchronization.
Indicates the synchronous flag.
TAC Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the tracking area code.
TMP C-RNTI - Indicates the temporary cell radio
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
TPC-PUCCH-RNTI - Indicates the cell radio network
temporary identifier for power control
on Physical Uplink Control Channel
(PUCCH).
TPC-PUSCH-RNTI - Indicates the cell radio network
temporary identifier for power control
on PUCCH Physical Uplink Shared
Channel (PUSCH).
Transmission Mode Range: 1 to 9 Indicates the transmission mode.
UERxAntennasNum-
ber
1, 2, or 4 Indicates the UE received antenna
number.
UETxAntennasNum-
ber
1 or 2 Indicates the UE transmit antenna
number.
UL BandWidth Range: 0 to 5
Indicates the uplink bandwidth.
UL Freqency - Indicates the uplink central frequency.
Work Mode Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates
the FDD mode. 1 indicates
the TDD mode.
Indicates the work mode.

Cell Reselection Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Reselection Parameters of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the cell reselection parameters by referring to the following
descriptions.
RESEL_C
OMM
NCellReselection-
High
number of cell reselections for
UEs to enter the high-mobility
state.
NCellReselection-
Medium
Range: 1 to 16 Indicates the minimum
number of cell reselections for
UEs to enter the medium-
mobility state.
GENEX Probe
14-231
PCompensation Unit: dB Indicates the difference
between the maximum
allowed transmit power of the
UE and the maximum actual
transmit power of the UE, that
is, max(PeMax - PuMax, 0).
PeMax Unit: dBm Indicates the maximum
transmit power of a UE during
data transmission on the
downlink.
PuMax Unit: dBm Indicates the maximum RF
output power of the UE.
QHyst Range: 0 to 8 Indicates the hysteresis value
for ranking criteria.
Qrxlevmeas Unit: dBm Indicates the hysteresis value
for ranking criteria.
QRxLevMinOffse
t
Range: 1 to 8 Indicates the offset to the
signalled Qrxlevmin taken into
account in the Srxlev
evaluation as a result of a
periodic search for a higher
priority PLMN while camped
normally in a VPLMN.
RxLevMin Range: -70 to -22.
Unit: dBm.
required received signal level
in a cell.
SfHigh Range: 0 to 3
0 indicates 0.25.
1 indicates 0.5.
2 indicates 0.7.
3 indicates 1.
Indicates the scaling factor for
Qhyst in high service flow for
high-mobility state.
SfMedium Range: 0 to 3
0 indicates 0.25.
1 indicates 0.5.
2 indicates 0.7.
3 indicates 1.
Indicates the scaling factor for
Qhyst in medium service flow
for medium-mobility state.
TEvaluation Value: 30, 60, 120,
180, or 240. Unit: s
Indicates the duration for
evaluating the allowed number
of cell reselections.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
THystNormal Value: 30, 60, 120,
180, or 240
Indicates the additional time
period before the UE can enter
the normal-mobility state.
SERVING_
FREQ_INF
O
CellReselectPrior-
ity
- Indicates the cell reselection
information that is common for
intra-frequency cells.
SNonIntraSearch Range: 0 to 56. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the threshold (in dB)
for E-UTRAN inter-frequency
and inter-RAT measurements.
ThreshServingLo
w
Range: 0 to 56 Indicates the threshold for
serving frequency that is used
in reselection evaluation
towards lower priority E-
UTRAN frequency or RAT.
INTRA_FR
EQ_CELL_
RESELEC
T
PMax - Indicates the value that is
applicable for the intra-
frequency neighboring E-
UTRA cells.
QRxLevMin Range: -70 to -22.
Unit: dBm.
required RxLevel in a cell.
SfHigh - Indicates the scaling factor for
Qhyst in sf-High for high-
mobility state.
SfMedium - Indicates the scaling factor for
Qhyst in sf-medium for
medium-mobility state.
SIntraSearch Range: 0 to 31. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the threshold (in dB)
for intra-frequency
measurements.
TReselectEutra Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the cell reselection
timer value TreselectionRAT
for E-UTRAN. This parameter
can be set for each E-UTRAN
frequency.
INTER_FR
EQ_CARR
IER_FREQ
CellReselection-
Priority
- Indicates the cell reselection
priority.
DlCarrierFreq Unit: dBm Indicates the minimum
required Rx level in a cell.
InterFrequency-
Number
- Indicates the inter frequency
number.
GENEX Probe
14-233
NeighborCellCon-
fig
- Indicates the neighbor cell
configuration table.
PCI Range: 0 to 503 Indicates the neighbor cell ID.
PMax Unit: dBm Indicates the value applicable
for the neighboring E-UTRAN
cells on a carrier frequency.
QOffsetCell Range: 0 to 30 Indicates the frequency offset
for E-UTRAN frequencies
with the same priority.
QOffsetFreq - Indicates the frequency offset
for E-UTRAN frequencies
with the same priority.
RxLevMin Range: -70 to -22.
Unit: dBm.
required RxLevel in a cell.
SfHigh - Indicates the scaling factor for
Qhyst in sf-high for high-
mobility state.
SfMedium - Indicates the scaling factor for
Qhyst in sf-Medium for
medium-mobility state.
ThreshXHigh - Indicates the threshold used by
the UE when reselecting
towards the higher priority
frequency X than current
serving frequency.
ThreshXLow - Indicates the threshold used in
reselection towards frequency
X priority from a higher
priority frequency.
TReselectEutra Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the cell reselection
timer value for E-UTRAN.
This parameter can be set for
each E-UTRAN frequency.

Cell Scan
This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Scan of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the LTE cell searching test by referring to the following descriptions.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DlBandWidth Unit: M Indicates the downlink bandwidth, such as 5
M, 10 M, and 20 M.
Frequency - Indicates the frequency involved in the cell
searching test.
Iot Unit: dB Indicates the Iot value.
RSRP Range: -132 to -40. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the reference signal received power.
RSRQ Range: -20 to 0. Unit: dB. Indicates the reference signal received
quality.
RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the received signal strength
indicator.
SCHRP Unit: dBm Indicates the SCH_RP value.

Cell Search
This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Search of the LTE network. You can obtain
the information reported by the test terminal during the cell searching.
CP Type Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the cyclic prefix type.
GroupID Range: 0 to 167 Indicates the group ID.
Physical Sector Range: 0 to 2 Indicates the physical sector
index.
RxAntNumber Range: 0 to 3
l 0 indicates 1R.
l 1 indicates 2R.
l 2 indicates 3R.
l 3 indicates 4R.
Indicates the received antenna
number.
SyncPosition Range: 0 to 11520 Indicates the symbol
synchronization position.
System Bandwidth Range: 0 to 5
Indicates the system bandwidth.
GENEX Probe
14-235
Time Position Range: 0 to (11520 x 16) Indicates the time position.

Constellation Painting
This section describes the IEs related to the Constellation Painting of the LTE network. You
can obtain the statistical information by referring to the following descriptions when the QPSK,
16QAM, or 64QAM is used as the modulation method.
QPSK Unit: frame Indicates the number of frames modulated in
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode.
16QAM Unit: frame Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM)
mode.
64QAM Unit: frame Indicates the number of frames modulated in
64QAM mode.

CQI
This section describes the IEs related to the CQI of the LTE network. You can obtain the
configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI) by referring to the following
descriptions.
DL SubBand
Schedule Number
- Indicates the scheduling times of downlink
subband.
Rank1 - Indicates the CQI of Rank 1.
Rank2 Code0 - Indicates the CQI of Rank 2 on codeword
0.
1.
0.
1.
0.
1.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Sub0~24 Range: 0 to 1000 Indicates the scheduling times of subband.
Sub Band CQI Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the CQI of each subband.
Wide Band CQI Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the CQI of each wideband.

CQI Configuration Information
This section describes the IEs related to the CQI Configuration Information of the LTE
network. You can obtain the configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI)
by referring to the following descriptions.
AckMcsOffsetIndex Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the MCS offset index of the
acknowledgment (ACK).
AperiodCqiReport-
Mode
Range: 0 to 4 Indicates the aperiodic CQI report mode of
the PUSCH.
BandwidthPartNumber Range: 0 to 4 Indicates the number of bandwidth parts.
CQIMcsOffsetIndex Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the MCS offset index of the CQI.
MultiRi Range: 0 to 32 Indicates the multi-RIs.
NOffsetRi Range: -160 to 0 Indicates the rank indicator (RI) offset.
ParaH Range: 1 to 17 Indicates the parameter H.
ParaK Range: 0 to 4 Indicates the parameter K.
PeriodCqiReportMode Range: 5 to 8 Indicates the periodic CQI report mode of
the PUSCH.
CQIPeriodicity Range: 1 to 160 Indicates the CQI periodicity.
PmiMode Range: 0 to 2 Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index
(PMI) mode.
PucchFeedBackType Range: 1 to 2 Indicates the CQI feedback type of the
PUCCH.
Rank1CQISpecial Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the special CQI of rank 1.
Rank2Code0CQISpe-
cial
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the special CQI on codeword 0 of
rank 2.
Rand2Code1CQISpe-
cial
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the special CQI on codeword 1 of
rank 2.
RiBitNumber Range: 0 to 2 Indicates the number of RI bits.
RiMcsOffsetIndex Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the MCS offset index of RI.
GENEX Probe
14-237
SubFrameOffset Range: 0 to 159 Indicates the CQI subframe offset.
Transmit Mode Range: 0 to 8 Indicates the transmission mode.

DRX Information
This section describes the IEs related to the DRX Information of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the DRX by referring to the following descriptions.
AnrEnable Range: 0 to 1 Indicates whether the DRX is enabled for
the ANR.
ContentionTimer Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the instantaneous state of the
contention timer.
DrxCfgInd Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the DRX configuration
indicator.
DrxCycleType Range: 1 to 3
l 1 indicates the
short period of
DRX.
l 2 indicates the long
period of DRX.
l 3 indicates the
invalid period of
DRX.
Indicates the DRX cycle type.
DrxInactivityTimer Range: 0 to 2,560.
Unit: ms
Indicates the value of the DRX inactivity
timer.
DrxRetxTimer Range: 1 to 33. Unit:
ms
Indicates the value of the DRX
retransmission timer.
DrxRetxTimer1 Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the instantaneous state of the
DRX retransmission timer that
corresponds to HARQ channel 1.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DrxShortCycleTimer Range: 1 to 16. Unit:
ms
Indicates the value of the DRX short cycle
timer.
DrxStartedFlag Range: 0 to 1 Indicates whether the DRX is enabled.
DrxStartOffset Range: 0 to 2,599.
Unit: ms
Indicates the offset when the DRX cycle
is started.
DrxStateBitmap
Range: 0 to 2
32
Indicates the DRX state timer.
DrxSubState Range: 0 to 4 Indicates the DRX sub-state.
InactivityTimer Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the instantaneous state of
inactivity timer.
LongDrxCycle Range: 10 to 2,560.
Unit: ms
Indicates the long cycle of the DRX.
LTEType Range: 1 to 3
l 1 indicates FDD.
l 2 indicates TDD.
l 3 indicates the
invalid LTE mode.
Indicates the LTE type.
OndurationTimer Range: 1 to 200. Unit:
ms
Indicates the value of the continuous
monitoring timer.
OndurationTimerState Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the instantaneous state of the
continuous monitoring timer.
ShortDrxCycleFlg Range: 0 to 640 Indicates whether the short cycle of the
DRX is valid.
ShortDrxCycle Range: 2 to 640. Unit:
ms
Indicates the short cycle of the DRX.

GENEX Probe
14-239
EPS Bearer Information
This section describes the IEs related to the EPS Bearer Information of the LTE network. You
can obtain the information about the Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer by referring to the
following descriptions.
Bearer Context
Type
- Indicates the bearer context type.
CID Number Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the context ID.
DLGuaranteedMax
Rate
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for
downlink.
DLMaxRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum bit rate for downlink.
EPSB ID - Indicates the evolved packet system bearer ID.
EPSB Number Range: 1 to 11 Indicates the number of evolved packet system
bearer.
Link EPSB ID - Indicates the evolved packet system link bearer
ID.
QCI - Indicates the QoS class identifier.
ULGuaranteedMax
Rate
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for
uplink.
ULMaxRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum bit rate for uplink.

HARQ
This section describes the IEs related to the HARQ of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) by referring to the following
descriptions.
ReTx Index - l First Transfer: indicates the number of
initial transmission successes (during a
statistic period).
l Nth RxTx: indicates the number of Nth
retransmission successes (during a
statistic period).
MAX ReTx
Count
Range: 0 to 9 Indicates the maximum number of HARQ
retransmissions.
Repetition repetition or non-repetition Indicates the HARQ transmission mode.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Period - Indicates the HARQ retransmission period.
This IE is displayed only when Repetition
is set to repetition.
UL IBLER Range: 0 to 100; unit: % Indicates the uplink initial block error rate
(BLER).
UL RBLER Range: 0 to 100; unit: % Indicates the uplink residual BLER.
UL SBLER Range: 0 to 100; unit: % Indicates the uplink scheduling BLER.
UL HARQ
ACK
- Indicates the number of times that the UL
HARQ ACK messages are transmitted. The
following statistics are displayed
separately: number of times that the UL
HARQ ACK messages are successfully
transmitted for the first time within a
statistical period and the number of times
that the UL HARQ ACK messages are
successfully retransmitted from the first
time to the ninth time within a statistical
period.
UL HARQ
NACK
- Indicates the number of times that the UL
HARQ NACK messages are transmitted.
The following statistics are displayed
separately: number of times that the UL
HARQ NACK messages are successfully
transmitted for the first time within a
statistical period and the number of times
that the UL HARQ NACK messages are
period.
Code0 DL
HARQ ACK
- Indicates the number of times that the DL
HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on
codeword 0. The following statistics are
displayed separately: number of times that
the DL HARQ ACK messages are
successfully transmitted for the first time
within a statistical period and the number of
times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are
period.
GENEX Probe
14-241
Code0 DL
HARQ NACK
HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on
the DL HARQ NACK messages are
times that the DL HARQ NACK messages
are successfully retransmitted from the first
period.
Code1 DL
HARQ ACK
HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on
the DL HARQ ACK messages are
times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are
period.
Code1 DL
HARQ NACK
HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on
the DL HARQ NACK messages are
times that the DL HARQ NACK messages
are successfully retransmitted from the first
period.

HO Interrupt Delay
This section describes the IEs related to the HO Interrupt Delay. You can obtain the information
about the interruption delay due to the UE handover by referring to the following descriptions.
MacHoDlInteruptTime
Unit: s Indicates the downlink interruption delay due
to the MAC handover.
MacHoUlInteruptTime
Unit: s Indicates the uplink interruption delay due to
the MAC handover.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
MacRcvFpgaSyncTime
Unit: s Indicates the start time stamp of the baseband
response random access.
MacRcvHOReqTime
Unit: s Indicates the start time stamp of the MAC
random access at layer 3.
MacRcvRarTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the random access
response (RAR) access message received by
the MAC.
MacRx1stAckTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first ACK
message that is received after the handover.
MacRx1stCrcRight-
Time
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that
the CRC is performed correctly and is received
by the target cell after the handover.
MacRx1stDrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane
data packet that the CRC is performed
correctly and is received by the target cell after
the handover.
MacRx1stPktTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that
is received after the handover.
MacRx1stSrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling
plane data packet that the CRC is performed
correctly and is received by the target cell after
the handover.
MacRx1stUlgrantTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first uplink
authorized message that is received after the
handover.
MacRxLastAckTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the last ACK
message that is received before the handover.
MacRxLastCrcRight-
Time
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that
the CRC is performed correctly and is received
by the source cell before the handover.
MacRxLastDrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the last user plane
correctly and is received by the source cell
before the handover.
MacRxLastPktTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that
is received before the handover.
MacRxLastSrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the last signaling
correctly and is received by the source cell
before the handover.
GENEX Probe
14-243
MacRxLastUlgrant-
Time
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the last uplink
authorized message that is received by the
MAC before the handover.
MacSend1stPreamble-
Time
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first preamble
sent by the MAC.
MacSendLastPream-
bleTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the last preamble
sent by the MAC.
MacSendMsg3Time
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the MAC handover
completion, that is, the time stamp when the
RRC Request message of Message 3 is sent.
MacSendPreamble-
Num
-
Indicates the number of preambles that are sent
during the random access.
MacTx1stDrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane
correctly and is sent after the handover.
MacTx1stSrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling
correctly and is sent after the handover.
MacTxLastDrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the user plane data
packet that is sent before the handover.
MacTxLastSrbTime
Unit: s Indicates the time stamp of the signaling plane
data packet that is sent before the handover.
OriginalCellRlcRx-
LastPktRb
-
Indicates the ID of the resource block of the
last data packet that is received by the RLC of
the source cell.
OriginalCellRlcRx-
LastPktSi
-
Indicates the size of the last data packet that is
received by the RLC of the source cell.
OriginalCellRlcRx-
LastPktTi
Unit: s Indicates the time of the last data packet that
is received by the RLC of the source cell.
PdcpHoDlDtContTime
Unit: s Indicates the contention time of the PDCP
downlink data transmission.
PdcpHoDlDtDelay-
Time
Unit: s Indicates the delay in the PDCP downlink data
transmission.
PdcpHoDlDtStopTime
Unit: s Indicates the stop time of the PDCP downlink
data transmission.
PdcpHoUlDtContTime
Unit: s Indicates the contention time of the PDCP
uplink data transmission.
PdcpHoUlDtDelay-
Time
Unit: s Indicates the delay in the PDCP uplink data
transmission.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PdcpHoUlDtStopTime
Unit: s Indicates the stop time of the PDCP uplink
data transmission.
PdcpRxPktNum
-
Indicates the sequence number of the first
packet that is sent to the PDCP.
PdcpRxPktSize
-
Indicates the size of the first packet sent to the
PDCP.
PdcpRxPktTime
Unit: s Indicates the time that the first packet is sent
to the PDCP.
RlcDLHoCmpTime
Unit: s Indicates the time that the RLC downlink
handover is complete.
RlcHoDlInteruptTime Unit: s Indicates the RLC downlink interruption time.
RlcHoUlInteruptTime Unit: s Indicates the RLC uplink interruption time.
RlcRxPduSn
-
Indicates the sequence number of the first
packet that is received by the RLC.
RlcRxPduTime
Unit: s Indicates the time that the first PDU that is
received by the RLC.
RlcRxPktSize
-
Indicates the size of the first packet that is
received by the RLC.
RlcRxRbid
-
first packet that is received by the RLC.
RlcUlFirstRlcPktRbId
-
first data packet that is sent on the uplink of
the RLC after the handover.
RlcUlFirstRlcPktTime
Unit: s Indicates the time that the first data packet is
sent on the uplink of the RLC after the
handover.
RlcUlLastRlcPktRbId
-
last data packet that is sent on the uplink of the
RLC before the handover.
RlcUlLastRlcPktTime
Unit: s Indicates the time that the last data packet is
sent on the uplink of the RLC before the
handover.
RlcULRxHoIndTime
Unit: s Indicates the time that the handover command
is received on the uplink of the RLC.

IPerf Data
This section describes the IEs related to the IPerf Data. You can obtain the information about
the data reported by the test terminal during the Iperf test.
GENEX Probe
14-245
In the case of the Iperf test, C mode refers to that the Probe sends data to the core network (CN)
through the client. S mode refers to that the Probe receives data from the CN through the server.
C/S mode refers to that the Probe sends data to and receives data from the CN at the same time.
Bandwidth Unit: Mbit/s Indicates the bandwidth.
Begin Time - Indicates the start time of data transmission.
End Time - Indicates the end time of data transmission.
ID - Indicates the data transmission ID, which is used to
identify a data transmission service.
Jitter - Indicates the jitter.
Lost Datagrams - Indicates the number of lost data packets.
Lost Ratio Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the ratio of lost packets, that is, the ratio of
lost data packets to the total data packets.
Server UDP - Indicates the downlink user datagram protocol (UDP)
data transmission in S mode.
TCP or Client
UDP
- Indicates the uplink and downlink TCP data
transmission in C/S mode or the uplink UDP data
transmission in C mode.
Total
Datagrams
- Indicates the total number of transmitted data packets.
Transmit Bytes - Indicates the number of transmitted bytes.

Least Mean Square Painting
This section describes the IEs related to the Least Mean Square Painting of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the least mean square painting by referring to the following
descriptions.
IE Name Description
LS Painting Indicates the least mean square painting.

Logical Channel Statistics
This section describes the IEs related to the Logical Channel Statistics of the LTE network.
You can obtain the logical channel statistics by referring to the following descriptions.
Logical Channel ID Range: 0 to 32 Indicates the logical channel ID.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RLC Mode The value 0 indicates
the AM mode; the
value 1 indicates the
UM mode; the value
2 indicates the TM
mode.
Indicates the radio link control (RLC)
mode.
EPSB ID Range: 0 to 15. Indicates the carrier address.
Logical Channel PRI Range: 1 to 16 Indicates the logical channel priority.
Logical Channel Group
ID
Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the logical channel ID.
Logical Channel Group
PRI
Indicates the logical channel group
priority.
Logical Channel PBR 0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
or 256
Indicates the prioritized bit rate (PBR) of
a logical channel.
BuckSizeDuration 50, 100, 150, 300,
500, or 1000
Indicates the buck size duration.
DLRLCReceivePdu-
Length
- Indicates the total bytes of packet data
units (PDUs) that a UE receives on the
downlink at the RLC layer.
DLRLCRepeatPdu-
Length
- Indicates the total bytes of duplicate PDUs
that a UE receives on the downlink at the
RLC layer, including the bytes of PDUs
whose sequence number (SN) is smaller
than VR(R).
DLRabmReceiveSdu-
Length
- Indicates the total bytes of data that a UE
receives on the downlink at the application
layer.
DLPDCPReceiveSdu-
Length
- Indicates the total bytes of signaling data
units (SDUs) that a UE receives on the
downlink at the PDCP layer.
DLRLCDropRate Unit: % Indicates the packet loss rate of SDUs that
a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC
layer.
DLRLCReceiveCon-
trolPduNumber
- Indicates the number of status report PDUs
that a UE receives on the downlink at the
RLC layer.
DLRLCReceiveCon-
trolPduLength
- Indicates the total bytes of status report
PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink
at the RLC layer.
GENEX Probe
14-247
DlControlPduNumber - Indicates the number of intervals between
receptions of status reports on the
downlink by a UE.
DLRLCRxControlPdu-
TimeSpace
- Indicates the interval between receptions
of status reports on the downlink by a UE.
ULRLCTxControlPdu-
Number
- Indicates the number of status report PDUs
that a UE triggers on the uplink.
ULRLCTxControlPdu-
Length
- Indicates the total bytes of status report
PDUs that a UE triggers on the uplink.
ULPDCPDropSduByS-
duTimer
- Indicates the data volume of discarded
packets based on the SDU timer that a UE
receives on the uplink at the PDCP layer.
ULRLCTxNewPdu-
Length
- Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE
transmits on the uplink at the RLC layer
for the first time.
ULRLCReTxPdu-
Length
- Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE
retransmits on the uplink at the RLC layer.
ULRLCWindowUseR-
ate
- Indicates the usage of the transmit window
where a UE transmits data on the uplink at
the RLC layer.
UlControlPduNumber - Indicates the number of intervals between
sendings of status reports on the uplink by
a UE.
ULRLCTxControlPdu-
TimeSpace
- Indicates the interval between sendings of
status reports on the uplink by a UE.

MAC Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the MAC Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the MAC parameters related to the PDSCH and PUSCH by referring
to the following descriptions.
ActiveDemultFail-
Number
- Indicates the number of service data units
received on the downlink at the MAC layer that
fail to be demultiplexed when PDSCHs are in
activated state.
ActiveDemultySuc-
cessNumber
- Indicates the number of service data units
received on the downlink at the MAC layer that
are demultiplexed successfully when PDSCHs
are in activated state.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ActivePDSCHCrcCor-
rectNumber
- Indicates the number of times that the correct
cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed
on the service data units received on the downlink
at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated
state.
ActivePDSCHCrcEr-
rorNumber
- Indicates the number of times that the incorrect
cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed
on the service data units received on the downlink
at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated
state.
AntennaPortNumber - Indicates the number of antenna ports at the MAC
layer.
DLSystemRBNumber - Indicates the number of system resource blocks
that use the downlink bandwidth at the MAC
layer.
ParseDCI0Success-
Number
Range: 0 to
1000
Indicates the number of DCI0s that are
successfully parsed by the uplink at the MAC
layer.
PDSCHCrcCorrect-
Number
- Indicates the number of times that the correct
CRCs are performed on the data packets received
on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of
the states of PDSCHs.
PDSCHCrcErrorNum-
ber
- Indicates the number of times that the incorrect
CRCs are performed on the data packets received
on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of
the states of PDSCHs.
PDSCHTotalData-
Number
- Indicates the total number of data packets
received on the downlink PDSCHs at the MAC
layer.
PUSCHDynamicNum-
ber
Range: 0 to
1000
Indicates the number of data packets that are
dynamically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs.
PUSCHSemiStatic-
Number
Range: 0 to
1000
semi-statically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs.
ReceiveDCI0Number Range: 0 to
1000
Indicates the number of DCI0s that are received
on the uplink at the MAC layer.
SendPUCCHSuccess-
Number
Range: 0 to
1000
successfully sent on the uplink PUCCHs at the
MAC layer.
SendPUSCHSuccess-
Number
Range: 0 to
1000
successfully sent on the uplink PUSCHs at the
MAC layer.
GENEX Probe
14-249
TATimerLength - Indicates the value of the timer for the tracing
area (TA) at the MAC layer.
ULSubCarrierRB-
Number
- Indicates the number of sub-carriers in each
resource block on the uplink at the MAC layer.
ULSymbolNumber - Indicates the number of symbols for each
timeslot on uplink channels at the MAC layer.
ULSystemRBNumber - Indicates the number of system resource blocks
that use the uplink bandwidth at the MAC layer.

MCS
This section describes the IEs related to the MCS of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the modulation coding scheme (MCS) by referring to the following
descriptions.
Code0Count Range: 0 to 1,000 Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on
codeword 0 during a period.
Code0Mod - Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword
0, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
Code0RBCou
nt
Range: 0 to
100,000
Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS
on codeword 0 during a period.
Code1Count Range: 0 to 1,000 Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on
codeword 1 during a period.
Code1Mod - Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword
1, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
Code1RBCou
nt
Range: 0 to
100,000
on codeword 1 during a period.
Count Range: 0 to 1,000 Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS during a
period.
Modulation - Indicates the modulation, such as QPSK, 16QAM,
and 64QAM.
RBCount Range: 0 to
100,000
during a period.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
MIMO
This section describes the IEs related to the MIMO of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) by referring to the following
descriptions.
IE Name Description
1T1R Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and one
receiver.
1T2R Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and two
receivers.
2T2R SFBC Indicates the space frequency block code for two transmitters and two
receivers.
2T2R OL SM Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for two transmitters and two
receivers.
2T2R CL
Rank2
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 2 for two transmitters and two
receivers.
MultiUser Indicates the multi-user MIMO.
2T2R CL
Rank1
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for two transmitters and two
receivers.
Single Port5 Indicates the single-transmitter port (port 5).
Single Port56 Indicates the dual-transmitter ports (port 5 and port 6).
4T2R SFBC Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T2R OL SM Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T2R CL
Rank1
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T2R CL
Rank2
Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T4R SFBC Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and four
receivers.
4T4R OL
Rank2
Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and four
receivers.
4T4R OL
Rank3
receivers.
4T4R OL
Rank4
receivers.
BF Port7 Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 7).
GENEX Probe
14-251
IE Name Description
BF Port8 Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 8).
BF Port78 Indicates the double-stream beam forming ports (port 7 and port 8).
4T4R CL
Rank1
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and four
receivers.
4T4R CL
Rank2
receivers.
4T4R CL
Rank3
receivers.
4T4R CL
Rank4
receivers.
PMI Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index (PMI), and the value range is from
0 to 15.

NAS Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the NAS Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the NAS parameters by referring to the following descriptions.
EMM Service
State
- Indicates the evolved packet core (EPC)
mobility management state.
IP Type IPv4 or IPv6 Indicates the IP address type.
IPv4Address - Indicates the IPv4 address.
IPv6Address - Indicates the IPv6 address.
PdnNumber Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the number of packet data networks
(PDNs).
PLMN - Indicates the registered public land mobile
network (PLMN).
PLMN Select
Mode
- Indicates the PLMN selection mode.
Register State - Indicates the registration state.
RRC Connect
State
- Indicates the RRC connection state.
SecurityModeCon
trol
- Indicates the security mode command switch.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PDCP Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the PDCP Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) parameters by
referring to the following descriptions.
DiscardTimer-
Length
- Indicates the value of the discard timer
configured for the PDCP.
DL Count - Indicates the downlink PDCP entity
count.
MaxCid - Indicates the maximum connection ID
of the robust header compression
(ROHC) context.
PDCPRohcProfile Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that
the ROHC profile
information is not
configured. 1 indicates that
the ROHC profile
information is configured.
Indicates the information about the
ROHC profile configured for the
PDCP.
PDCPSnBitLength Range: 0 to 2
l 0 indicates 5 bits.
Indicates the bit length of the sequence
number configured for the PDCP.
RB ID Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the radio bearer ID of the
PDCP.
RLC Mode 0 or 1. 0 indicates the RLC
AM mode. 1 indicates the
RLC UM mode.
Indicates the RLC mode of the PDCP.
StateReportFlag 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the
state report is not sent during
the handover. 1 indicates
that the state report is sent
Indicates the state report flag that is sent
during the PDCP handover.
UL Count - Indicates the uplink PDCP entity count.

PHY Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the PHY Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the LTE physical channel parameters by referring to the following
descriptions.
GENEX Probe
14-253
Adjust Point Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the adjustment point that is traced
periodically.
CFI1 Number - Indicates the number of times that the control
format indicator (CFI) of the physical control
format indicator channel (PCFICH) is 1.
CFI2 Number - Indicates the number of times that the CFI of
the PCFICH is 2.
the PCFICH is 3.
the PCFICH is 4.
DCI DL Number - Indicates the number of downlink control
information (DCI) on the downlink public
dedicated control channel (PDCCH).
DCI UL Number - Indicates the number of DCI on the uplink
PDCCH.
PHICH Ack Number - Indicates the number of ACK messages sent
on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator
channel (PHICH).
PHICH Nack Number - Indicates the number of NACK messages
sent on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator
channel (PHICH).
FirstPathFailNumber Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the number of times that the first
path that is traced periodically fails to be
determined.
FirstPathFailThree-
Number
Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the number of times that the first
determined for three consecutive times.
FirstPathFailThreeS-
witchNumber
determined for three consecutive times but is
in handover state.
FirstPathNumber Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the number of times that the first
path that is traced periodically is determined.
FirstPathStrValue Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the threshold that the first path is
traced periodically.
FirstPathSuccessNum-
ber
path that is traced periodically is determined
successfully.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
FirstPathValue Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the value of the first path that is
traced periodically.
MaxPathPosition Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the position of the maximum path
that is traced periodically.
MaxPathValue Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the value of the maximum path that
is traced periodically.

PLMN Information
This section describes the IEs related to the PLMN Information of the LTE network. You can
obtain the Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) information by referring to the following
descriptions.
Equivalent PLMN List Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the equivalent PLMN list.
Forbiden PLMN List Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the forbidden PLMN list.

Power Control
This section describes the IEs related to the Power Control of the LTE network. You can obtain
the information about the power control by referring to the following descriptions.
Alpha Factor Range: 0 to 7. The
values of 0 to 7
correspond to the alpha
factors 0, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6,
0.7, 0.8, 0.9, and 1.
Indicates the alpha factor of power control
shrinking.
CurrentFiValue - Indicates the current Fi adjust value getting
from the table according to the TPC value.
CurrGiValue - Indicates the current Gi adjust value getting
from table according to the TPC value.
DeltaFPUCCH - Indicates the delta F_PUCCH.
DeltaTFi - Indicates the delta TFI on the Physical
Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH).
DynNominal
PUCCH
- Indicates the dynamic nominal Physical
Uplink Shared Channel (PUCCH) power.
DynNominalPUSC
H
- Indicates the dynamic nominal PUSCH
power.
GENEX Probe
14-255
DynUEPUCCH - Indicates the dynamic UE PUCCH power.
DynUEPUSCH - Indicates the dynamic UE PUSCH power.
FiType Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates the
accumulated type. 1
indicates the absolute
type.
Indicates the power control adjust type.
Format Range: 1 to 6 Indicates the command format of the
PUCCH.
Max TxPower Range: -40 to 23. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the maximum transmit power.
PathLoss Unit: dB Indicates the path loss of the PUSCH or
PUCCH.
PUCCHHn - Indicates the PUCCH H(n).
RB Number - Indicates the resource block.
SumFiValue - Indicates the accumulation value of all Fi
adjust value.
SumGiValue - Indicates the accumulation value of all Gi
adjust value.
TPCValue Value: 0, 1, 2, or 3 Indicates the adjust value index of the power
control on PUSCH that is used to calculate
CurrGiValue .

PRB
This section describes the IEs related to the PRB of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the resource block by referring to the following descriptions.
DL RB Count Range: 0 to
65535
Indicates the scheduling times of downlink
resource block.
RB Index Range: 1 to 100 Indicates the resource block index.
UL RB Slot0 Count Range: 1 to 1000 Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource
block on slot 0.
UL RB Slot1 Count Range: 1 to 1000 Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource
block on slot 1.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Radio Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the Radio Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the transmit power and signal-to-interference plus noise ratio
(SINR) of all the channels by referring to the following descriptions.
PCI Range: 0 to 503 Indicates the physical cell ID.
RSRP Range: -132 to -40; unit:
dBm
Indicates the measurement value of the
reference signal received power (RSRP),
which is used for deciding the uplink
quality during the handover.
RSRQ Range: -20 to 0; unit: dB Indicates the measurement value of the
reference signal received quality (RSRQ),
RSSI Range: -132 to -40; unit:
dBm
Indicates the measurement value of the
received signal strength indicator (RSSI),
PUSCH Power Range: -40 to 23; unit:
dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the
physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
PUCCH Power Range: -40 to 23; unit:
dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the
physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
RACH Power Range: -40 to 23; unit:
dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the random
access channel (RACH).
SRS Power Range: -40 to 23; unit:
dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the channel
for a UE to send sounding reference signals
(SRSs).
Power Headroom Range: -40 to 23; unit:
dB
Indicates the power headroom of a UE.
PDCCH DL Grant
Count
Range: 0 to 1000 Indicates the total number of granted
downlink public dedicated control
channels (PDCCHs).
PDCCH UL Grant
Count
Range: 0 to 1000 Indicates the total number of granted
uplink PDCCHs.
Average SINR Range: -20 to 50; unit:
dB
Indicates the average SINR.
Rank1 SINR Range: -20 to 50; unit:
dB
Indicates the target SINR of Rank 1.
Rank2 SINR1 Range: -20 to 50; unit:
dB
Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of
Rank 2.
GENEX Probe
14-257
dB
Rank 2.
dB
Rank 3.
dB
Rank 3.
dB
Rank 4.
dB
Rank 4.
DrsRank1SINR Range: -20 to 50; unit:
dB
Indicates the target SINR of dedicated
reference signals of Rank 1.
DrsRank2SINR1 Range: -20 to 50; unit:
dB
reference signals on codeword 0 of Rank 2.
DrsRank2SINR2 Range: -20 to 50; unit:
dB
reference signals on codeword 1 of Rank 2.
RxChCorFactor Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the Rx channel correlation factor.
TxChCorFactor Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the Tx channel correlation factor.
Rank Indicator Range: 1 to 2 Indicates the rank value.
DMRS HOP Range: 0 to 30 Indicates the demodulation reference
signal (DMRS) hopping group. This IE is
displayed after the frequency hopping test
is performed.
You can choose Test > LTE
SendCommand to control a terminal to
perform the DMRS frequency hopping
test.

Random Access Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the Random Access Parameters of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the random access message by referring to the following
descriptions.
ContentionMessage-
Payload
- Indicates the contention message payload.
MACStatAfter - Indicates the state of the MAC layer after
the random access.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
MACStatePrevious - Indicates the state of the MAC layer before
the random access.
Message3Payload - Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request)
payload.
Message5Schedule-
dUlGrant
Range: 0 to 19 Indicates the Message5 (RRC Request
Complete) scheduled on the uplink.
Message5Schedule-
dUlGrantPayload
- Indicates the payload of Message5 (RRC
Request Complete) scheduled on the
uplink.
RaCauseType - Indicates the random access cause type.
RandomAccessNum-
ber
- Indicates the random access number.
RarMessagePayload - Indicates the RAR message payload.
RaType 0 or 1. 0 indicates the
contention based
random access. 1
indicates the non-
contention based
random access.
Indicates the random access type.
ReceiveContention-
Message
Range: 0 to 19 Indicates the received contention
messages.
ReceiveRarMessage Range: 0 to 19 Indicates the received radio random access
messages.
SendMessage3Mes-
sage
Range: 0 to 19 Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request)
sent during the random access.

RB Configuration Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the RB Configuration Parameters of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the resource block (RB) configuration parameters by
BuckSizeDuration 50, 100, 150, 300, 500, or
1000
Indicates the buck size duration.
ControlPduLength - Indicates the length of a control protocol
data unit (PDU).
EPSB ID Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the evolved packet system
bearer ID.
GENEX Probe
14-259
Logical Channel
Group ID
Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the logical channel group ID.
Logical Channel
Group PRI
- Indicates the logical channel group
priority.
Logical Channel PBR Value: 0, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, or 0xFFFF.
Unit: ms.
Indicates the prioritized bit rate of a
logical channel.
Logical Channel PRI Range: 1 to 16 Indicates the logical channel priority.
ReTxPduLength - Indicates the length of the PDU to be
retransmitted.
RLC Mode Range: 0 to 2
l 0 indicates the
acknowledge mode.
l 1 indicates the
unacknowledge
mode.
l 2 indicates the
transparent mode.
Indicates the RLC mode.
RxSduLength - Indicates the length of the received
service data unit (SDU).
SendSduLength - Indicates the length of the sent SDU.

RLC Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the RLC Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the radio link control channel parameters by referring to the
following descriptions.
Entity State - Indicates the entity state.
MACNotifySend-
Number
- Indicates the number of protocol data units
(PDUs) that the MAC layer instructs the uplink
RLC to send.
RxMACPdu - Indicates the number of MAC PDUs received on
downlink RLC channels.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RxPDCPSdu - Indicates the number of PDCP service data units
(SDUs) received on uplink RLC channels.
Transmit Type Range: 0 to 2
l 0 indicates the
acknowledge
mode.
l 1 indicates the
unacknowled
ge mode.
l 2 indicates the
transparent
mode.
Indicates the transmission type.
TxPduToMAC - Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the
uplink RLC channel to the MAC layer.
TxSduToPDCP - Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the
downlink RLC to the PDCP.
VR(h) - Indicates the highest receive state variable, that
is, the sequence number of the received PDU that
follows the PDU with the maximum sequence
number in AM mode.
VR(mr) - Indicates the maximum acceptable receive state
variable, which is equal to the sum of VR(r) and
the receive window size.
VR(ms) - Indicates the maximum transmit state variable,
that is, the sequence number of the maximum
PDU (ACK) of the transmit state report.
VR(r) - Indicates the receive state variable. As the lower
limit of the AM receive window, it indicates the
sequence number of the first PDU that is not
completely received or disordered.
VR(uh) - Indicates the UM highest received state variable.
As the upper limit of the receive window, it
indicates the sequence number of the received
PDU that follows the PDU with the maximum
sequence number in UM mode.
VR(ur) - Indicates the UM receive state variable, that is,
the sequence number of the first PDU that needs
to be re-ordered in UM mode.
VR(ux) - Indicates the UM t-reordering state variable, that
is, the sequence number of the PDU that triggers
the re-ordering timer in UM mode.
GENEX Probe
14-261
VR(x) - Indicates the t-Reordering state variable, that is,
the sequence number of the PDU that triggers the
re-ordering timer in AM mode.
VT(a) - Indicates the acknowledgment state variable,
that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to
be confirmed in AM mode.
VT(ms) - Indicates the maximum send state variable, that
is, the sequence number of the maximum sent
PDU in AM mode. The value of this parameter
is equal to the sum of VT(a) and the send window
size.
VT(s) - Indicates the send state variable, that is, the
sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in
AM mode.
VT(us) - Indicates the send state variable, that is, the
sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in
UM mode.

RRC Information
This section describes the IEs related to the RRC Information of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the radio resource control by referring to the following descriptions.
PUSCH
Configure
Parameter
64QAM Enable Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
64QAM is
disabled. 1
indicates that the
64QAM is enabled.
Indicates whether the 64
quadrature amplitude
modulation is enabled.
CyclicShift Range: 1 to 7 Indicates the cyclic shift.
DeltaOffsetAck-
Index
Range: 0 to 10 Indicates the delta offset
acknowledgment index.
DeltaOffsetC-
qiIndex
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the delta offset
channel quality indicator
(CQI) index.
DeltaOffsetRiIn
dex
Range: 0 to 12 Indicates the delta offset rank
indicator (RI) index.
GroupAssignPU
SCH
Range: 0 to 29 Indicates the group that is
assigned to the PUSCH.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GroupHoppingE
nabled
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
group hopping is
disabled. 1
indicates that the
group hopping is
enabled.
Indicates whether the group
hopping is enabled.
Hopping Mode Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
hopping mode is
Inter-SubFrame. 1
indicates that the
hopping mode is
Inter&Intra-
SubFrame.
Indicates the hopping mode.
SubBandNumbe
r
Range: 1 to 4 Indicates the number of sub-
bands.
PUSCHHoppin
gOffset
Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the PUSCH hopping
offset.
SequenceHoppi
ngEnabled
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
sequence hopping
is disabled. 1
indicates that the
sequence hopping
is enabled.
Indicates whether the
sequence hopping is enabled.
RACH Configure
Parameter
MACContentio
nTimer
Range: 8 to 64.
Step: 8. Unit:
subframe.
Indicates the timer for
contention resolution in TS
36.321 [6]. The unit is
subframe. Value sf8
corresponds to 8 subframes,
sf16 corresponds to 16
subframes.
MaxHarqMessa
ge3Tx
number of Msg3 HARQ
transmissions in TS 36.321
[6], which is used for
contention based random
access.
MessagePower
OffsetGroupB
Range:
0xFFFFFFFF, 0, 5,
8, 10, 12, 15, 18.
Unit: dB.
preamble selection in TS
36.321 [6]. The unit is dB.
Value minusinfinity
corresponds to infinity. Value
dB0 corresponds to 0 dB, dB5
corresponds to 5 dB.
GENEX Probe
14-263
MessageSizeGr
oupA
56, 144, 208, or 256 Indicates the size of the
random access preambles
group A or B.
PreambleInitial-
ReceivedTarget-
Power
Range: -120 to -90.
Unit: 2
Indicates the preamble initial
received target power.
PreambleTrans-
mitMax
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10,
20, 50, 100, or 200
number of transmitted
preambles.
PowerRamping
Step
0, 2, 4, or 6 Indicates the power ramping
step.
RaPRACHMask
Index
- Indicates the random access
physical random access
channel (PRACH) mask
index.
RaPreambleGro
upANumber
Range: 0 to 60.
Step: 4
Indicates the number of non-
dedicated random access
preambles that correspond to
group A.
RaPreambleInde
x
- Indicates the dedicated
random access preamble
index.
RaPreambleNu
mber
Range: 4 to 60.
Step: 4
random access preambles.
RaResponseWin
dowSize
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or
10
Indicates the duration of the
random access response
window.
SRS Configure
Parameter
CyclicShift Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the cyclic shift.
Duration Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates the
normal duration. 1
indicates the
extended duration.
Indicates the duration of
physical hybrid ARQ
indicator channel (PHICH).
FreqencyDomai
nPosition
Range: 0 to 23 Indicates the frequency
domain position.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
SimultaneousA-
nAndSRS
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
messages cannot be
transmitted on a
channel
simultaneously. 1
indicates that the
messages can be
transmitted on a
channel
simultaneously.
Indicates whether the
sounding reference signal
(SRS) and format 1a1b
messages can be transmitted
on a channel simultaneously.
SRSBandwidth Range: 0 to 7
l 0 indicates
UU_BW0.
l 1 indicates
UU_BW1.
l 2 indicates
UU_BW2.
l 3 indicates
UU_BW3.
l 4 indicates
UU_BW4.
l 5 indicates
UU_BW5.
l 6 indicates
UU_BW6.
l 7 indicates
UU_BW7.
Indicates the SRS bandwidth.
SRSConfigInde
x
Range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the SRS configured
index.
SRSHoppingBa
ndwidth
Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the SRS hopping
bandwidth.
SRSMaxUpPts Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
maximum uplink
pilot timeslot
restriction is
disabled. 1
indicates that the
maximum uplink
pilot timeslot
restriction is
enabled.
Indicates the maximum uplink
pilot timeslot of the SRS.
GENEX Probe
14-265
SRSSubframeC
onfig
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the number of
configured subframes of the
SRS.
SRSUEReleated
Bandwith
Range: 0 to 3 Indicates the UE-related
bandwidth of the SRS.
TransmissionCo
mb
0 or 1 Indicates the transmission
mode.
PUCCH
Configure
Parameter
DeltaPUCCHSh
ift
1, 2, or 3 Indicates the delta PUCCH
shift.
EnableFlg Value: 1 or 2. 1
indicates that the
enable flag is
disabled. 2
indicates that the
enable flag is
enabled.
Indicates the enable flag.
N1PUCCHAn Range: 0 to 2047 Indicate the PUCCH resource
value.
N1PUCCHAnR
ep
Range: 0 to 2047 Indicates that the UE send the
ACK and NACK messages
repeatedly with a
RepetitionFactor.
NcsAn Range: 0 to 7 Indicates the number of cyclic
shifts.
NrbCqi Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the bandwidth
calculated on the basis of the
resource block.
RepetitionFacto
r
Range: 0 to 3
l 0 indicates
N2_REPET_F
ACTOR.
l 1 indicates
N4_REPET_F
ACTOR.
l 2 indicates
N6_REPET_F
ACTOR.
l 3 indicates
SPARE1_REP
ET_FACTOR.
Indicates the repetition factor
that affects the value of
N1PUCCHAnRep.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
TddAckNackFe
edbackMode
0 or 1. 0 indicates
that the feedback
mode of ACK and
NACK messages is
bundling. 1
indicates that the
feedback mode of
ACK and NACK
messages is
multiplexing.
Indicates the feedback mode
of the ACK and NACK
messages in TDD mode.
PRACH
Configure
Parameter
HighSpeedFlag 0 or 1. 0 indicates
the low speed
(restricted). 1
indicates the high
speed
(unrestricted).
Indicates the high speed flag.
PRACHConfigI
ndex
Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the PRACH
configuration index.
PRACHFreqen-
cyOffset
Range: 0 to 104 Indicates the PRACH
frequency offset.
RootSequenceIn
dex
Range: 0 to 837 Indicates the root sequence
index.
ZeroCorrelation
ZoneConfig
Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the configuration
value of the zero correlation
zone.

RRU Measurement
This section describes the IEs related to the RRU Measurement of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the remote radio unit (RRU).
RF 0 or 1 Indicates the radio frequency unit.
RTWP_ChA Range: -110 to -40.
Unit: dBm.
Indicates the received total power of the
wideband on main A.
Received total (RT) indicates the total
power of the wideband signals that a base
station receives.
Wideband power (WP) indicates the power
of the wideband including the noise floor
and self interference noise.
GENEX Probe
14-267
RTWP_ChB Range: -110 to -40.
Unit: dBm.
Indicates the received total power of the
wideband on diversity B.
Received total (RT) indicates the total
power of the wideband signals that a base
station receives.
Wideband power (WP) indicates the power
of the wideband including the noise floor
and self interference noise.
Tx Power Range: -110 to +40.
Unit: dBm.
Indicates the transmit power.

RSRP Measurement
This section describes the IEs related to the RSRP Measurement of the LTE network. You can
obtain the measurement value of the reference signal received power (RSRP) of each antenna
by referring to the following descriptions.
RSRP Antenna0 Range: -132 to -40; unit:
dBm
Indicates the RSRP measurement value
of antenna 0.
dBm
of antenna 1.
dBm
of antenna 2.
dBm
of antenna 3.
DrsRSRP Antenna0 Range: -132 to -40; unit:
dBm
of the dedicated channel of antenna 0.
dBm
dBm
dBm

Service Data Flow Information
This section describes the IEs related to the Service Data Flow Information of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the service data flow by referring to the following
descriptions.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Bearer Context Type - Indicates the bearer context type.
Context ID Range: 0 to 31 Indicates the context ID.
DLGuaranteedMaxRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum
guaranteed bit rate for downlink.
DLMaxRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum bit rate
for downlink.
EPSB ID - Indicates the evolved packet
system (EPS) bearer ID.
FlowLabelType - Indicates the IPv6 flow label type.
LocalPortHighLimit Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the maximum local port
number.
LocalPortLowLimit Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the minimum local port
number.
PacketFilterID Range: 0 to 15 Indicates the packet filter
identifier.
Precedence Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the packet filter priority.
ProtocolID - Indicates the protocol ID.
QCI - Indicates the QoS class identifier.
RemoteIpv4Address - Indicates the remote IPv4
address.
RemoteIpv4Mask - Indicates the remote IPv4 mask.
RemoteIpv6Address - Indicates the remote IPv6
address.
RemoteIpv6Mask - Indicates the remote IPv6 mask.
RemotePortHighLimit Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the maximum remote
port number.
RemotePortLowLimit Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the minimum remote
port number.
SdfNumber Range: 1 to 11 Indicates the number of service
data flow.
SdfPfNumber - Indicates the number of service
data flow packet filter.
SingleLcPort Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the single local port
number.
SingleRmtPort Range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the single remote port
number.
GENEX Probe
14-269
TypeOfService Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the service type.
TypeOfServiceMask Range: 0 to 255 Indicates the service type mask.
ULGuaranteedMaxRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum
guaranteed bit rate for uplink.
ULMaxRate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum bit rate
for uplink.

Serving and Neighboring Cells
This section describes the IEs related to the Serving and Neighboring Cells of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the serving cell, listed cell, and detected cell by referring
to the following descriptions.
PCI Range: 0 to 503 Indicates the physical cell ID.
RSRP Range: -132 to -40. Unit:
dBm.
Indicates the reference signal received
power.
RSRQ Range: -20 to 0. Unit: dB. Indicates the reference signal received
quality.
RSSI Range: -132 to -40. Unit:
dBm.
indicator.
EARFCN - Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio
frequency channel number.
Frequency Offset Unit: Hz Indicates the frequency offset.

SINR PDF
This section describes the IEs related to the SINR PDF of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the signal-to-interference and noise ratio (SINR) of Rank 1 and Rank 2 by
Average SINR Range: -20 to 50. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the average SINR.
DrsRank1SINR Range: -20 to 50. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the dedicated reference signal target
SINR of rank 1.
DrsRank2SINR1 Range: -20 to 50. Unit:
dB.
SINR on codeword 0 of rank 2.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DrsRank2SINR2 Range: -20 to 50. Unit:
dB.
SINR on codeword 1 of rank 2.
RANK1 SINR Range: -20 to 50. Unit:
dB.
Indicates the target SINR on Rank 1.
RANK2 SINR1 Range: -20 to 50. Unit:
dB.
Rank 1.
RANK2 SINR2 Range: -20 to 50. Unit:
dB.
Rank 2.

Throughput
This section describes the IEs related to the Throughput of the LTE network. You can obtain
the throughput of the medium access control (MAC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP),
and radio link control (RLC) by referring to the following descriptions.
MAC DL Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput at the MAC
layer.
MAC UL Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput at the MAC
layer.
PDCP DL
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput at the
PDCP layer.
PDCP UL
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput at the PDCP
layer.
PHY DL Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput at the
physical layer.
PHY UL Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput at the physical
layer.
RLC DL Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the downlink throughput at the RLC
layer.
RLC UL Throughput Unit: kbit/s Indicates the uplink throughput at the RLC
layer.

Tracking Area Information
This section describes the IEs related to the Tracking Area Information of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the tracking area by referring to the following descriptions.
GENEX Probe
14-271
Forbiden TA List Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the forbidden tracking
area.
TA List Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the tracking area list.

UE State
This section describes the IEs related to the UE State of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the status of the non-access stratum, RRC, and MS by referring to this section.
EMM State - Indicates the evolved packet
system (EPS) mobility
management state.
EMM Sub State - Indicates the EPS mobility
management sub state.
EMM Update - Indicates the EPS mobility
management update.
RRC State Idle, Connected, or Unkown Indicates the RRC connection
state.
DRX State Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the
non-DRX state. 1 indicates the
DRX state.
Indicates the discontinuous
reception mechanism state.
Cell Allowed Access Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that
the cell access is not allowed. 1
indicates that the cell access is
allowed.
Indicates the cell allowed access.
Cell Barred Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that
the cell is not barred. 1 indicates
that the cell is barred.
Indicates the cell barred.
Cell Reserved - Indicates the cell reserved.
Camped PCI Range: 0 to 503 Indicates the camped physical
cell identity.
IMSI - Indicates the international mobile
subscriber identity.
UE Category - Indicates the user equipment
category.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Antenna Selection Range: 0 to 4
l 0 indicates the closed loop.
l 1 indicates the open loop.
l 2 indicates the single-
antenna transmission.
l 3 indicates the power aiding.
l 4 indicates that the antenna
is invalid.
Indicates the antenna selection.
Feature Group
Indicators
- Indicates the feature group
indicators.
Timing Advance Range: 0 to 63 Indicates the timing advance
(TA).
Synchronous State - Indicates the downlink
synchronization state of a UE.
MME Code - Indicates the mobility
management entity code.
MME GroupId - Indicates the mobility
management entity group ID.
MTMSI - Indicates the M-temporary
mobile subscriber identity.
AFC Period - Indicates the automatic frequency
control period.
AFC Frequency Read
Value
- Indicates the automatic frequency
control frequency read value.
PLMN - Indicates the public land mobile
network.
TAC - Indicates the tracking area code.

14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners
This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to
the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners.
GSM Information Elements of Scanners
This describes the IEs of the GSM scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the
IEs in the GSM scanner view.
GENEX Probe
14-273
ARFCN - Indicates the ARFCN.
BSIC - Indicates the base station identity code.
C/A Unit: dB Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent (ratio).
C/I Unit: dB Indicates the carrier-to-interference
(ratio).
Center Frequency - Indicates the center frequency.
Frequency Unit: MHz Indicates the carrier frequency.
Power Unit: dBm Indicates the level strength of each
frequency.
indicator.
RxLev Unit: dBm Indicates the received signal level.
Spectrum Channel - Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum
analysis.

WCDMA Information Elements of Scanners
This describes the IEs of the WCDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing
the IEs in the WCDMA scanner view.
Aggregate Ec/Io Unit: dB Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io.
Center Frequency - Indicates the center frequency.
Channel Code - Indicates the primary and secondary
scrambling codes.
Delay Spread - Indicates the spread delay.
Dev.Drift - Indicates the received signals of time
slices, which are obtained by using the
standard method.
Drift - Indicates the received signals of time
slices.
Ec Unit: dBm Indicates the energy per chip.
Ec/Io Unit: dB Indicates the ratio of the energy per
chip to the total power density of the
received bandwidth.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Eps/Io - Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of
the primary scrambling code.
Ess/Io - Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of
the secondary scrambling code.
Finger No - Indicates the number of a finger.
Io Unit: dBm Indicates the total power spectral
density of the received bandwidth.
ISCP - Indicates the interference signal code
power.
p Total - Indicates the total received power of
the current ARFCN.
Power Unit: dBm Indicates the level strength of each
frequency.
indicator.
Scrambling Code - Indicates the scrambling code.
SIR - Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio.
Spectrum Channel - Indicates the tested ARFCN of
spectrum analysis.
Time - Indicates the time sequence offset.
Time Offset - Indicates the time sequence offset or
pilot delay.

CDMA Information Elements of Scanners
This describes the IEs of the CDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing
the IEs in the CDMA scanner view.
Aggregate Ec/Io Unit: dB Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io.
Channel - Indicates the tested ARFCN.
Delay Spread Unit: chip Indicates the spread delay.
Ec/Io Unit: dB Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to
the total power spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
Io Unit: dBm Indicates the total power of the specified
bandwidth
GENEX Probe
14-275
Pilot Delay - Indicates the pilot delay.
Power - Indicates the power.
Protocol - Indicates the network system.
RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the received signal strength indicator.
Spectrum Channel - Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum analysis.

WiMAX Information Elements of Scanners
This describes the IEs of the WiMAX scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing
the IEs in the WiMAX scanner view.
CINR Unit: dB Indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio of the preamble
numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble index.
RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the received signal strength indicator of the
preamble numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble
index.

14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements
This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views.
App Throughput
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the App Throughput test for the packet service.
The following table provides the information about the throughput ratio at the application layer
of the packet service.
Rx App Rate Range: 0 to 100000. Unit:
kbit/s.
Indicates the downlink throughput rate at the
application layer, that is, the current throughput
for data received at the application layer.
Tx App Rate Range: 0 to 50000. Unit:
kbit/s.
Indicates the uplink throughput rate at the
application layer, that is, the current throughput
for data sent at the application layer.
TCP
Retransmit
Ratio
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the retransmission ratio at the TCP
layer.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Attach Detach
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Attach Detach test for the packet service. The
following table provides the information about the Attach or Detach service of the packet service.
Attach Success Rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the attach success rate.
Detach Success Rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the detach success rate.
Attach Time Unit: ms Indicates the attach time.
Detach Time Unit: ms Indicates the detach time.

FTP Service Quality Evaluation
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the FTP Service Quality Evaluation test for the
packet service. The following table provides the information related to the FTP service of the
packet service.
Progress Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the upload or download progress.
Download/Upload
Rate
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the upload or download rate.
Time Elapsed - Indicates the upload or download elapsed
time.
Current Load Size Unit: kbyte Indicates the size of the file uploaded or
downloaded currently.
Total Load Size Unit: kbyte Indicates the total size of all uploaded or
downloaded files.
Download File Size Unit: kbyte Indicates the size of the downloaded file.
Download Total
Count
- Indicates the total number of download
attempts.
Download Failure
Count
- Indicates the number of download failures.
Download Failure
Rate
Unit: kbit/s Indicates the download failure rate.
Upload File Size Unit: kbyte Indicates the size of the uploaded file.
Upload Total Count - Indicates the total number of upload attempts.
GENEX Probe
14-277
Upload Failure Count - Indicates the number of upload failures.
Upload Failure Rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the upload failure rate.
Download time Unit: s Indicates the statistical value (such as
minimum value, maximum value, average
value, and standard deviation) of the
download duration.
Download Avg rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the statistical value (such as
value, and standard deviation) of the average
download rate.
Upload time Unit: s Indicates the statistical value (such as
value, and standard deviation) of the upload
duration.
Upload Avg rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the statistical value (such as
upload rate.
Max Rate Up Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum rate on the uplink.
Min Rate Down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the minimum rate on the downlink.
Guar Rate Up Unit: kbit/s Indicates the guaranteed rate on the uplink.
Guar Rate Down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the guaranteed rate on the downlink.

HTTP Service Quality Evaluation
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the HTTP Service Quality Evaluation test for
the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the HTTP service of
the packet service.
Progress Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the test progress.
Page download rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the page download rate.
Max Rate Up Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum uplink rate.
Max Rate Down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum downlink rate.
Guar Rate Down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the guaranteed rate on the
downlink.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DNS Parse Time Unit: s Indicates the duration for parsing the
domain name server (DNS).
Page size Unit: byte Indicates the page size.
Buffer - Indicates the buffer.
Page access failure
rate
%.
Indicates the failure rate of accessing pages.
URL - Indicates the IP address of the HTTP server.
Page download
time
Unit: ms Indicates the statistical value (such as
value, and standard deviation) of the page
download duration.
Avg rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the statistical value (such as
page download rate.

Ping Service Quality Evaluation
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ping Service Quality Evaluation test for the
packet service. The following table provides the information related to the Ping service of the
packet service.
Packet Size Unit: byte Indicates the size in bytes of the packet sent
with the Ping command. Valid only during
Ping sessions.
IP - Indicates the server IP address that is pinged.
Status - Indicates the status of the current ping test.
Packet Loss Rate Range: 0 to 100. Unit:
%.
Indicates the packet loss rate.
Ping time Unit: ms Indicates the duration of the ping test.
Max Rate Up Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum uplink rate.
Max Rate Down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum downlink rate.
Guar Rate Down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the guaranteed rate on the
downlink.

GENEX Probe
14-279
PS Common Indicators
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the PS Common Indicators test for the packet
service. The following table provides the information about the PDP activation for the packet
service.
PDP Activation Success
Rate
%.
Indicates the PDP activation success
rate.
PDP Activation Time Unit: s Indicates the PDP activation time.

WAP Download
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Download test for the packet service.
The following table provides the information related to the WAP download service of the packet
service.
Progress Unit: % Indicates the test progress of the WAP
download.
Download Rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the download rate.
Time Elapsed Unit: ms Indicates the elapsed download time.
Current Load Size Unit: byte Indicates the size of the file downloaded
currently.
Total Load Size Unit: byte Indicates the total size of downloaded files.
File Size Unit: byte Indicates the size of the downloaded file.
Login failure rate Unit: % Indicates the failure rate of logging in to the
WAP gateway.
Download Total
Count
- Indicates the total number of download
attempts.
Download Failure
Count
- Indicates the number of download failures.
Download Failure
Rate
Unit: % Indicates the download failure rate.
Max rate down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the maximum download rate.
Guar rate down Unit: kbit/s Indicates the guaranteed download rate.
Download time Unit: ms Indicates the download time.
Download Avg rate Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average download rate.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
WAP Gateway Connection
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Gateway Connection test for the packet
service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP gateway connection
service of the packet service.
IE Name Description
WAP Gateway
Connection
ID Indicates the ID of the number of WAP
gateway connection tests. The ID starts from
1.
Time Indicates the time for the WAP gateway
connection.
Status Indicates the status of the WAP gateway
connection test.

WAP Logon
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Logon test for the packet service. The
following table provides the information related to the WAP login service of the packet service.
IE Name Description
WAP Logon ID Indicates the ID of the number of WAP login tests.
The ID starts from 1.
Time Indicates the WAP login time.
Status Indicates the status of the WAP login test.

WAP Page Refresh
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Page Refresh test for the packet service.
The following table provides the information related to the WAP page refreshing service of the
packet service.
IE Name Description
WAP Page Refresh ID Indicates the ID of the number of WAP page
refreshing tests. The ID starts from 1.
Time Indicates the time for refreshing the WAP page.
Status Indicates the status of the WAP page refreshing
test.

GENEX Probe
14-281
14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table
provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service.
Index - Indicates the number of tests.
Data Time - Indicates the time calculated according to the
speech evaluation.
PESQ P.862.1 Range: 1 to 4.5 Indicates an algorithm of the perceptual evaluation
of speech quality.
KPI - Indicates the key performance indicator.
Min - Indicates the minimum value of the speech
evaluation.
Max - Indicates the maximum value of the speech
evaluation.
Avg Value - Indicates the average value of the speech
evaluation.
Std Deviation - Indicates the standard deviation of the speech
evaluation.

14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides
the information noise test information elements.
MOS Score - Indicates the MOS score obtained through the PESQ
862.1 algorithm.
Noise Level Unit: dB Indicates the noise level of the noise sample file or
recorded speech result file measured in the non-speech
phase. The smaller the value is, the less the noise is.
Sample Noise
File
- Indicates the name of the noise sample file used in the
noise test.
SNR Unit: dB Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the noise
sample file or recorded speech result file. The SNR can
be calculated through the following formula:
SpeechLevel - NoiseLevel.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
SNRI Unit: dB The signal-to-noise ratio improvement (SNRI) can be
calculated through the following formula: Result File
SNR - Sample File SNR.
The larger the value is, the more the noises are
eliminated.
Speech Activity Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the speech activity of the noise sample file or
recorded speech result file.
Speech Level Unit: dB Indicates the speech level of the noise sample file or
recorded speech result file.
TNLR Unit: dB Indicates the total noise level reduction (TNLR) in the
non-speech phase. The TNLR can be calculated through
the following formula: Result File NoiseLevel -
Sample File NoiseLevel.

14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts
This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe.
General Shortcuts
Function Shortcut
Open the online help. F1
Open the project. Ctrl + O
Save the project. Ctrl + S
Open the engineering parameter view. Ctrl + E
Open the outdoor map window. Ctrl + M
Enlarge the map area. =
Shrink the map area. -
Open the Device Configure window to
configure external devices.
F8
Add external devices. Ctrl + D
Connect the external device automatically. F2
Disconnect the external device. Ctrl + F2
Open the Test Plan Control dialog box to
configure or view the test plan.
F9
Start or stop the logfile recording. F10
GENEX Probe
14-283
Function Shortcut
Pause or resume the logfile recording. F11
Start the test plan. F5
End the test plan. Ctrl + F5
Insert filemark F12
Switch worksheets on the operation interface. Ctrl + Tab

Replay Shortcuts
Function Shortcut
Close the logfile. Ctrl + H
Open the logfile. Ctrl + L
Play the logfile. Enter
Stop the logfile. Ctrl + F6

Shortcuts for synchronization
Function Shortcut
Check the signaling in the L2 Messages or L3
Messages view.
Up/Down
Move the Line Chart view and update the data
in the view.
Left/Right
Synchronize the points in the map. Left/Right

14.5 PSTN SQE Server
This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality
evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution
of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application
management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink
of the GSM and WCDMA networks.
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the
independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help
you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the
PSTN SQE Server.
14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete
the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then
perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.
14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server
The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality
evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU.
14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality
evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters.
14.5.5 FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the
corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the
using skills.
14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the
PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related
operations.
14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when
configuring events of the speech quality evaluation.
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the
independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help
you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the
PSTN SQE Server.
Introduction to the PSTN SQE Server
This describes features of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports the speech
quality evaluation tests on multiple networks and provides user-friendly interfaces.
Features
l Speech quality evaluation test on multiple networks such as GSM and WCDMA.
l Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing and incoming calls.
Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing calls
The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for outgoing
calls and perform the speech quality evaluation test by configuring the specified
destination number.
Speech quality evaluation test for incoming calls
The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for incoming
calls, listen to incoming calls, and give responses to incoming calls.
Pre-synchronization of speech evaluation
After a call is set up, the PSTN SQE Server can perform the pre-synchronization test to
synchronize two parties for the normal speech evaluation test.
GENEX Probe
14-285
Recording function
Supporting the automatic recording during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts
of recording, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.
Playing function
Supporting the automatic playing during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts of
playing, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.
l Supporting the half-duplex interactive speech evaluation. Thus, the speech quality on the
uplink and downlink can be tested in real time. The two interactive speech evaluation modes
are as follows:
The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech sample.
Then, the PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech
sample.
The PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech sample.
Then, the PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech
sample.
l Real-time display of key events on the PSTN such as calling, recording, and playing events.
Thus, you can troubleshoot problems in time. For details, see 14.5.7 Predefined Events
of the PSTN SQE Server.
l Simultaneous test for multiple channels. The PSTN SQE Server can perform the
synchronous speech evaluation test for a maximum of eight channels.
l Recording and storing logfiles (.gen file) in real time.
The logfile records the MOS values calculated by the specified channel according to
different protocols such as PESQ.862, PESQ.862.1, PESQ LQ, and PESQ Ie. You can
import the logfile to the GENEX Assistant to generate the analysis reports of speech
evaluation.
Application Scenarios
The PSTN SQE Server can be used in each phase of network lifecycles such as the network
establishment, expansion, maintenance, and optimization and is applicable to the performance
evaluation test and speech quality problem localization.
l Performance evaluation test
During the network establishment, expansion, or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server can
be used to evaluate the speech quality performance of each network, thus providing the
network establishment or optimization with information.
l Speech quality problem localization on the radio network
During the network maintenance or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server and the UEs of
the GENEX Probe collect data. The PSTN SQE Server records the uplink MOS. The Probe
records the downlink MOS and quickly locates the speech quality problems on the uplink
and downlink with the GENEX Assistant.
System Structure
The PSTN SQE Server consists of a voice card, and PC that is installed with the PSTN SQE
Server and a voice card driver. The voice card supports a maximum of eight speech channels.
Figure 14-1 shows the system structure of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-3 describes each
entity shown in Figure 14-1.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server
Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server
Entity Description
PC Refers to a desktop, where the drivers for the PSTN SQE Server and voice
card are installed.
NOTE
The PC must has at least one PCI for installing a voice card.
Voice card Provides an RJ-11 interface, which is used to connect to the PSTN. The
voice card supports the speech call, call answer, recording, and playing
functions. The type of the voice card supported by the PSTN SQE Server
is Dialogic Diva Analog -2P/-4P/-8P.
RJ-11 Refers to the interface that is provided by the voice card and is used to
connect to the PSTN.
PSTN Refers to the public switched telephone network.

Working Principles of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes working principles of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports
the speech quality evaluation test on the uplink and downlink. By interacting with the PHU test
terminal, the PSTN SQE Server performs the speech quality evaluation test. During the test, the
PSTN SQE Server or Probe records the speech result files, performs the MOS analysis in real
time, and then displays the MOS values. Thus, you can easily locate the speech quality problems
on the radio network.
Speech Evaluation on the Uplink
The PHU test terminal plays a speech sample through the air interface. Then, the PSTN SQE
Server receives the played speech sample through the PSTN and records the speech sample in
the destination file. Thus, the uplink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file
and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Figure 14-2. Table 14-4
describes Figure 14-2.
Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink
GENEX Probe
14-287

Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink
Entity Description
Probe Controls the dial-up of the PHU for playing a speech sample.
PHU test terminal Plays a speech sample through the air interface.
Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are
supported.
PSTN SQE Server Receives the played speech sample through the PSTN, and then
records the speech sample in the destination file.

Speech Evaluation on the Downlink
The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample through the PSTN. Then, the PHU test terminal
receives the played speech sample through the air interface and records the speech sample in the
destination file. Thus, the downlink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file
and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Table 14-5. Figure 14-3
describes Table 14-5.
Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink

Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink
Entity Description
Probe Compares the speech result file with the speech sample and
obtains the downlink MOS value through the PESQ algorithm.
PHU test terminal Receives the played speech sample through the air interface,
and then records the speech sample in the destination file.
Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are
supported.
PSTN SQE Server Plays a speech sample through the PSTN.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server, including the logfile, project, test
task, PESQ, and MOS. These concepts help you better conduct the PSTN SQE Server to perform
the speech quality evaluation test.
Table 14-6 lists the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server
Basic
Concepts
Description
Logfile The logfile is the record of the collected information during the drive test.
The test data is stored in a file during the drive test. This file is called logfile
(.gen file). Through the logfile, you can easily browse and analyze data.
Project The PSTN SQE Server is used to manage test items based on the project. A
maximum of eight speech channels can be configured in a project. Multiple
test tasks can be configured for each speech channel.
Test task A test task consists of test items provided by the system. You can configure
test tasks as required. The test task can provide guidelines for the speech
quality test during the drive test.
Event The PSTN SQE Server provides the events of the speech quality evaluation.
These events indicate the status of the speech quality evaluation test. You
can browse predefined events in the SpeechView window.
Channel This is an emulation interface of a voice card, which is used to connect to
the telephone cable of the PSTN.
PESQ This is an international standard algorithm of the perceptual evaluation of
speech quality. You can evaluate the speech quality by comparing the
original speech sample with the fading speech file. The result of the
evaluation is the MOS value.
MOS The MOS is a subjective evaluation method adopting the ITU-T P.830
protocol. According to the requirements of the P.830 protocol, a specified
talker and listener in the specified environment analyze the speech quality
by collecting the objective feelings of the tested person in different scenarios.
Recording The PSTN SQE Server receives the speech sample played on the test
terminal through the PSTN, and then records the speech sample in the
destination file.
Playing The PSTN SQE Server plays the speech sample through the PSTN network.

Main Interface of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. The main interface consists of the
menu bar, toolbar, operation interface, status bar, and entries to the related operations by using
on the PSTN SQE Server.
GENEX Probe
14-289
Figure 14-4 shows the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-7 describes the items
shown in Figure 14-4.
Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server

Table 14-7 Description of the main interface
1 Menu bar Indicates the main menu of the system. For details, see
Menu Bar.
2 Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For
details, see Toolbar.
3 Operation
interface
Displays different view windows and configuration
windows. For details, see Operation Interface.
4 Status bar Displays the keyboard status such as the status of the Caps
Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock keys.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the PSTN SQE Server displays main menus of the system and is designed based
on the main functions of the PSTN SQE Server to facilitate your operations.
Table 14-8 describes the menu bar and the corresponding functions of the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar
File Provides the entries for operations related to the project
Configuration Provides the entries for configuring speech channels,
creating test tasks, and configuring test plans. For
details, see Table 14-10.
View Provides the entries for operations related to the view
Test Provides the entries for performing and stopping test
tasks. For details, see Table 14-12.
Help Provides the entries for the system help and license

Table 14-9 Description of the File menu
New This menu item is used to create a project.
Open This menu item is used to open a project under the
specified path.
Save This menu item is used to save a project.
Save as This menu item is used to save a current project as
another one.
Close This menu item is used to close a project.

Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu
Hardware Config This menu item is used to configure a speech channel.
Test Plan Editor This menu item is used to create a test task.
Test Plan Configuration Editor This menu item is used to configure a test plan.

GENEX Probe
14-291
Table 14-11 Description of the View menu
Speech/TV This menu item is used to display the view for
monitoring test data.

Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu
Start Run This menu item is used to start a test task.
Stop Run This menu item is used to stop a test task.

Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu
Contents This menu item is used to view the online help of the
PSTN SQE Server.
License Info This menu item is used to view license information.
Update License This menu item is used to update the license.
View ESN This menu item is used to obtain the ESN code.
About PSTN SQE Server This menu item is used to view the version information
about the PSTN SQE Server.

Toolbar
To enter windows fast or perform relevant operations, you can click corresponding icons on the
toolbar of the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-14 describes the icons on the toolbar.
Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar
Create a project. This icon is used to create a project.
Open a project. This icon is used to open a project (.xml
file).
Save a project. This icon is used to save the current
project.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Configure a speech
channel.
This icon is used to configure a speech
channel. Click this icon to configure a
speech channel in the displayed
Hardware Config window.
Create a test task. This icon is used to create a test task.
Click this icon to create a test task in the
displayed Test Plan Editor window.
Configure a test
task.
This icon is used to configure a test plan.
Click this icon to configure a test plan in
the displayed Test Plan Configuration
Editor window.
Monitor a test. This icon is used to monitor a test. Click
this icon to monitor a test in the displayed
SpeechView view in real time.
Start a test task. This icon is used to start a test task.
Stop a test task. This icon is used to stop a test task.
Help Content This icon is used to view the version
information about the PSTN SQE Server.

Operation Interface
To enter windows fast, you can click corresponding icons in the navigation pane of the operation
interface for the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-15 describes the icons in the navigation pane.
Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface
Hardware Config This icon is used to configure a speech
channel. Click this icon to configure a
speech channel in the displayed
Hardware Config window.
Test Plan Editor This icon is used to create a test task.
Click this icon to create a test task in the
displayed Test Plan Editor window.
Test Plan
Configuration Editor
This icon is used to configure a test plan.
Click this icon to configure a test plan in
the displayed Test Plan Configuration
Editor window.
GENEX Probe
14-293
SpeechView Click this icon to monitor a test in the
SpeechView view in real time.

Operation Procedure of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server. In the speech evaluation project,
the PSTN SQE Server creates test tasks to perform the speech quality evaluation test. You can
familiarize yourself with the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-16 describes the operation procedures.
Table 14-16 Operation procedures
Step Operation Description Reference
1 Configure a
voice card
Refers to configuring the
relevant parameters of the
voice card. Thus, the voice
card can run properly.
For details, see Configuring a
Voice Card.
2 Create a
speech
evaluation
project.
Refers to creating a project for
the speech evaluation.
For details, see Creating a
Speech Evaluation Project.
3 Configure a
speech
channel.
Refers to configuring
available speech channels in
the PSTN SQE Server.
Speech Channel.
4 Create a test
task.
Refers to creating a test task
for the UE, which is used for
the speech evaluation test.
For details, see Creating a Test
Plan.
5 Configure a
test task.
Refers to selecting the
corresponding channel for a
test task and setting properties
of the Option.
Test Plan.
6 Perform a test
task.
Refers to starting a test task
and recording a logfile.
During the test, you can
browse the logfile in real time.
For details, see Starting a Test
Plan.
7 Browse the
speech
evaluation
view in real
time.
Refers to browsing the test
data in the SpeechView view.
For details, see Browsing the
Speech Evaluation View in Real
Time.

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server
This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete
the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then
perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.
Context
After the PSTN SQE Server is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the
license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server
Before installing the PSTN SQE Server, you must check whether the installation requirements
are met.
The installation requirements are as follows:
l The software package of the Probe is available.
l The configuration of PC meets the requirement of the installation.
l The voice card and the corresponding driver are required.
Hardware Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server
Table 14-17 describes the requirements for PC configuration.
Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server
Configuration Items Configuration Requirements
CPU The Intel T2500 2.00 GHz Dual-Core processor is recommended.
Memory The minimum memory is 1 GB.
Hard disk It is recommended that the available hard disk space be 10 GB or
greater.
PC port l If a dongle plugs into the PC, at least a USB port is required.
l At least one PCI slot is required for installing a voice card.
Operating system Windows XP Professional SP2.

Software Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server
Table 14-18 describes the software and the corresponding configurations recommended for the
GENEX Probe
14-295
Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server
Configuratio
n Items
Obtaining Methods Configuration
Requirements
Remarks
Operating
system
- Microsoft Windows XP
Professional SP2.
Mandatory
GENEX Probe
V200R003
software
package
l Huawei website:
http://
support.huawei.com
l GENEX Probe
V200R003 software
installation CD-
ROM
You need to have an account
with http://
addition, you are authorized
to download the GENEX
Probe V200R003 software
package or purchase the
GENEX Probe V200R003
software.
Mandatory
Installation
package of the
Dialogic Diva
voice card
driver
l Huawei website:
http://
support.huawei.com
l GENEX Probe
V200R003 software
installation CD-
ROM
l Dialogc website:
http://
www.dialogic.com/
support/software.
You need to have an account
with http://
addition, you are authorized
to download the Dialogic
Diva voice card driver or
purchase the GENEX Probe
V200R003 software.
If the voice card
driver is not
installed, you
cannot use the
PSTN SQE
Server to
evaluate the
speech quality.
License The license is integrated
in the dongle.
The GENEX Probe
V200R003 is purchased.
Mandatory

Installing the PSTN SQE Server Main Program
During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You
can install the PSTN SQE Server as required.
Prerequisite
Check whether the computer meets the hardware requirements for installing the PSTN SQE
Server. For details, see Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server.
Context
It is recommended that you install the GENEX Probe and PSTN SQE Server on two PCs.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003 installation program.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
If ... Then ...
and perform Step 2.
V200R003 is available.
Perform Step 2.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license
agreement.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 14-5, specify User Name and Company Name.
Figure 14-5 Customer Information

NOTE
l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe.
l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.
Step 7 Click Next.
GENEX Probe
14-297
Step 8 Select the Custom installation mode. Then select PSTN SQE Server.
Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or
No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish.
It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now.
Step 12 Check whether the PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully.
Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > PSTN
SQE Server and check whether the shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server exists.
If ... Then ...
The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server
exists.
The PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully.
The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server
does not exist.
Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.
----End
Plugging in a Dongle
Procedure
Step 1 Plug in the dongle.
If ... Then ...
The software is being used for the first time
and the dongle is available.
Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC.
The dongle expires. Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a
valid license and update the license for the
dongle.
Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program.
Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN.
Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days.
Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle.
1. On the main interface, choose Help > Update License.
2. In the Open dialog box, select the new license.
3. Click Open.
4. In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
CAUTION
When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding
software is plugged into the computer.
Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed.
You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes:
l Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com
l GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM
Installing the Driver for a Voice Card
This describes how to install the driver for a voice card. To ensure that the PC installed with the
PSTN SQE Server can correctly recognize the Dialogic Diva voice card, you must install the
driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card on the PC.
Prerequisite
1. All applications are already closed.
2. The Dialogic Diva voice card has been connected to the PC through the PCMCIA slot.
3. You must log in to the PC where the driver for the voice card is installed as an administrator.
4. If the PC where the PSTN SQE Server is installed is already installed with another driver
for the voice card, uninstall it, and then install the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.
GENEX Probe
14-299
If ... Then ...
The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is
downloaded from http://support.huawei.com or
http://www.dialogic.com/support/software
Decompress the downloaded driver
installation package, and then perform
Step 2.
The installation CD-ROM of is available Perform Step 2.
Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe to start the installation.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 Select the installation mode in the displayed dialog box.
l Default Installation: Diva API/CAPI will be installed.: refers to the default installation.
It is recommended that you install the driver for the voice card in default installation mode.
l Customized installation: Specify services which should be installed.: refers to the
customized installation. If you select this installation mode, you can specify the services to
be installed.
l Secure installation: Exclude specific services from installation and conf: refers to the
security installation. If you select this installation mode, you can set the security properties
for different services.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 Optional: Select Install WIBU-KEY software to install the WIBU-KEY software. It is
recommended that you do not install the WIBU-KEY software.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Click Install.
Step 10 Restart the PC.
Step 11 Check whether the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed successfully.
Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva to check whether the software information about
the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists.
If ... Then ...
The software information about the driver
for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists
The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is
installed successfully.
The software information about the driver
for the Dialogic Diva voice card does not
exist
Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 until the driver
for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed
successfully.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
NOTE
After the installation is complete, choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Manual Diva
Boards to view details about how to install the driver for the voice card.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the installation is complete, you need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice
card can run properly. For details, see Configuring a Voice Card.
14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server
The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality
evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU.
Configuring a Voice Card
This describes how to configure a voice card. After the driver for a voice card is installed, you
need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly.
Prerequisite
The driver for the voice card is already installed..
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Configuration Manager. The Active
Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window is displayed.
Step 2 In the left pane of the Active Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager
window, click .
Step 3 Configure properties in the displayed dialog box.
From the Country Selection drop-down list, select the country where you stay. Other properties
are set by default.
Step 4 After configuring the properties, click on the toolbar of the Active Configuration - Dialogic
(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window to save and activate the property configuration.
Step 5 After the properties are activated successfully, click OK in the displayed Activate
Configuration dialog box.
Step 6 In the displayed Update successful dialog box, perform either of the following operations:
l Click Yes. The PC is restarted and the activated configuration takes effect.
l Click No. The activated configuration does not take effect and the voice card cannot work
normally.
----End
GENEX Probe
14-301
Creating a Speech Evaluation Project
This describes how to create a speech evaluation project. All operations of the PSTN SQE Server
are based on a project. Therefore, you need to create a project or open an existing project before
the speech evaluation test is performed.
Context
In the PSTN SQE Server, you can open only one project at a time. To switch the current project
to another one, you must close the open project.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose File > New to create a project.
NOTE
You can click on the toolbar or choose File > Open to open an existing project.
Step 2 Configure parameters.
You can configure the speech channels, create test tasks, and configure test tasks for a project.
For details, see corresponding chapters.
Step 3 Optional: Save the current project as required.
Directly save the current project
Click on the toolbar or choose File > New.
Save the current project as another one Choose File > Save As.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can close or delete a project through the File menu of the main interface or through the
icons on the toolbar. For details about the main interface, see Main Interface of the PSTN SQE
Server.
Configuring a Speech Channel
This describes how to configure a speech channel. Before performing a test, you need to connect
the telephone cable to the PSTN correctly to make the channel of a voice card available, and
then configure a speech channel.
Prerequisite
l The telephone cable is already connected to the channel of the voice card in the PC.
l A speech evaluation project is already created or open.
NOTE
After the telephone cable is connected to the interface of the voice card in the PC, the software can automatically
recognize the ID of the available speech channel. You can directly configure Source Number and
Description for this channel.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Context
A maximum of eight channels can be configured in a project.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Hardware Config. The Hardware
Config window is displayed.
Step 2 Select corresponding channel nodes in the list on the left of the Hardware Config window and
configure Source Number and Description in the right area.
----End
Creating a Test Plan
This describes how to create a test plan. The PSTN SQE Server can be used for the test in different
test environments and provide the test items for the speech quality evaluation. You can set test
items for the speech quality evaluation and create test tasks for the UE, thus guiding the speech
test.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Editor. The Test Plan Editor
window is displayed.
Step 2 Click at the lower left corner of the TestPlanList area in the displayed Test Plan Editor
window to create a test plan list.
For the description of the parameters related to the Test Plan Editor window, see Parameters
for Creating a Test Plan.
Step 3 Enter Name and Description at the upper corner of the Test Plan Editor window.
Step 4 Click Set to save the setting.
Step 5 Select a test plan list from the Test Plan Editor window, and then click at the left corner
of the TestPlan Config area to add a test plan to the test plan list and configure corresponding
parameters.
The test plan is named SQE by default. For details about SQE, see 14.5.6 Test Items of the
PSTN SQE Server.
----End
Configuring a Test Plan
This describes how to configure a test plan. You need to select corresponding Channel and set
the Option property for each created test plan before the test plan is started.
GENEX Probe
14-303
Prerequisite
l The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already
configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech
Channel.
l At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see
Creating a Test Plan.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Configuration Editor. The Test
Plan Configuration Editor window is displayed.
The list names of created test tasks are automatically displayed in the Test Plan Configuration
Editor window.
Step 2 In the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window, select corresponding Channel and
set the Option property for each test plan list.
For details about the Option property, see Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan.
NOTE
The Option property involves two fields: Yes and No. To perform the selected test plan, you must set Option
to Yes.
----End
Starting a Test Plan
This describes how to start a test plan. After a speech channel is connected properly,
corresponding parameters are already configured, and a test plan is configured, you can record
the logfile and start a test plan.
Prerequisite
l The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already
configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech
Channel.
l At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see
Creating a Test Plan.
l The corresponding channel is already selected for a test plan and Option is set to Yes.
l The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal is stopped.
Procedure
l Click on the toolbar or choose Test > StartRun. The test plan is started.
When the test plan is started, the PSTN SQE Server records a logfile (.gen file)
automatically. The default saving path is software installation directory\Huawei GENEX
\Probe 2.3\PSTN SQE Server\Data.
----End
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Monitoring the Execution State of a Test Plan
This describes how to monitor the execution state of a test plan in the Event list of the
SpeechView window during a test. This helps you view and analyze the test.
Prerequisite
At least one test plan is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.
Procedure
l Click on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView window is
displayed.
View the execution state of the test plan in the Event list.
----End
Stopping a Test Plan
This describes how to stop a test plan. You need to stop a test after it is finished.
Procedure
l Click on the toolbar or choose Test > StopRun. The test plan is stopped.
----End
Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time
This describes how to browse the speech evaluation view in real time. You can browse the test
data in the SpeechView view during the test.
Prerequisite
At least one test task is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.
Context
The SpeechView view is displayed in a chart and in a list. In the chart view, the changes of the
MOS parameters are displayed in a histogram. In the list view, the changes are displayed in a
table.
Procedure
l Click on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView view is displayed.
You can browse the test data in this view.
NOTE
Select the Channel No drop-down list of the SpeechView view. You can view the MOS information about
different channels.
----End
GENEX Probe
14-305
14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality
evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters.
Interface Description: Create a Test Plan
This describes the Test Plan Editor interface and helps you understand the interface components
and functions of the components and shortcut icons.
Figure 14-6 shows the Test Plan Editor interface. Table 14-19 provides the description of
Figure 14-6.
Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface

Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface
Name Description
TestPlanList area Displays a test plan list.
TestPlanList Information area Displays the names of and information about test plan lists.
TestPlan Config area Displays test tasks.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Name Description
Toolbar of the TestPlanList
area
Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving
test plan lists. For details, see Table 14-20.
Toolbar of the TestPlan
Config area
Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving
test tasks. For details, see Table 14-20.

Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar
Create This icon is used to create a test plan list
or a test plan.
Move up This icon is used to move the selected test
plan list or test plan upwards.
Move down This icon is used to move the selected test
plan list or test plan downwards.
Delete This icon is used to delete the selected test
plan list or test plan.

Parameters for Configuring a Speech Channel
This describes the parameters for configuring a speech channel. You can refer to this part when
configuring a speech channel and setting parameters.
Channel Refers to an emulation interface of the voice card, which is connected to
the PSTN through a telephone cable and is used for the speech call or
speech listening. The system automatically obtains available channels
and displays them in Channel.
ChannelID Refers to a ID of the selected channel.
SourceNumber Refers to the source number of the selected channel.
Description Refers to the description of the selected channel.

Parameters for Creating a Test Plan
This describes the parameters for creating a test plan. You can refer to this part when creating
a test plan and setting parameters.
GENEX Probe
14-307
Name Indicates the name of a test plan list.
Description Indicates the description of a test plan list.
ID Indicates the ID of a test plan.
Name Indicates the name of a test plan.
Property Indicates the property name of a test item.
Value Enables you to set values of Property.

Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan
This describes the parameters for configuring a test plan. You can refer to this part when
configuring a test plan and setting parameters.
Name Indicates the name of a test plan list.
ChannelID Indicates the channel ID that is used to select a test plan list.
Option Involves two fields: Yes and No. If this parameter is set to Yes, the
selected test plan lists are executable. If this parameter is set to No,
the selected test plan lists are inexecutable.

Parameters for Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time
This describes the parameters for browsing the speech evaluation view. You can refer to this
part when browsing the speech evaluation parameters and setting parameters.
Speech MOS Time Indicates the time of the current MOS.
Algorithm Indicates the algorithm used for the
current MOS.
Count Indicates the number of the times of
recording the MOS.
Current MOS Indicates the current MOS value.
Avg MOS Indicates the average MOS value.
Max MOS Indicates the maximum MOS value.
Min MOS Indicates the minimum MOS value.
Speech Events EventTime Indicates the time of the current event.
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
EventName Indicates the name of the current
event.
DeviceID Indicates the device ID.
ChannelID Indicates the channel ID.

14.5.5 FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the
corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the
using skills.
What Should I Do When the PSTN SQE Server Searching for the Channel Fails?
Symptom
The PSTN SQE Server cannot search for the channel after the telephone cable of the PSTN is
Possible Causes
l The telephone cable of the PSTN is not properly connected to the PC.
l The driver for the voice card is installed incorrectly.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the telephone cable of the PSTN is connected to the PC properly.
Step 2 Reinstall the driver for the voice card.
----End
What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?
Symptom
l Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed.
l Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that
is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.
Possible Causes
GENEX Probe
14-309
Symptom I l The version number of the Probe is incorrect.
l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205
PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU.
l The version number of the PHU is incorrect.
l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled.
Symptom II The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the
following reasons are excluded.
l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are
different.
l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS.
l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that
is connected to the PSTN SQE Server.
l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server
does not meet the requirement.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe.
Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version.
On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number
of the Probe.
Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU.
Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version.
For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU.
Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same.
1. On the main interface of the Probe, click . The Test Plan Control window is displayed.
View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item.
2. On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click . The Test Plan Editor window
is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties
of the SQE test item.
If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are
different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items.
----End
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
How to Uninstall the Driver for a Voice Card
Question
How to uninstall the driver for a voice card?
Answer
After the driver for the voice card is uninstalled, the voice card cannot be used properly, and the
PSTN SQE Server cannot automatically recognize the available channel.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Uninstall. The window for uninstalling the
driver for the voice card is displayed.
Step 2 Click Next.
Step 3 Click Uninstall.
Step 4 Click Finish after the driver is uninstalled.
----End
How to Uninstall the Main Program
Question
How to uninstall the main program?
Answer
After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are
deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall
Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Remove.
Step 3 Click Next.
----End
14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the
PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related
operations.
NOTE
The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal must be stopped before the SQE test is performed.
GENEX Probe
14-311
Call Mode The value can be either of the
following call modes:
l Outgoing, refers to the outgoing
call mode.
l Incoming, refers to the
incoming call mode.
Destination Number You can set this property when Call
Mode is set to Outgoing.
Indicates the destination
number.
Source Number You can set this property when Call
Mode is set to Incoming.
Indicates the source number.
Call Type The value can be either of the
following call types:
l Call By Call, refers to a short
call. The number of calls cannot
exceed the preset value.
l Continuous Call, refers to a long
call. The number of calls is
unlimited.
The default value is Call by Call.
Indicates a call type.
unit is second.
call, that is, the time from call
setup to normal call release.
Call Interval The default value is 5, and the unit
is second.
two calls, that is, the time
from the previous call
disconnection to the
Call Count You can set this property when Call
calls.
Setup Time The default value is 25, and the unit
is second.
for call setup.
After a call is originated, if the
call cannot be set up within
the defined period, the call
setup fails.
Exception Interval The default value is 20, and the unit
is second.
Indicates the call exception
14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
The Half duplex mode, that is
the half duplex interaction
mode is supported by the
PSTN SQE Server.
Language Of Sample - Indicates the speech type of a
speech sample.
The English speech type is
supported by the PSTN SQE
Server.
Sample Time The unit is second. Indicates the duration of
playing a speech sample.
The 5s duration is supported
by the PSTN SQE Server.
MOS Algorithm The value can be any of the
following algorithms:
l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.862.1.
Indicates the algorithm of the

14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when
configuring events of the speech quality evaluation.
OutgoingCall Outgoing call This event occurs when the channel originates a
call.
CallAlerting Call alerting This event occurs when the channel receives an
incoming call.
CallAnswer Call answer This event occurs when the channel receives an
incoming call.
CallConnected Call connected This event occurs when the channel is connected
to an incoming call successfully.
CallSetupFail Call setup failure This event occurs when the channel receives the
call disconnected event but does not receive the
CallConnected event.
GENEX Probe
14-313
CallComplete Call complete This event occurs when the channel receives the
call disconnected event reported from the voice
card in the case of a normal channel call
connection.
StartRecord Recording start Recording starts on the channel.
Recording Recording The channel is in recording state.
RecordComplete Recording complete Recording is complete on the channel.
StartPlay Playing start Playing starts on the channel.
Playing Playing The channel is in playing state.
PlayComplete Playing complete Playing is complete on the channel.
StartSync Synchronization test
start
This event occurs when the synchronization test
is performed for the channel and PHU after the
channel is connected to a call.
SyncComplete Synchronization test
complete
is successfully performed for the channel and
PHU.
SyncFailed Synchronization test
failure
fails to be performed for the channel and PHU.
ChannelDiscon-
nected
Channel
disconnected
The channel of the voice card is disconnected
from the PSTN.
PlayException Playing exception Failures and exceptions occur during the playing.
RecordException Record exception Failures and exceptions occur during the
recording.
TestStop Test stop This event occurs when the test is stopped.
VoiceQuality MOS -

14 Appendix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
15 Technical Support
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and
service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Hotline telephone: 0755-28560000; 4008302118
Fax: 0755-28560111
Email: support@huawei.com or PA@huawei.com
GENEX Probe
User Guide 15 Technical Support
15-1

GENEX Probe User Guide V200R003 04

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENEX Probe User Guide V200R003 04

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENEX Probe

You might also like